Bachelor of Physiotherapy (CBCS)

MGM INSTITUTE OF HEALTH SCIENCES
(Deemed to be University u/s 3 of UGC Act, 1956)

Grade 'A++' Accredited by NAAC
Sector-01, Kamothe, Navi Mumbai -410 209
Tel 022-27432471, 022-27432994, Fax 022 -27431094
E-mail: registrar@mgmuhs.com; Website :www.mgmuhs.com
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

(CBCS)
(with effect from 2019-2020 Batch onwards)
Curriculum for
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)
Amended upto AC-44/2022, Dated 09/12/2022

Amended History
1. Approved as per Resolution No. 3.2.2.11 (i), BOM – 57/2019, dated 26/04/2019
2. Amended upto Resolution No. 3.2.4.1, BOM – 59/2019, dated 11/11/2019
3. Amended upto Resolution No. 3.1.2.1, Resolution No. 3.1.2.8.iii, BOM-62/2020, dated
16/09/2020
4. Amended upto Resolution No. 4.3.2.2, Resolution No. 4.3.2.3.i, Resolution No. 4.3.2.3.ii,
Resolution No. 4.3.2.4, BOM-63/2021, dated 17/02/2021.
5. Amended upto Resolution No. 3.7, Resolution No. 3.8, Resolution No. 3.11 of AC-41/2021.
6. Amended upto Resolution No. 4.9, Resolution No. 4.10 & Resolution No. 10.4 of AC-
42/2022.
7. Amended upto Resolution No. 6 . 8 , Resolution No. 6.9 & Resolution No. 6 . 10 of
AC-44/2022.
Curriculum for Bachelor of Physiotherapy Program (BPT) AC 44/2022
MGM SCHOOL OF PHYSIOTHERAPY

(A constituent unit of MGM INSTITUTE OF HEALTH SCIENCES)
(Deemed to be University u/s 3 of UGC Act 1956)
Grade “A” Accredited by NAAC
Sector 1, Kamothe Navi Mumbai-410209
Contact: at.: 02227437866

Email: mgmschoolofphysiotherapy@gmail.com
Website: www.mgmuhs.com
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
CURRICULUM FOR
BACHELOR OF PHYSIOTHERAPY (BPT)

DEGREE PROGRAM
(2019)
1
MGM School of Physiotherapy, MGM Institute of Health Sciences, Navi Mumbai
Table of Contents
Vision and Mission of MGM Schoolof Physiotherapy ............................................................... 3

Descriptionof Degree ....................................................................................................................... 4
I. Preamble................................................................................................................................ 5
II. Introduction................................................................. Error! Bookmark notdefined.
III. Objectives of the Bachelor’s in Physiotherapy(BPT)program .................................... 8
IV. PhysiotherapyGraduateAttributes ................................................................................... 9
V. Qualification Descriptors for Bachelor of Physiotherapy(BPT)program ....................... 12
VI. Program Outcomes for Bachelor ofPhysiotherapyProgram............................................ 12
VII. Program Specific Outcomes for Bachelor ofPhysiotherapyProgram ........................... 14
VIII. Courselearningoutcomes ..................................................................................................... 18
XI. CBCS DefinitionandBenefits................................................................................................... 18
X. Semester System and Choice BasedCreditSystem .............................................................. 19
XI. Credit Value Per Course & StructureOf Syllabus ....................................................... 23
XII. Selection of Generic Elective and SkillsEnhancementCourses .................................. 26
XIII. Framework ofBPTCurriculum ......................................................................................... 27
XIV. Rules and Regulation for Examination of Bachelor of Physiotherapy Program
under MGM School of Physiotherapy offeringCBCSPattern ............................................... 37
XV. Computation of SGPAandCGPA .................................................................................... 54
XVII. CourseRegistration ............................................................................................................. 57
XVIII. Re - Entry after BreakofStudy ........................................................................................ 57
XI. Ranking ............................................................................................................................... 57
XII. Classification ofSuccessfulCandidates .............................................................................. 58
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-I(0-6 months) ...................................................59
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-II(7-12 months) ...............................................87
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)Semester-III (13-18months) ..............................................117
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)Semester-IV (19 -24 months) ..........................................145
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester- V(25-30 months) ............................................ 180
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester- VI(31-36 months) ......................................... 210
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester- VII(37-42 months) ........................................ 242
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester- VIII(43-48months)......................................... 281
Internship - Semester IX(49-54 months) ................................................................................. 318
2
Vision and Mission of MGM School of Physiotherapy
Vision
MGM Institute of Health Sciences aims to be a top ranking center of Excellence in Health
Science Education, Health Care and Research.
Mission
• Students graduating from the Institute will have the required skills to deliver the quality
health care to all the sections of the society with compassion and benevolence, without
prejudice or discrimination at an affordable cost.
• As a Research Centre, it shall focus on finding better, safer and affordable ways of
diagnosing, treating and preventing diseases. In doing so, it will maintain highest ethical
standard.
3
Description of Degree
Name of the Degree Offered: Bachelor in Physiotherapy (BPT)
Duration of Program: 4 ½ years (4 years Academics + 6 months’ compulsory rotator

Internship).
Program pattern:
First Semester August

Second Semester February
Third Semester August
Fourth Semester February
Fifth Semester August
Sixth Semester February
Seventh Semester August
Eight Semester February
Ninth Semester August
Eligibility Criteria:
• He/she has passed the Higher Secondary (10+2) with Science (PCB) or equivalent
examination recognized by any Indian University or a duly constituted Boardwith
pass marks in Physics, Chemistry, and Biology.
• Minimum percentage of marks: 50%aggregate.
Medium of Instruction:
English will be the medium of instruction for all the subjects of study and for examinations.
4
I. Preamble
Physiotherapy or Physical Therapy (PT) is a Movement Science with an established theoretical

and scientific base and widespread clinical applications in the Prevention, Restoration &
Rehabilitation, Maintenance and Promotion of optimal physical function. Physiotherapists
diagnose and manage movement dysfunction and enhance physical and functional abilities.
This physical dysfunction may be the sequelae of involvement of any of the systems like
Musculoskeletal, Neurological, Cardiovascular, Respiratory or other body systems.
These practitioners contribute to society and the profession through practice, teaching,
administration, and the discovery and application of new knowledge about physiotherapy
experiences of sufficient excellence and breadth by research to allow the acquisition and
application of essential knowledge, skills, and behaviors as applied to the practice of
physiotherapy. Physiotherapist (PT) are autonomous, effective and compassionate
professionals, who practice collaboratively in a variety of healthcare set ups such as neonatal
to geriatric, from critical care to community fitness to sports training. Emerging graduate and
post graduate students are required to demonstrate a substantial knowledge base, possess skills
related to Physiotherapy practices, possess high emotional quotient to address family health and
meet community responsibilities, demonstrate gender sensitivity and socio- culturally relevant
competence. They should be aware of legal issues governing professional practice andfollow
evidence based clinical practices.
The Chairman, University Grants Commission (UGC) via letter D.O.No.F.1- 1/2015 (CM)
dated 8th January, 2015, communicated the decision of the Ministry of Human Resources
Development to implement Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) from the academic session
2015-2016 in all Indian Universities to enhance academic standards and quality in higher
education through innovation and improvements in curriculum, teaching- learning process,
examination and evaluation systems.
Diversity in the system of higher education, and multiple approaches followed by universities
towards curriculum, examination, evaluation and grading system has led to the lack of
uniformity. While the Universities must have the flexibility and freedom in designing the
examination and evaluation methods that best fits the curriculum, syllabi and teaching–
learning methods, there is a need to devise a sensible system for awarding the grades based
on the performance of students. Presently the performance of the students is reported using the
conventional system of marks secured in the examinations or grades or both. The conversion
from marks to letter grades and the letter grades used vary widely across the Universities in the
country. This creates difficulty for the academia and the
employerstounderstandandinfertherelativeperformanceofthestudentsgraduatingfrom
5
different universities and colleges in the country. Hence the UGC has recommended the
implementation of CBCS in Universities.
The grading system is considered to be better than the conventional marks system and hence
it has been followed in the top institutions in India and abroad. Introduction of a uniform
grading system will facilitate student mobility across institutions within and across countries
and also enable potential employers to assess the performance of students. To bring in the
desired uniformity, in grading system and method for computing the cumulative grade point
average (CGPA) based on the performance of students in the examinations, the UGC has
formulated the guidelines and communicated it to all Universities for adoption.
UGC, subsequently, in its notification No.F.1-1/2015 (Sec.) dated 10/4/15 has provided a set
of model curricula and syllabi for CBCS program under the Faculties of Arts, Humanities and
Sciences providing the academic flexibility for Universities to make changes/ innovation up
to 20% in the syllabi of these program. It has also specified that all UG program should be for
a minimum of three years’ duration. UG Program with 120-140 credits in the 180 annual
teaching days’ system being designated as regular B. A/B.Sc./B.Com., B.B. A etc., Those UG
programs with 140-160 credits or more with fully supported higher number of annual teachingdays
can be designated as B. A (Hons)/ B.Sc.(Hons) /B.B. A(Hons)/B. Com(Hons) etc., Further, the
University Grants Commission encourages higher education institutes to integrate learning
outcome based framework into the curriculum for undergraduate education which isconsidered
critical for enabling effective participation of young people in knowledge production,
participation in knowledge economy, improving national competiveness in aglobalized world
and equipping young people with skills relevant to global and national standards. Outcome
oriented curriculum enhances employability of graduates and enables translation of academic
research into innovations for practical use in society and economy.
Learning outcomes-based approach specifies what graduates completing BPT program are
expected to know, understand and able to do after completing the program. The BPT degree is
awarded based on demonstration of achievement of outcomes in terms of knowledge, skills,
attitudes and values and academic standards expected of the graduate. The expected learning
outcomes help define the graduate attributes, qualification descriptors, program learning
outcomes, course learning outcomes, curriculum planning, design, delivery and review of the
academic program.
MGM Institute of Health Sciences, accredited A grade, has taken a proactive step in adopting
the CBCS system for Physiotherapy programs implemented by its constituent unit, MGM
School of Physiotherapy.
The duration of Bachelor in Physiotherapy (BPT) program is four and half years offering 184
credits with well-defined learning outcomes. The BPT CBCS Curriculum has been designed
6
with reference to existing curriculum of state Universities within the country, generic guidelines
of University Grant Commission, global guidelines for curriculum, input from experts in the
field of Physiotherapy and feedback from stakeholders namely students, teachers, alumni,
employers and professionals to remain in consonance with the spirit of choice based credit
system and learning objective based curriculum.
7
II. Introduction:
Physiotherapy is a branch of modern medical science which includes examination, assessment,

interpretation, physical diagnosis, planning and execution of treatment and advice to any person
for the purpose of preventing, correcting, alleviating and limiting dysfunction, acute and chronic
bodily malfunction including life saving measures via chest physiotherapy in the intensive care
unit, curing physical disorders or disability, promoting physical fitness, facilitating healing and
pain relief and treatment of physical and psychological disorders through modulating
psychological and physical response using physical agents, activities and devices including
exercise, mobilization, manipulations, therapeutic ultrasound, electrical and thermal agents and
electrotherapy for diagnosis, treatment and prevention.
(Definition as per the Maharashtra State Council for Occupational therapy & Physiotherapy,
2004)
`Physiotherapist’ is a qualified professional who has acquired all the above mentioned
knowledge and skills for entry into practice after being awarded a bachelor degree in the subject
of “Physiotherapy” from a recognized institute affiliated to the University conducting a fulltime
course not less than four years and six months of internship.
III. Objectives of the Bachelor’s in Physiotherapy (BPT) program
This program is formulated to enable student to gain adequate knowledge, skills and clinical
hands on experience leading to an ability to establish independent professional practice. The
overall content of the curriculum focuses on learning experiences and clinical education
experiences for each student that encompasses the following.
1. Ethical, evidence-based, efficient Physiotherapy treatment of adult as well as pediatric

patients/clients with an array of conditions (e.g. musculoskeletal, neuromuscular,
cardiovascular/pulmonary, integumentary etc.) across the lifespan and the continuum of
care, to all people irrespective of gender, caste, nation, states and territories, region, minority
groups or other groups.
2. Ability to prevent movement dysfunction or maintain/restore optimal function and quality
of life in individuals with movement disorders.
3. Ability to operate as independent practitioners, as well as members of health service
provider teams, act as first contact practitioners, from whom patients/clients may seek direct
services without referral from another health care professional.
4. Ability to promote the health and wellbeing of individuals and the general public/society,
emphasizing the importance of physical activity and exercise.
8
5. Prevent impairments, activity limitations, participatory restrictions and disabilities in

individuals at risk of altered movement behaviors due to health factors, socio-economic
stressors, environmental factors and lifestyle factors.
6. Provide interventions/treatment to restore integrity of body systems essential for movement,
maximize function and recuperation, minimize incapacity, and enhance the quality of life,
independent living and workability in individuals and groups of individuals with altered
movement behaviors resulting from impairments, activity limitations, participatory restrictions
and disabilities.
7. Ability to modify environmental, home and work access and barriers to ensure full
participation in one’s normal and expected societal roles.
8. Become an essential part of the health and community/welfare services delivery systems,
practice independently of other health care/service providers and also within
interdisciplinary rehabilitation/habilitation programs, independent professional practice in
self-employed set up or employment at the multiple settings such as hospitals, nursing
homes, institutions catering services to specific conditions (like paraplegic /geriatric
homes), primary as well as rural & urban health care set up, community health , domiciliary
practice like residential areas, education & research centers, fitness/wellness centers like
health clubs, occupational health centers g]- Schools including special schools, geriatric
care units, and others.
9. Ability to carry out research projects
IV. Physiotherapy Graduate Attributes
The following graduate attributes are considered as “essential requirements” to strengthen

abilities of a Physiotherapist for widening knowledge, skills and abilities through meaningful
learning experiences, and critical thinking. These attributes are necessary for completing the
professional education enabling each graduate to subsequently enter clinical practice. The
purpose of this curriculum is to delineate the cognitive, affective and psychomotor skills deemed
essential for completion of this program and to perform as a competent physiotherapistwho will
be able to evaluate, plan & execute physiotherapy treatment independently. Some of the
characteristic attributes that a graduate should demonstrate are as follows:
1. Disciplinary knowledge: The student must demonstrate comprehensive knowledge and
understanding of curricular content that form the program. The student must
demonstrate cognitive learning skills, ability to receive, interpret, remember, reproduce
and use information in the cognitive, psychomotor, and affective domains of learning
to solve problems, evaluate work, and generate new ways of processing or categorizing
similar information listed in course objectives.
2. Psychomotor Skills: Physiotherapy students must demonstrate psychomotor skills of
locomotor ability to access lecture halls, practical laboratory and clinics.
9
a. They must possess ability to move with reasonable swiftness in emergency situations to
protect the patient (e.g. from falling).
b. They should be competent to perform physical tasks such as positioning patients to
effectively perform evaluation, manipulate assessment tools used for evaluation of joint
mobility, muscle strength, testing musculoskeletal, neurological and cardiorespiratory
systems.
c. Students should be competent to perform risk assessment, safely and effectively guide,
facilitate, inhibit, and resist movement and motor patterns through physical facilitation
and inhibition techniques (including ability to give timely urgent verbal feedback),
perform transfers, positioning, exercise, mobilization techniques and use assistive
devices and perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation.
d. Students must possess fine motor skills to legibly record thoughts for written
assignments (including diagrams) and tests, document evaluations, patient care notes,
referrals, etc. in standard medical charts in hospital/clinical settings in a timely manner and
consistent with the acceptable norms of clinical settings and safely use electrotherapy
modalities and fine mobilization techniques.
e. Students must possess visual acuity to read patient’s treatment chart, observe
demonstrations, visual training, receive visual information from patients, treatment
environment and clues of treatment tolerance. Auditory acuity to distinguish between
normal and abnormal sounds, engage in conversation with patients and retrieve
meaningful information relevant to patientcare.
3. Communication skills: The student must be able to express thoughts and ideas
effectively in writing and verbally, communicate with others using appropriate media,
share views, demonstrate ability to listen carefully, write analytically, present complex
information in a clear, and concise manner. Student must be able to effectively
communicate information and safety concerns with other students, teachers, patients,
peers, staff and personnel by asking questions, giving information, explaining conditions
and procedures, or teaching home programs. They should be able to receive and send verbal
communication in life threatening situations in a timely manner within theacceptable
norms of clinical settings. Physiotherapy education presents exceptional challenges in
the volume and breadth of required reading and the necessity to impart information to
others. Students must be able to communicate quickly, effectively and efficiently in oral
and written English with all members of the health care team.
4. Critical thinking: Student should be able to apply analytical thought to a body of
knowledge, analyze based on empirical evidence, draw relevant assumptions or
implications, formulate arguments, critically evaluate policies and theoretical
framework and formulate a scientific approach to knowledge development. They should
be able to identify structural and functional impairments, identify contextual factors
influencing function, critically appraise treatment options and implement care
10
that is socio-culturally relevant to each patient.

5. Problem Solving: Students must demonstrate capacity to extrapolate theoretical
knowledge and apply competencies gained to solve non- familiar problems and real life
situations.
6. Analytical reasoning: To a certain extent, students should be able to evaluate reliability
and relevance of evidence, synthesize data, draw valid conclusions and support them
with evidence.
7. Research – Related Skills: Students should be able to define research problem,
formulate hypothesis, manage resources, analyze and interpret data, explore cause –
effect relationships, plan and execute a report, present results of the experiment and
demonstrate a sense of scientific enquiry, reflective thinking, self-directed learning and
creativity.
8. Co-operation /Team Work: Students should demonstrate the ability to work
effectively and respectfully with a multi-disciplinary team, facilitate co-operative and
coordinated effort for the common cause in various clinical settings.
9. Socio-cultural and multicultural competency: Knowledge of socio-cultural values,
attitudes and beliefs relevant to a particular society, nation and global perspectives must be
present to effectively engage and identify with diverse groups.
10. Awareness of moral, ethical and legal issues: Students must demonstrate moral
/ethical values in conduct, awareness of ethical issues related to patient care, work
practices, refraining from malpractice, unethical Behavior, falsification, plagiarism,
misinterpretation of data, non-adherence to intellectual property rights, adhering to
truthful, unbiased actions in all aspects of work without discrimination based on age,
race, gender, sexual preference, disease, mental status, lifestyle, opinions or personal
values.
11. Leadership qualities: Students must demonstrate ability for task allocation,
organization of task elements, setting direction, formulating an inspiring vision, team
building, to achieve a vision, engaging, knowledge and respect individual values and
opinions in order to foster harmonious working relationships with colleagues, peers, and
patients.
12. Ongoing Learning: Students must demonstrate ability to acquire knowledge and skills
through ongoing learning, participation in continuous education programs, engaging in
self-paced, self- directed learning aimed at personal development, meeting social and
cultural objectives, skill development, adapting to changing environment and workplace
requirements and challenges.
11
V. Qualification Descriptors for Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)program
Students who complete the four and half years Bachelor of Physiotherapy program will
be awarded a bachelor’s degree. Expected outcomes that a student must demonstrate
include:
1. Systematic, extensive and coherent knowledge and skill in Physiotherapy and its
applications including critical understanding of established theories, principles
and concepts, knowledge of advanced and emerging issues in Physiotherapy,
skills in musculoskeletal, neurological, cardio-respiratory Physiotherapy, recent
advances and research in Physiotherapy evaluation and treatment procedures.
2. Comprehensive information about electrotherapy modalities, exercise equipment,
advanced learning material, skills and techniques.
3. Skill in collecting quantitative and qualitative data, analysis and interpretation of
data using appropriate methodology and communicating results to scientific
community and beneficiaries for formulating appropriate evidence based health
care solutions.
4. Address self-learning needs related to current and emerging areas of study, use
research and professional material, apply knowledge to new concepts and
unfamiliar areas and seek solutions in real life situations.
5. Demonstrate profession related transferable skills relevant to patient care and
employment opportunities.
VI. Program Outcomes for Bachelor of Physiotherapy Program
Students who complete four and half year’s undergraduate program in Physiotherapy would
earn a Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) degree. The learning outcomes that a student should be
able to demonstrate on completion of a degree level program include academic, personal,
behavioral, entrepreneurial and social competencies. It is expected that a student completing a
particular course must have a level of understanding of the subject and its sub-areas in
consonance with the learning outcomes mentioned at the end of that course. Program learning
outcomes include Physiotherapy specific skills, generic skills, transferable global skills and
competencies that prepare the student for employment, higher education, and research thereby
developing students as contributing members for overall benefit to the society.
12
Revised as per Resolution no 4.10 of AC-42/2022 dated 26/04/2022

The program learning outcomes relating to BPT degree program are summarized below:
To demonstrate behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while

PO 1
communicating with patients, relatives, society at large and co-professionals
PO 2 To develop healthy Physiotherapist – Patient relationship
To demonstrate and relate moral, ethical values and legal aspects concerned with
PO 3
Physiotherapy management
To demonstrate academic skills and knowledge related to understanding the
PO 4 structural and functional of human body and applied anatomy, physiology in
physiotherapy practice.
PO 5 To apply knowledge of pathological, pharmacological and biopsychosocial aspects

of medical/surgical conditions in context with Physiotherapy.
To apply knowledge of biomechanics of human movement in musculoskeletal,
PO 6 neurological and cardio-respiratory conditions in planning, recommending, and
executing Physiotherapy management.
To outline and implement Physiotherapy management by co-relating assessment
and examination skills of clinical subjects like Orthopedics, General Surgery,
PO 7
Medicine, Neurology, Pediatrics, Dermatology & Gynecology & Obstetrics,
Community Medicine and Sociology
To demonstrate skill in maneuvers of exercise therapy, passive movements, massage,
stretching, strengthening, ergonomic applications, electrotherapy, manual therapy
PO 8 and various movement therapy techniques. Students will integrate Physiotherapy
evaluation skills including electro diagnosis in musculoskeletal, neurological,
cardiovascular and pulmonary conditions, community based rehabilitation, industrial
rehabilitation, pediatric, geriatric, women's health, sports
and other conditions.
To describe and analyze concepts of energy conservation, global warming and
PO 9
pollution and justify optimal use of available resources.
To demonstrate ability of critical thinking, scientific enquiry, experiential
PO 10 learning, personal finance, entrepreneurship and managerial skills related to task
in day-to-day work for personal & societal growth.
To demonstrate and apply basic computer applications for data management, data
PO 11
storage, generating data bases and for research purposes.
13
VII. Program Specific Outcomes for Bachelor of Physiotherapy Program
Physiotherapist as a Professional
Reflect, learn and teach others
Acquire, assess, apply and integrate new knowledge, learn to adapt to changing
PSO 1 circumstances and ensure that patients receive the highest level of professional care.
Establish the foundations for lifelong learning and continuing professional

PSO 2 development, including a professional development portfolio containing
reflections, achievements and learning needs.
Continually and systematically reflect on practice and, whenever necessary,
PSO 3
integrate that reflection into action, using improvement techniques and audit.
Manage time and prioritize tasks, and work autonomously when necessary and
PSO 4
appropriate.
Recognize own personal and professional limits and seek help from colleagues
PSO 5
and supervisors when necessary.
Function effectively as a mentor and teacher including contributing to the
PSO 6 appraisal, assessment and review of colleagues, providing effective feedback, and
taking advantage of opportunities to develop these skills.
14
Learn and work effectively within a multi-professional team
Analyze the roles and expertise of health and social care professionals in the
PSO 7 context of working and functioning as a multi-professional team to the delivery of
safe and high-quality care.
Demonstrate ability to work with colleagues in ways that best serve the interests
PSO 8 of patients, passing on information and handing over care, demonstrating
flexibility, adaptability and a problem-solving approach.
Demonstrate ability to build team capacity and positive working relationships and
PSO 9 undertake various team roles including leadership and the ability to accept
leadership by others.
Physiotherapist as a Scholar and a Scientist
Physiotherapy graduate will be able to apply biomedical scientific principles, method and
knowledge relating to: anatomy, physiology, biochemistry, cell biology, pathology, and
psychology to Physiotherapy clinical practice.
The graduate will be able to:
Explain normal human structure and functions, examine the correlation between
PSO 10
structural and functional impairment.
Explain the scientific basis for common musculoskeletal, neurological, cardio-
respiratory, women’s health related, geriatric and sports related disorders, compare
PSO 11
and contrast Physiotherapy treatment techniques applicable in relevant
case scenarios.
Justify selection of appropriate clinical examination and investigation for
PSO 12
common clinical conditions and critically analyze clinical findings
Plan appropriate rehabilitation goals for common disorders and design
PSO 13
management protocols.
Examine the role of environmental and occupational hazards in ill-health and
PSO 14
discuss ways to mitigate their effects.
15
Apply scientific method and approaches to Physiotherapy research
Plan, and conduct research experiments to evaluate current practices and design
PSO 15 innovative physiotherapy interventions, based on evidence, to provide highest level
of healthcare.
Critically appraise the results of relevant qualitative and quantitative studies as
PSO 16
reported in scientific literature.
PSO 17 Outline the ethical issues involved in clinical research.
Physiotherapist as a Practitioner
The graduate will be able to
Record a patient’s medical history, including family and social history;

PSO 18
communicate with relatives or other caretakers where ever appropriate.
List patients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options,
PSO 19 their views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be
involved in decision-making regarding their care and treatment.
Assess structural, functional impairments, compare performance and capacity
PSO 20 through clinical examination and risk evaluation, prioritize goals, recommend
Physiotherapy treatment and carry out independent consultation with a patient.
Examine ethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
PSO 21 demonstrating community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-
cultural competency
Respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients
PSO 22 to reach decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse
or limit treatment.
16
Communicate effectively with patients and colleagues in a health context
Communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with patients, caregivers, and

PSO 23 colleagues from the medical and other professions, by listening, sharing and
responding.
Communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with individuals and groups
PSO 24 regardless of their age, social, cultural or ethnic backgrounds or their disabilities
including when English is not the patient’s first language.
Communicate by spoken, written and electronic methods (including medical
PSO 25
records), and be aware of other methods of communication used by patients.
Communicate appropriately in difficult circumstances, such as when breaking bad
news, and when discussing sensitive issues, such as alcohol consumption, smoking or
PSO 26
obesity, with difficult or violent patients, people with mental illness
and with vulnerable population
Provide immediate care in medical emergencies
Assess and recognize the severity of a clinical presentation and a need for
PSO 27
immediate emergency care.
Apply basic first aid and cardio-pulmonary resuscitation or direct other team
PSO 28
members to carry out resuscitation.
.
Use information effectively in a health context
Write accurate, legible and complete clinical records, use computers and other
PSO 29 information systems for data storage, retrieval, prepare health promotion
material for patients, research and education.
Demonstrate confidentiality, use data protection legislation and codes of
PSO 30
practice in all dealings with information.
17
VIII. Course learning outcomes: are defined within the course content that makes up the
program. The courses are structured such that learning is vertically and horizontally integrated
into the curriculum. The CBCS curriculum offers a certain degree of flexibility in taking
courses. Course learning is aligned to the program learning outcomes and graduate attributes.
The BPT program is inclusive of 9 semesters inclusive of 54 core courses and 28 weeks of
compulsory rotator internship, (122 Credits), 5 ability enhancement compulsory courses
(AECC-12 credits), 6 ability enhancement elective courses (AEEC–6 credits) and 12discipline
specific skill electives (SEC–12 credits) and 2 generic electives (GEC–2 credits). In semester V
to VIII practical training will place emphasis on specific skill training on healthyadults as well as
patient in order to gain core competences. Supervised clinical training (CLT)is included in each
semester (30credits).
Evaluation of the courses vary as appropriate to the subject area, inclusive of formative and
summative assessment, ongoing comprehensive assessment in the form of closed and open book
tests, objectively structured practical examination (OSPE), objectively structured clinical
examination (OSCE), problem based assignments, practical assignments, observation of
practical skills, project reports, case reports, Objectively Structured Viva Examination(OSVE),
seminars, essays, and others.
IX. CBCS Definition and Benefits:
Choice Based Credit System is a flexible system of learning. The distinguishing features of
CBCS are the following:
• It permits students to learn at their own pace.
• The electives are selected from a wide range of elective courses offered by the other
University Departments.
• Undergo additional courses and acquire more than the required number of credits.
• Adopt an inter-disciplinary and intra-disciplinary approach in learning.
• Make best use of the available expertise of the faculty across the departments or
disciplines
• Has an inbuilt evaluation system to assess the analytical and creativity skills of students
in addition to the conventional domain knowledge assessment pattern.
9.1 Definitions of Key Words:

i. Academic Year: Two consecutive (one odd + one even) semesters constitute one
academic year.
ii. The CBCS provides choice for students to select from the prescribed courses (core,
elective or minor or soft skill courses).
iii. Course: Usually referred to, as “papers” is a component of a programme. All courses
need not carry the same weight. The courses should define learning objectives and
learning outcomes. A course may be designed to comprise lectures / tutorials /
18
laboratory work/ outreach activities/ project work/ Objectively Structured Viva

Examination(OSVE) / seminars/ term papers/assignments/ presentations/ self-study etc.
or a combination of some of these.
iv. Credit Based Semester System (CBSS): Under the CBSS, the requirement for
awarding a degree or diploma or certificate is prescribed in terms of number of credits to be
completed by the students.
v. Credit: A unit by which the course work is interpreted. It functions the number of hours
of instructions required per week. One credit is equivalent to one hour of teaching
(lecture or tutorial) or two hours of practical work/field work per week.
vi. Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA): It is a measure of overall cumulative
performance of a student over all semesters. The CGPA is the sum total of the credit
points obtained by the student in various courses in all semesters and the sum of the
total credits of all courses in all the semesters.
vii. Grade Point: It is a numerical marking allotted to each letter grade on a 10-point scale.
viii. Letter Grade: It is an appreciated point of the student’s performance in a selected
course. Grades are denoted by letters O, A+, A, B, C and RAx.
ix. Programme: An educational programme leading to award of a Degree certificate.
x. Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA): It is index of performance of all performance
of work in a semester. Its total credit points obtained by a student in various courses
registered in a semester and the total course credits taken during that semester. It shall
be expressed up to two decimal places.
xi. Semester: Each semester will extend for 6 months and will consist of minimum of
130 teaching/learning days, exclusive of examinations and holidays. The odd semesters
will be scheduled from August to January and even semesters from Februaryto July.
xii. Transcript or Grade Card or Certificate: Based on the grades earned, a grade
certificate shall be issued to all the registered students after every semester. The grade
certificate will display the course details (code, title, number of credits, grade secured)
along with SGPA of that semester and CGPA earned till that semester.
X. Semester System and Choice Based Credit System
The semester system accelerates the teaching-learning process and enables vertical and
horizontal mobility of students in learning. The credit based semester system provides
flexibility in designing curriculum and assigning credits based on the course content and hours
of teaching. The choice based credit system enables students to take courses of their choice,
learn at their own pace, undergo additional courses and acquire more than the required credits,
and adopt an interdisciplinary approach to learning.
19
10.1. Semesters:
An academic year consists of two semesters:
Semesters UG
Odd Semesters
th August -January
1st ,3rd,5th,7
Even Semesters
2nd, 4 th, 6th ,8
th February-July
10.2 Credits:
Credit defines the coefficient of contents/syllabus prescribed for a course and determines the
number of hours of instruction required per week. Credits will be assigned in each course on the
basis of number of lectures/ practical/tutorial/ laboratory work and other forms of learning
required, to complete the course contents in a 15-20-weekschedule:
a. 1 credit = 1 hour of lecture per week
b. 3 credits = 3 hours of instruction per week
 Credits will be assigned on the basis of the lectures (L) / Clinical Training (CT)
/ laboratory work (P) / Research Project (RP) and other forms of learning in a
15-20-week schedule L - One credit for one-hour lecture per week
c. P - One credit for every two hours of laboratory or practical
d. CT - One credit for every three hours of Clinical training/Clinical rotation/posting
e. RP - One credit for every two hours of Research Project per week – Maximum Credit
20-25
Lecture - L Tutorial - T Practical - P Clinical Research

Training/ Project–
Rotation– RP*
CT/CR
1 Credit 1 Hour 2 Hours 2 Hours 3 Hours 2 Hours
RP* Maximum Credit 20 – 25 / Semester
a. Types of Courses: Courses in the programme are of three kinds:
o Core Course
o Elective Course
o Ability Enhancement Course
20
1. Core Course: A course, which should compulsorily be studied by a candidate as a basic

requirement to complete the program, is termed as a Core course. There are CoreTheory
(CT) and Core Practical (CP) Courses in every semester.
2. Elective Course: A course which can be chosen from a very specific or advanced
subject of study or which provides an extended scope or which enables exposure to some
other domain or expertise, is called an Elective Course. Elective courses may be of two
types
2a. Discipline Specific Skill Elective (SEC) Course: Elective courses offered by the main
subject of study are referred to as Discipline Specific Elective. The Institute may also offer
discipline related Elective courses of interdisciplinary nature. An elective may be
“Discipline Specific Electives (DSE)” gazing on those courses which add intellectual
efficiency to the students.
2b. Generic Elective (GEC) Course: An elective course chosen generally from an
unrelated discipline/subject, with an intention to seek exposure is called a Generic Elective.
Dissertation / Project: An Elective/Core course designed to acquire special / advanced

knowledge, such as supplement study / support study to a project work, and a candidate studies
such a course on his own with an advisory support by a teacher / faculty member is called
dissertation / project.
3. Ability Enhancement Courses (AEC): The Ability Enhancement (AE) Courses may be of
two kinds: Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses (AECC) and Skill Enhancement
Courses(SEC).
“AECC” courses are the courses based upon the content that leads to Knowledge
enhancement (i) Environmental Science and (ii) English/MIL Communication. These
are mandatory for all disciplines.
Skill Enhancement Courses (SEC): SEC courses are value-based and/or skill-based
and are aimed at providing hands-on-training, competencies, skills, Indian and foreign
languages etc. These courses may be chosen from a pool of courses designed to provide
value-based and/or skill-based knowledge.
21
2.4 Assigning Credit Hours Per Course: While there is flexibility for the departments in
allocation of credits to various courses offered, the general formula would be:
• All core courses will be restricted to a maximum of 4 credits
• All electives will be restricted to a maximum of 3 credits
• All ability enhancement courses will be restricted to a maximum of 2 credits
• Projects will be restricted to a maximum of 3 credits
Any course requiring more than 4 credit hours for covering the syllabus content will bedivided
into two courses i.e., 6 Credits Course 1 - 3 credits + Course 2 – 3 credits or 6 Credits Course
1 Theory - 4 credits + Course 2 Lab – 2 credits.
2.5 Assigning total Credits for a Program: The UGC, in its notification No.F.1-1/2015 (Sec.)
dated 10/4/15 has provided a set of Model curricula and syllabi for CBCS programs. In
conformation with this notification, the BPT program credits for 41/2 years’ duration will be
184 credits in total, inclusive of clinical rotation/clinical training and research project.
22
XI. Credit Value Per Course & Structure of Syllabus:
To ensure uniformity in assigning the credits to a course, a structured and unitized syllabus shall
be observed. For UG & PG Programs each course will be provided a structured syllabus in the
following format:
a) Title of the Course
b) Learning Objectives
c) Units for
Category Credits BPT Syllabus units

Core Theory (CT) 3–4 6
Core Practical(CP) 2–4 10- 15 experiments/ cases/ spotters
Ability enhancement
2 4
(AE)
Skills enhancement
(SE)- theory or 2 4
Practical’s
General Elective 2 2
Clinical Training Structured monitoring and
3-15
(CLT) assessment
Structured monitoring and
Research Projects (RP) 18-25
assessment
Structured monitoring and
Internship (IN) Min.15
Assessment
d) Syllabus Content
e) Learning Outcomes
f) References
a. Text Books –2
b. Reference Books –2
c. Web Resources – 2 Web Portals
Minimum credit allocation will be as per requirements of each course curriculum.
23
Structure of CBCS BPT Curriculum

Semester I Semester II Semester III
Course
Course Code Core Course Course Code Core Course Core Course
Code
Human Anatomy-I Human Anatomy II Kinesiology
BPT001 BPT007 BPT015
CT -CT CT
Clinical
Human Anatomy-I Human Anatomy II- Applications of
CP CP Kinesiology
CP
Human Physiology-I Human Physiology Electrotherapy
CT –II CT CT
Human Physiology
Human Physiology-I Electrotherapy
BPT004 BPT010 –II BPT018
CP CP
CP
Kinesiotherapy-I Kinesiotherapy-II- Pharmacology
CT CT CT
Psychology &
Kinesiotherapy-I Kinesiotherapy-II-
BPT006 BPT012 BPT020 Psychiatry
CP CP
CT
BPTCLT00
BPTCLT001 Clinical Training BPT013 Thermal Agents CT 3 Clinical Training
BPT014 Thermal Agents CP
BPTCLT002 Clinical Training
Semester IV Semester V Semester VI
Course
Course Code Core Course Course Code Core Course Core Course
Code
Medical and Medical and
Physiotherapy Skills surgical aspects of surgical aspects
CT Musculoskeletal of Neurological
conditions disorders
Medical and
surgical aspects of
Physiotherapy
Cardiovascular,
Physiotherapy Skills for women and
BPT022 BPT029 Respiratory BPT034
CP child care
disorders and
Theory
general medical
conditions
Diagnosis of Physiotherapy
Electro-Diagnostics movement for women and
CT dysfunction and child care
ICF Theory Practical
Diagnosis of Public Health
Electro-Diagnostics
BPT024 BPT031 movement BPT036 and preventive
CP
dysfunction and Physiotherapy
24
ICF Practical Theory

BPT025 Pathology & BPT032 Public Health BPT037 Public Health
Microbiology and preventive
CT Physiotherapy
Practical
BPT026 Sociology BPTCLT005 Clinical Training BPT038 Physiotherapy in
CT Geriatric care
Theory
BPT027 Research BPT039 Physiotherapy in
Methodology Geriatric care
CT Practical
BPTCLT004 Clinical Training BPT040 Introduction to
Evidence Based
Physiotherapy
Theory
BPT041 Introduction to
Evidence Based
Physiotherapy
Practical
Semester VII Semester VIII Semester IX
Course Code Core Course Course Code Core Course Course Code Core Course
BPT042 Musculoskeletal BPT048 Musculoskeletal BPTCLT009 Core Clinical

Physiotherapy I Physiotherapy II Training
Theory Theory
BPT043 Musculoskeletal BPT049 Musculoskeletal BPTCLT010 Core Clinical
Physiotherapy I Physiotherapy II Training
Practical Practical
BPT044 Cardiovascular and BPT050 Cardiovascular and BPTCLT011 Core Clinical
Respiratory Respiratory Training
Physiotherapy I Physiotherapy II
Theory Theory
BPT045 Cardiovascular and BPT051 Cardiovascular and BPTCLT012 Core Clinical
Respiratory Respiratory Training
Physiotherapy I Physiotherapy II
Practical Practical
BPT046 Neurophysiotherapy BPT052 Neurophysiotherapy BPT055 Research Project
I Theory II Theory
BPT047 Neurophysiotherapy BPT053 Neurophysiotherapy
I Practical II Practical
BPTCLT007 Clinical Training BPT054 Research Project
Synopsis
25
XII. Selection of Generic Elective and Skills Enhancement Courses:
The students should apply in the prescribed format and should reach the CBCS coordinator
before the start of the semester. All candidates must register for the courses of the said semester.
List of Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses AECC ( Credits=3)

SrNo Elective Code Title Semester
1 AECC001 Biophysics and medical electronics 1
2 AECC002 Environmental Science I 1
3 AECC003 English and Communication Skills 1
4 AECC004 Biochemistry 2
5 AECC005 Environmental Science II 2
List of Ability Enhancement Elective Course (Credits=2)

Sr No Elective Code Title Semester
1 AEEC001 Ergonomics and health promotion 3
2 AEEC002 Personality development & Learning 3
styles
3 AEEC003 Biostatistics and SPSS 4
4 AEEC004 Medical ethics, Human rights and 4
professional values
5 AEEC005 Diagnostic Radiology 5
6 AEEC006 Pulmonary Function Test 5
List of Generic Elective Course (Credits=2)

Sr No Elective Code Title Semester
1 GEC001 2D motion capture 5
2 GEC002 Device Innovation and IPR 5
List of Skill Based Discipline Specific Elective Courses (Credits=2)

Sr Elective Code Title Semester
No
1 SEC001 Indian Human Movement Science I–Yoga 3
2 SEC002 Indian Human Movement Science II– 4
Dance & Sports
3 SEC003 Clinical Biomechanics 6
4 SEC004 Vestibular rehabilitation 6
26
5 SEC005 Hand rehabilitation 7

6 SEC006 Foot rehabilitation 7
7 SEC007 Aquatic Therapy 7
8 SEC008 Sports Physiotherapy 7
9 SEC009 Neurodevelopmental techniques 8
10 SEC010 PT in ICU 8
11 SEC011 Splinting & Bracing 8
12 SEC012 Integumentary Physiotherapy 8
Elective courses from Swayam/ NPTEL platform [www. https://swayam.gov.in &http://nptel.ac.in]

maybe included in the above pool as and when needed
27
XIII. Framework of BPT Curriculum
BPT CBCS Curriculum Framework applicable for batch admitted in 2019-2020 (BOM 63/2020)
Semester I
Semester I ( 20 weeks teaching : 36 hrs per week )
Credits per week Hours per week Hours per semester Marks
Course Code Course Title Course Description Semester Semester

Total Total IA IA
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT Examination Examination Total
Credits hours Theory Practical
Theory Practical
BPT001 Human Anatomy I Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
BPT002 Human Anatomy I Practical Core practical 2 2 4 80 80 20* 80 100
BPT003 Human Physiology I Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
BPT004 Human Physiology I Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT005 Kinesiotherapy I Theory Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT006 Kinesiotherapy I Practical Core Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Ability Enhancement
AECC001 Biophysics and medical electronics
compulsory course
2 1 3 2 2 40 40 80 40 # 10# 50
Ability Enhancement
AECC002 Environmental Sciences I
compulsory course
1 1 1 20 20 10 # 10
Ability Enhancement
AECC003 English and Communication Skills 3 3 3 60 60 40 # 40
Compulsory Course
Introduction to basic skills in patient

BPTCLT001
care I
Clinical Training 3 3 10 200 200 20 # 20
Total 14 6 3 23 14 12 10 280 240 200 720 720
*Internal Assessment (IA) will be conducted for 40 marks and be calculated out of 20 as applicable for inclusion in Semester Examination.
# Examination will be conducted at Constituent unit level
28
Semester II
Semester 1I ( 20 weeks teaching : 36 hrs per week )

Total Total IA
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT Examination IA Practical Examination Total
Credits hours Theory
Theory Practical
Human Anatomy II
BPT007 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Human Anatomy II
BPT 008 Core Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Practical
Human Physiology II
BPT009 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Human Physiology II
BPT010 Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Practical
Kinesiotherapy-II
BPT011 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Theory
Kinesiotherapy-II
Practical
BPT013 Thermal Agents Theory Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 40 # 40
Thermal Agents
BPT014 Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 40 # 40
Practical
Ability Enhancement
AECC004 Biochemistry 3 3 3 60 60 40 # 40
compulsory course
Environmental Sciences Ability Enhancement

AECC005 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 20 # 60
II compulsory course
Introduction to basic
BPTCLT002 skills in patient care II Clinical training 2 2 8 160 160 20 # 20
Total 14 7 2 23 14 14 8 280 280 160 720 800
*Internal Assessment (IA) will be conducted for 40 marks and be calculated out of 20 as applicable for inclusion in Semester Examination.
29
Semester III
Semester III ( 20 weeks teaching : 36 hrs per week )

Total Total IA
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT Examination IA Practical Examination Total
Credits hours Theory
Theory Practical
BPT015 Kinesiology Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Clinical applications of
BPT016 Core Practical 2 2 4 80 20* 80 100
Kinesiology
BPT017 Electrotherapy Theory Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT018 Electrotherapy Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 20* 80 100
BPT019 Pharmacology Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 10 ** 40 50
BPT020 Psychology & Psychiatry Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 40 # 40
Indian Human Movement

SEC001 Skill Elective Course 1 1 2 1 2 20 60 40 # 20 # 60
Science I -Yoga therapy
Ergonomics and health

Ability Enhancement
AEEC001/ promotion / Personality
Elective Course 2 2 2 40 40 40 # 40
AEEC002 development and learning
Theory
styles
BPTCLT003 Basic skills in patient care I Clinical Training 4 4 14 280 280 40 # 40
Total 14 4 4 22 14 8 14 0 280 720 630
*Internal Assessment (IA) will be conducted for 40 marks and be calculated out of 20 for inclusion in Semester Examination.
**Internal Assessment (IA) will be conducted for 20 marks and be calculated out of 10 for inclusion in Semester Examination.
30
Semester IV
Semester IV ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )
Course
Course Code Course Title T P CLT Total T P CLT T P CLT Total IA Semester IA Practical Semester Total
Description
Credits hours Theory Examination Examination
Theory Practical
Physiotherapy Skills
BPT021 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20 * 80 100
Theory
BPT022 Core Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20 * 80 100
Practical
BPT023 Electrodiagnostics Theory Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20 * 80 100
Electrodiagnostics
BPT024 Core Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20 * 80 100
Practical
BPT025 Pathology & Microbiology Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 40 # 40
BPT026 Sociology Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 40 # 40
BPT027 Research Methodology Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 40 # 40
Skill Elective
SEC002 Course Theory 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
Science II-Dance & Sports
and Practical
Ability
Biostatistics and SPSS
Enhancement
AEEC003/004 Medical Ethics, Human Elective Course 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
rights & professional Theory and
values Practical
Basic skills in patient care
BPTCLT004 Clinical Training 3 3 10 200 200 40 # 40
II
Total 14 6 3 23 14 12 10 280 240 200 720 Total 680
*Internal Assessment (IA) will be conducted for 40 marks and be calculated out of 20 for inclusion in Semester Examination
31
Semester V
Semester V ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )
Credits per week Hours /week Hours per semester Marks
Total Total IA IA
Theory Practical
Medical and surgical

BPT028 aspects of Musculoskeletal Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 20* 80 100
conditions

aspects of Cardiovascular,
BPT029 Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Respiratory disorders and
general medical conditions
Diagnosis of movement
BPT030 dysfunction and ICF Core Theory 1 1 1 20 20 20* 80 100
Theory
Diagnosis of movement
BPT031 dysfunction and ICF Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Practical
BPT032 Public Health Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 10 ** 40 50
Generic Elective
GEC001/ 2D motion capture /
Theory and 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
GEC002 Device Innovation and IPR
Practical
Ability
Enhancement
AEEC005/ Diagnostic Radiology/
Elective Course 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
AEEC006 Pulmonary Function Test
Theory and
Practical
BPTCLT005 Clinical Training 5 5 16 320 320 40 # 40
III
Total 14 3 5 22 14 6 16 280 120 320 720 Total 610
32
Semester VI
Semester VI ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )
Course Code Course Title Course Description Total Total IA
Semester
IA
Semester
Theory Practical
Medical and surgical aspects of

BPT033 Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Neurological disorders
Physiotherapy for women and

BPT034 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
child care Theory
Physiotherapy for women and

child care Practical
Public Health and preventive

BPT036 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 10 ** 40 50
Physiotherapy Theory

BPT037 Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 10 ** 40 50
Physiotherapy Practical
Physiotherapy in Geriatric care

BPT038 Core Theory 1 1 1 20 20 40 # 40
Theory

Practical
Introduction to Evidence Based

BPT040 Core Theory 1 1 1 20 20 40 # 40

Clinical Biomechanics / Skill Based Elective Course

SEC003/ SEC004 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
Vestibular Rehabilitation Theory and Practical
BPTCLT006 Basic skills in patient care IV Clinical Training 4 4 13 260 260 40 # 40
Total 11 6 4 21 11 12 13 220 240 260 720 620
33
Semester VII
Semester VII ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )
Credits per week Hours per week Hours per semester Marks Total
Course
Course Code Course Title Semester Semester
Description Total Total
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination
Credits hours
Theory Practical
Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy I
BPT042 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy I
Practical
Cardiovascular and Respiratory

BPT044 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Physiotherapy I Theory

Physiotherapy I Practical
BPT046 Neurophysiotherapy I Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
BPT047 Neurophysiotherapy I Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Hand rehabilitation/Foot
SEC005/ SEC006 Skill based elective 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
Rehabilitation
Aquatic Therapy/ Sports

SEC007/ SEC008 Skill based elective 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
Physiotherapy
BPTCLT007 Basic skills in patient care V Clinical Training 5 5 15 300 300 40 # 40
Total 11 5 5 21 11 10 15 220 200 300 720 760

34
Semester VIII
BPT CBCS Curriculum Framework applicable for batch admitted in 2019-2020 (BOM 63 / 2020 )
Semester VIII ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )

Total
T P RP CLT T P/RP CLT T P/RP CLT Total hours IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination Total
Credits
Theory Practical
Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy
BPT048 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
II Theory
Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy
II Practical
Cardiovascular and
BPT050 Respiratory Physiotherapy II Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Cardiovascular and
BPT051 Respiratory Physiotherapy II Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Practical
BPT052 Neurophysiotherapy II Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Neurophysiotherapy II
Practical
BPT054 Research Project Synopsis Research 1 1 2 40 40 20 # 20
Skill Based Elective

SEC09/ Neurodevelopmental techniques
Course Theory and 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
SEC010 /PT in ICU
Practical
SEC011/ Splinting and Bracing Skill based elective

1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 40 # 20 # 60
SEC012 /Integumentary Physiotherapy course
BPTCLT008 Basic skills in patient care VI Clinical Training 4 4 13 260 260 40 # 40
Total 11 5 1 4 21 11 12 13 220 240 260 720 780
35
Internship - Semester IX
Semester IX
BPT CBCS 2019 - Internship - 26 weeks /40 hours per week supervised clinical practice
Semester
Course Clinical Exam #
Clinical Postings Course Description Credits Hours
Code
Marks
BPTCLT009 Musculoskeletal PT Core Clinical Training 3 260 40

BPTCLT010 Core Clinical Training 3 260 40
PT
BPTCLT011 Neurophysiotherapy Core Clinical Training 3 260 40
BPTCLT012 Public Health Promotion Core Clinical Training 1 80 40
BPT055 Research Project Research Project 2 180 40
Total 12 1040 200
36
BPT CBCS Curriculum 2019-2020 applicable to batch admitted from 2020-2021 onwards as per AC 41/2021
Semester I
Semester I ( 20 weeks teaching : 36 hrs per week )

Total Total IA IA
Theory Practical
BPT001 Human Anatomy I Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Human Anatomy - I
BPT002 Core practical 2 2 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Practical
Human Physiology - I
BPT003 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Human Physiology - I
Practical
BPT005 Kinesiotherapy - I Theory Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT006 Kinesiotherapy - I Practical Core Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Biophysics and medical Ability Enhancement

AECC001 2 1 3 2 2 40 40 80 10** 40 10** 40 100
electronics compulsory course
Ability Enhancement
AECC002 Environmental Sciences - I 1 1 1 20 20 10** 40 50
compulsory course
English and Communication Ability Enhancement

AECC003 3 3 3 60 60 10** 40 50
Skills Compulsary Course
Introduction to basic skills

BPTCLT001 Clinical Training 3 3 10 200 200 10** 40 50
in patient care - I
Total 14 6 3 23 14 12 10 280 240 200 720 850
*Internal Assessment (IA) will be conducted for 40 marks and be calculated out of 20 for inclusion in Semester Examination .
37
Semester II
Semester 1I ( 20 weeks teaching : 36 hrs per week )
Total Total IA IA
Theory Practical
Human Anatomy - II
BPT007 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Human Anatomy - II
BPT 008 Core Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Practical
Human Physiology - II
BPT009 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Human Physiology - II
Practical
Kinesiotherapy - II
BPT011 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Theory
Kinesiotherapy - II
Practical
Thermal Agents
BPT013 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 10** 40 50
Theory
Thermal Agents
BPT014 Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 10** 40 50
Practical
Ability Enhancement
AECC004 Biochemistry 3 3 3 60 60 10** 40 50
compulsory course
Environmental Sciences Ability Enhancement

AECC005 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
II compulsory course
Introduction to basic
BPTCLT002 skills in patient care - II Clinical training 2 2 8 160 160 10** 40 50
Total 14 7 2 23 14 14 8 280 280 160 720 900
38
Semester III
Semester III ( 20 weeks teaching : 36 hrs per week )
Total Total IA IA
Credits Hours Theory Practical
Theory Practical
BPT015 Kinesiology Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Clinical applications of
Kinesiology
BPT017 Electrotherapy Theory Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT018 Electrotherapy Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT019 Pharmacology Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 10 ** 40 50
BPT020 Psychology & Psychiatry Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 10** 40 50

SEC001 Skill Elective Course 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
Science I -Yoga therapy
Ergonomics and health

AEEC001/ promotion/ Personality Ability Enhancement
2 2 2 40 40 10** 40 50
AEEC002 development and learning Elective Course Theory
styles
BPTCLT003 Basic skills in patient care - I Clinical Training 4 4 14 280 280 10** 40 50
Total 14 4 4 22 14 8 14 280 160 280 720 700
39
Semester IV
Semester IV ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )
Course Code Course Title Course Description
Semester Semester
Total
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT Total hours IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination Total
Credits
Theory Practical
Core Theory
BPT021 2 2 2 40 40 20 * 80 100
Theory
Physiotherapy Skills Core Practical

BPT022 2 2 4 80 80 20 * 80 100
Practical
Core Theory
BPT023 Electrodiagnostics Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20 * 80 100
Core Practical
BPT024 Electrodiagnostics Practical 2 2 4 80 80 20 * 80 100
Core Theory
BPT025 Pathology & Microbiology 4 4 4 80 80 10** 40 50
Core Theory
BPT026 Sociology 2 2 2 40 40 10** 40 50
Core Theory
BPT027 Research Methodology 2 2 2 40 40 10** 40 50
Skill Elective Course

Indian Human Movement Theory and Practical
SEC002 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
Science II-Dance & Sports
Ability Enhancement
Biostatistics and SPSS Elective Course Theory
and Practical
AEEC003/004 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
Medical Ethics, Human
rights & professional
values

BPTCLT004 Clinical Training 3 3 10 200 200 10** 40 50
II
Total 14 6 3 23 14 12 10 280 240 200 720 Total 800
40
Semester V
Semester V ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )

Total Total
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination Total
Credits hours
Theory Practical

BPT028 Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Musculoskeletal conditions

BPT029 Cardiovascular, Respiratory disorders and Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Diagnosis of movement dysfunction and ICF

BPT030 Core Theory 1 1 1 20 20 20* 80 100
Theory
Diagnosis of movement dysfunction and ICF

Practical
BPT032 Public Health Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 10 ** 40 50
2D motion capture / Device Innovation and Generic Elective Theory

GEC001/ GEC002 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
IPR and Practical
Ability Enhancement Elective

AEEC005/ Diagnostic Radiology/ Pulmonary Function
Course Theory and 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
AEEC006 Test
Practical
BPTCLT005 Basic skills in patient care - III Clinical Training 5 5 16 320 320 10** 40 50
Total 14 3 5 22 14 6 16 280 120 320 720 Total 700
41
Semester VI
Semester VI ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )

Total Total
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination Total
Credits hours
Theory Practical

BPT033 Core Theory 4 4 4 80 80 20* 80 100
Neurological disorders
Physiotherapy for women and child

BPT034 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 20* 80 100
care Theory
Physiotherapy for women and child

care Practical

BPT036 Core Theory 2 2 2 40 40 10** 40 50


BPT038 Core Theory 1 1 1 20 20 10** 40 50
Theory

Practical

BPT040 Core Theory 1 1 1 20 20 10** 40 50

Clinical Biomechanics / Vestibular Skill Based Elective Course

SEC003/ SEC004 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
Rehabilitation Theory and Practical
BPTCLT006 Basic skills in patient care IV Clinical Training 4 4 13 260 260 10** 40 50
Total 11 6 4 21 11 12 13 220 240 260 720 750
42
Semester VII
Semester VII ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )

Credits per week Hours per week Hours per semester Marks Total
Total Total
T P CLT T P CLT T P CLT IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination
Credits hours
Theory Practical
BPT042 Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy - I Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
BPT043 Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy - I Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
Cardiovascular and Respiratory Physiotherapy -

BPT044 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
I Theory
Cardiovascular and Respiratory Physiotherapy -

I Practical
BPT046 Neurophysiotherapy - I Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
BPT047 Neurophysiotherapy - I Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
SEC005/ SEC006 Hand rehabilitation / Foot Rehabilitation Skill based elective 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
SEC007/ SEC008 Aquatic Therapy / Sports Physiotherapy Skill based elective 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
BPTCLT007 Basic skills in patient care V Clinical Training 5 5 15 300 300 10** 40 50
Total 11 5 5 21 11 10 15 220 200 300 720 850
43
Semester VIII
Semester VIII ( 20 weeks teaching:36 hrs per wk )

Total
T P RP CLT Total Credits T P/RP CLT T P/RP CLT IA Theory Examination IA Practical Examination Total
hours
Theory Practical
Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy - II
BPT048 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Theory
Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy - II
Practical

BPT050 Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
Physiotherapy II Theory

Physiotherapy - II Practical
BPT052 Neurophysiotherapy II Theory Core Theory 3 3 3 60 60 20* 80 100
BPT053 Neurophysiotherapy II Practical Core Practical 1 1 2 40 40 20* 80 100
BPT054 Research Project Synopsis Research 1 1 2 40 40 10** 40 50
Neurodevelopmental techniques / PT in Skill Based Elective Course

SEC 09/ SEC 010 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
ICU Theory and Practical
Splinting and Bracing /Integumentary

SEC011/ SEC012 Skill based elective course 1 1 2 1 2 20 40 60 10** 40 10** 40 100
Physiotherapy
BPTCLT008 Basic skills in patient care - VI Clinical Training 4 4 13 260 260 10** 40 50
Total 11 5 1 4 21 11 12 13 220 240 260 720 900
44
Semester IX
Semester IX
Semester
Course Clinical Exam #
Clinical Postings Course Description Credits Hours
Code
Marks
BPTCLT009 Musculoskeletal PT Core Clinical Training 3 260 40

BPTCLT010 Core Clinical Training 3 260 40
PT
BPTCLT011 Neurophysiotherapy Core Clinical Training 3 260 40
BPTCLT012 Public Health Promotion Core Clinical Training 1 80 40
Total 12 1040 200
# Examination will be conducted at Constituent unit
45
XIV. Rules and Regulation for Examination of Bachelor of Physiotherapy

Program under MGM School of Physiotherapy offering CBCS Pattern
1. Title of the courses offered: Bachelor of Physiotherapy
2. Duration of the course: Four and half years, including six months of Internship for UG
course.
3. Medium of instruction: The medium of instruction and examination shall be in English
4. Letter Grades and Grade Points:
MGMSOP has adopted the UGC recommended system of awarding grades and CGPA
under Choice Based Credit Semester System for all the UG/PG courses.
4.1 MGMSOP would be following the absolute grading system, where the marks are
compounded to grades based on pre-determined class intervals.
4.2 The UGC recommended 10-point grading system with the following letter gradeswill
be followed:
Table 1: Grades and Grade Points:
Letter Grade Grade Point

O (Outstanding) 10
A+ (Excellent) 9
A (Very Good) 8
B (Good) 7
C (Above Average) 6
F (Fail)/ RA (Reappear) 0
Ab (Absent) 0
Not Completed (NC) 0
RC (<50% in attendance or in Internal
Assessment)
4.3 A student obtaining Grade F/RA will be considered failed and will require
reappearing in the examination.
46
4.4 Candidates with NC grading are those detained in a course (s); while RC indicate student
not fulfilling the minimum criteria for academic progress or less than 50% attendance or
less than 50% in internal assessments (IA). Registrations of such students for the respective
courses shall be treated as cancelled. If the course is a core course, the candidate has to
re-register and repeat the course when it is offered next time.
5. CBCS Grading System - Marks Equivalence Table
5.1 Table 2: Grades and Grade Points
Letter Grade Grade Point % of Marks

O (Outstanding) 10 86-100
A+ (Excellent) 9 70-85
A (Very Good) 8 60 -69
B (Good) 7 55 -59
C (Above Average) –
6 50- 54
Passing criteria for BPT
F (Fail) )/ RA (Reappear) 0 Less than 50
Ab (Absent) 0 -
NC- not completed 0 -
RC- Repeat the Course 0 0
5.2 Table 3: Cumulative Grades and Grade Points
Letter Grade Grade Point CGPA

O (Outstanding) 10 9.01 - 10.00
A+ (Excellent) 9 8.01 – 9.00
A (Very Good) 8 7.01 – 8.00
B (Good) 7 6.00 - 7.00
C (Above Average) 6 5.01 - 6.00
47
6. Assessment of a Course: Evaluation for a course shall be done on a continuous basis.

Uniform procedure will be adopted under the CBCS to conduct internal assessments (IA),
followed by one end-semester university examination (ES) for each course.
6.1 For all category of courses offered (Theory, Practical, Discipline Specific Elective;
Generic Elective [GEC] and Ability Enhancement Courses [AEEC/AECC]; Skills
Enhancement Courses [SEC] Theory or Practical & RP (Research Project), assessment will
comprise of Internal Assessment (IA) in the form of continuous comprehensive
evaluation and mid-semester exam, end–semester examination or college exam as
applicable.
Evaluation of elective courses and certain core courses will be carried out at the level
of the constituent unit for academic batch admitted in 2019-2021. The pattern of
examination is described in the curriculum.
Evaluation of all core and elective courses will be performed as End Semester
University Exam from academic batch 2020-2021 onwards. Pattern of internal
assessment and University Exam are described in the curriculum. As per resolution
no.3.7 of AC -41/ 2021 and 3.11 AC – 41/ 2021.
6.2 Courses in programs wherein Theory and Practical/Clinical are assessed jointly (UG or
PG), the minimum passing head has to be 50% Grade each for theory and practical’s
separately. RA grade in any one of the components will amount to reappearing in both
components. i.e. theory and practical.
6.3 Evaluation for a course with clinical rotation or clinical training or internship will be
done on a continuous basis.
7. Eligibility to appear for the end-semester examinations for a course includes:
7.1 Candidates having ≥ 75% attendance and obtaining the minimum 40% in internal
assessment in each course to qualify for appearing in the end-semester university
examinations (Applicable for batch admitted in 2019-2020 and 2020-2021).
Candidates having ≥ 75% attendance and obtaining the minimum 50% in internal
assessment in each course to qualify for appearing in the end-semester university
examinations (Applicable for batch admitted from 2022-23 onwards as per
Resolution no 10.4 of AC-42/2022 dated 26/04/2022)
7.2 The students desirous of appearing for university examination shall submit the
application form duly filled along with the prescribed examination fee.
7.3 Incomplete application forms or application forms submitted without prescribed
fee or application form submitted after due date will be rejected and student
shall notbe allowed to appear for examination.
48
8. Passing Heads
8.1 Passing head for core theory and practical courses will be 50% inclusive of internal
assessment.
8.2 Elective subjects – The minimum prescribed marks for a pass in elective subject will
be 50%. The marks obtained in elective courses will be communicated to the university
before the commencement of the university examination.
9 Detention: A student not meeting any of the above criteria maybe detained (NC) in that
particular course for the semester. In the subsequent semester, such a candidate requires
improvement in all, including attendance and/or IA minimum to become eligible for the next
end-semester examination.
10 The maximum duration for completing the program will be 8 years (minimum duration of
program x 2) i.e. (4x2) = 8 years for UG program & (2x2) = 4 years for PG program, failing
which his/her registration will be cancelled. Full fees of entire program of 4 or 2 years as the
case may be liable to be paid by the students.
11 Carry over benefit:
11.1 A student will be allowed to keep term for Semester II irrespective of number of
heads of failure in Semester I.
11.2 A student will be allowed to keep term for Semester III if she/he passes each Semester
I and II OR fails in not more than 2 courses each in semester I and II.
11.3 Student will be allowed to keep term for Semester IV irrespective of number of heads
of failure in Semester III. However, student must mandatorily have passed each
course of Semester I and II in order to appear for Semester IV exam.
11.4 Student will be allowed to keep term for Semester V, if she/he passes Semester I, II, III
and IV OR has passed in all courses of Semester I and II and fails in not more than
two courses each of Semester III and IV.
11.5 Student will be allowed to keep term for Semester VI, irrespective of number of
heads of failure in Semester V. However, student must mandatorily have passed
each course of Semester I, II, III and IV in order to appear for Semester VI exam.
11.6 Student will be allowed to keep term for Semester VII, if she/he passes Semester I,
II, III, IV, V and VI OR has passed in all courses of Semester I, II, III and IV and
fails in not more than two courses each of Semester V and VI.
11.7 A student will not be allowed to appear for the Semester VIII examination unless
she/he has cleared all previous examinations.
11.8 Student will be allowed to commence internship if he/she passes Semester VIII
examination.
49
12 Grace Marks for UG Courses:
12.1 A student shall be eligible for grace marks, provided he/she appeared in all the
papers prescribed for the examination.
12.2 Maximum up to 5 grace marks may be allowed for passing, spread over between
subjects.
12.3 No grace marks will be awarded in internal evaluation.
13 University End-Semester Examination
13.1 There will be one final university examination at the end of every semester.
13.2 A student must have minimum 75% attendance (Irrespective of the type of absence) in
theory and practical in each subject to be eligible for appearing the University
examination.
13.3 The Principal / Director shall send to the university a certificate of completion of
required attendance and other requirements of the applicant as prescribed by the
university, two weeks before the date of commencement of the written examination.
A student shall be eligible to sit for the examination only, if she / he secure a minimum of 40%
in internalassessment (individually in theory and practical as applicable). Internal examinations
will be conducted at the level of constituent unit (Applicable for batch admitted in 2019-2020
and 2020-2021).
A student shall be eligible to sit for the examination only, if she / he secure a minimum
of 50% in internal assessment (individually in theory and practical as applicable).
Internal examinations will be conducted at the level of constituent unit (Applicable for
batch admitted from 2022-23 onwards as per Resolution no 10.4 of AC-42/2022
dated 26/04/2022).
13.4 Notwithstanding any circumstances, a deficiency of attendance at lectures or

practical maximum to the extent of 10% - may be condoned by the Principal /
Director.
13.5 If a student fails either in theory or in practical, he/ she have to re-appear for both.
13.6 Student may apply to the University following due procedure for re-
evaluation/recounting of theory marks in the presence of the subject experts.
13.7 Internal assessment shall be submitted by the Head of the Department to the
University through Director of MGMSOP at least two weeks before commencement of
University theory examination.
14. Supplementary examination: The supplementary examination will be held in the next
semester. Eligibility to appear for supplementary examination will be as per rule number11.1-
11.8.
15. Re-Verification
There shall be provision of re-totaling/re-evaluation of the answer sheets; candidate
50
shall be permitted to apply for recounting/re-totaling/re-evaluation of theory papers
within 8 days from the date of declaration of results.
16. Scheme of University Exam Theory UG/PG Program: General structure / patterns for
setting up question papers for Theory / Practical courses, for UG/PG program of MGMSOP
are given in the following tables. Changes may be incorporated as per requirements of specific
courses.
16.1 : Theory Question Paper Pattern for Core Subjects in University Examinations
Under CBCS - 80 Marks
No. of Marks/ Question X

Question type Total marks
questions Question marks
Section 1
Short answer
questions 8 5 8x5 40
Section 2
Medium long answer
4 10 4 x 10 40
question
Total= 80
16.2 : Theory Question Paper Pattern for Core Subjects in University Examinations
Under CBCS - 40Marks

questions Question marks
Section 1
Short answer
questions 4 5 4x5 20
Section 2
Medium long answer
question 2 10 2 x 10 20
Total= 40
General Instructions (Theory):
A. Time duration of each Theory Paper will be of Three (3) hrs or 1 1/2 hrs as the case maybe.
B. Total Marks of each Theory Paper will be 80 Marks / 40Marks.
C. There will be TWO Sections in Question Paper. Section 1 will be short answer questions and
51
Section 2 will be medium long answer questions. There will be internal option.
D. Both the Sections are compulsory.
E. Both the sections are to be written in the separate answer sheet
52
16.3 Practical Question Paper Pattern for University Examinations Under CBCS - 80 Marks
(May vary as per course requirement)
Exercise Description Marks

Q No 1 Long Practical exercise/Case 30
Q No 2 Short Practical 20
exercise/Case/OSPE/OSCE
Q No 3 Spots (4 x 5 marks) 20
Q No 4 Journal 10
Total = 80
16.4 Practical Question Paper Pattern for University Examinations Under CBCS - 40 Marks

Q No 1 Long Practical exercise - 1 1 x15=15
Q No 2 Short station 3x5M=15
exercise/OSPE/OSCE
Q No 3 Objectively Structured Viva 5M
Examination(OSVE)
Q No 4 Journal 5M
Total = 40 M
General Instructions (Practical):

A. All the students have to remain present at the examination center 15 minutes before the
scheduled time for examination.
B. Students have to carry with them certified journal, I-card or examination receipt, and other
necessary requirements for examination.
C. Candidate should not leave the practical hall without the permission of examiner.
D. Use of calculator is allowed but the use of mobile phones is strictly prohibited.
E. The candidate has to leave the laboratory only after the submission of all the answer sheets of
the exercises performed.
53
16.5 Internal examination pattern (Mid-Semester Theory) : 40marks

Question No. of Marks/question Question
type questions X marks Total marks
Short
answers 4 5 4x5 20
Long
answers 2 10 2 x 10 20
Total Total= 40
16.6 Internal Examination Pattern (Mid-Semester Practical): 40marks

Long Practical exercise/case 20 marks

Short station /OSPE/OSCE 10 marks
Objectively 5 marks
Structured
Viva
Examination
(OSVE)
Log book 5 marks
Theory and practical Total = 40 M
G.16.7 Internal examination pattern (Mid-Semester Theory) : 20marks

Question X Total Marks
Question type No. of questions Marks/question
marks
Long essays 1 10 1x10 10
Short answers 2 5 2x5 10
Marks should be submitted by respective departments at least 15 days prior to onset of

university examination to the university.
54
16.6 Internal Examination Pattern (Mid-Semester Practical): 20 Marks

Short Exercise /Case/OSPE/OSCE 10 marks

Objectively Structured Viva 5 marks
Examination(OSVE)
Log book 5 marks
Theory and practical Total = 20 M
Note – Internal assessment marks will be summative of continuous comprehensive

assessment and mid semester exam and will be converted to as per determined weightage for
submission to the University.
16.7 College Examination Pattern
Question Type No. of Marks/question Question x Total marks

questions marks
Short answers 8 5 8x5 40
16.8 Assessment of Seminar (50Marks)
Description Marks
Submission of seminar report 25
Subject knowledge 5
Concept and Methodology 5
Presentation 5
Objectively Structured Viva 10 M
Examination(OSVE)
Total = 50 M
16.9 Clinical Evaluation
Duration in Assignment/Case
Clinical Placement Area
Weeks Documentations
Musculoskeletal PT 6 3
Neurophysiotherapy 6 3
Cardiovascular & Pulmonary PT 6 3
55
• Presentation of required number of cases to the respective clinical supervisors and

documentation in the Log book for each posting is mandatory, failing which the particular
posting will be repeated.
• Attendance is mandatory at all clinical postings with a permission of only one official leave
per month. Interns remaining absent for more than the permitted leaves and without prior
intimation to the clinical supervisors, candidate will have to compensate the days absent
after completion of the rotatory internship placement schedule.
• Appropriate dress code to be followed at all the clinical posting areas.
16.10 Ongoing Comprehensive Evaluation:
On completion of each unit of a course evaluation in the form of multiple choice questions,
essays, case reports etc may be undertaken. Marks of all evaluation will be added along with
the following summative evaluation and mid – semester marks to obtain the internal
assessment score.
Summative Evaluation
Sr
No Criteria 5 4 3 2 1
1 Punctuality and dress code
2 Attitude towards patients & colleagues
3 Urge for Learning/ Initiative
4 Accountability/Responsibility
5 Administrative ability
(Records/Maintenance of equipment’s)
Total Score/ 25
Remarks: -
Signature of Clinical Supervisor Date: -
56
16.11 Case Evaluation
Sr
No Criteria 5 4 3 2 1
Attitude –Towards patient, self-introduction
1
Relevant history taken
Physical Assessment Skills Choice

2 of tests
Testing of all functional impairments ICF
Cognitive- problem solving

3
clinical decision & reasoning
4 Planning treatment- short term goals
5 Long term goals – revaluation
Explanation of home program to patient and
6
Relatives
7 Skills of Treatment maneuvers
8 Skills of equipment handling
9 Documentation of case
10 Timely submission of assignment
Total Score
Remarks: -
Signature of Clinical Supervisor Date:-
57
16.12 Research Project Report: -
BPT student should submit a suitable research project topic forwarded by the guide to
MGM School of Physiotherapy by 2nd month of commencement of Semester VII.
Following approval of ethics & scientific committee, work should be carried out in
subsequent semesters and internship. Completed project report should be submitted at least
a month before end of internship.
17. Research Project report Evaluation Guidelines for BPT program:
The research project report allows the student to develop and display in-depth understanding
of a theme in International Studies, as well as an in-depth understanding of the appropriate
research tools, approaches and theories applicable to that theme. The dissertation should be
based on a well-defined and clear research question of scholarly significance, and that the
dissertation develops a theoretically and methodologically informed and evidence-based answer
to that question.
Criteria for evaluating a research project report: The following guidelines and criteria should
be applied when assessing a dissertation.
Guidelines to Prepare Internship Research Proposal & Project
1. Selection of Research Problem:

Select your interest area of research, based on felt need, issues, social concern.
a. State the problem in brief, concise, clear.
b. State the purpose of selected study &topic.
c. State the objectives of proposal/project.
d. Prepare conceptual framework based on operational definition.
e. Write scope of research proposal/project.
2. Organizing Review of Literature

a. Study related and relevant literature which helps to decide conceptual framework
and research design to be selected for the study
b. Add specific books, bulletins, periodicals, reports, published dissertations,
encyclopedia and textbooks
c. Organize literature as per operational definition
d. Prepare summary table for review of literature
3. Research Methodology: To determine logical structure & methodology for

research project.
a. Decide and state approach of study i.e. experimental or non-experimental
58
b. Define/find out variables to observe effects on decided items &procedure
c. Prepare simple tool or questionnaire or observational checklist to collect data.
d. Determined sample and sampling method
e. Mode of selection ii) Criteria iii) Size of sample iv) Plan when, where and how
data will be collected.
f. Test validity of constructed tool
g. Check reliability by implementing tool before pilot study (10% of sample size)
h. Conduct pilot study by using constructed tool for 10% selected sample size
4. Data collection: To implement prepared tool

a. Decide location
b. Time
c. Write additional information in separate exercise book to support inferences and
interpretation
5. Data analysis and processing presentation

a. Use appropriate method of statistical analysis i.e. frequency and percentage
b. Use clear frequency tables, appropriate tables, graphs and figures.
c. Interpretation of data:
d. In relation to objectives
e. Hypothesis
f. Variable of study or project
g. Writing concise report
6. Writing Research Report

a. Aims:
i. To organize materials to write project report
ii. To make comprehensive full factual information
iii. To make appropriate language and style of writing
iv. To make authoritative documentation by checking footnotes, references &
bibliography
v. To use computers & appropriate software
b. Points to remember
i. Develop thinking to write research report
ii. Divide narration of nursing research report
iii. Use present tense and active voice
iv. Minimize use of technical language
v. Use simple, straightforward, clear & concise language
vi. Use visual aids in form of table, graphs &figures
vii. Treat data confidentially
viii. Review & rewrite if necessary
59
Evaluation Criteria for Project Report
Sr. Rating
No Criteria Remark
1 2 3 4 5
Statement of the problem
I 1. Significance of the problem selected
2. Framing of title and objectives
Literature Review
1. Inclusion of related studies on the topic and its
II
Relevance
2. Operational definition
Research Design
1. Use of appropriate research design
III
2. Usefulness of the research design to draw the
inferences among study variables/ conclusion
Sampling Design
1. Identification & description of the target
Population
IV 2. Specification of the inclusion &exclusion
Criteria
3. Adequate sample size, justifying the study
design to draw conclusions
Data Collection Procedure

1. Preparation of appropriate tool
2. Pilot study including validity & reliability of
V
Tool
3. Use of appropriate procedure/ method for data
Collection
Analysis of Data & Interpretation

1. Clear & logical organization of the finding
VI 2. Clear presentation of tables (title, table&
column heading)
3. Selection of appropriate statistical tests
Ethical Aspects
1. Use of appropriate consent process
VII
2. Use of appropriate steps to maintain ethical
aspects & principles
60
Interpretation of the finding

VIII & appropriate discussion of the results
Conclusion
IX Summary & recommendations
Presentation/ Report Writing

Organization of the project work including
X
language & style of presentation
Total
Signature of the Evaluator
61
18. Eligibility for award of degree
18.1 A candidate shall have passed in all the subjects of all semester’s I-VIII, completed
internship and submitted research project report to be eligible for award of BPT degree.
The performance of a candidate in a course will be indicated as a letter grade, whereas grade
point will indicate the position of the candidate in that batch of candidates. A student is
considered to have completed a course successfully and earned the prescribed credits if
he/she secures a letter grade other than F/RA. A letter grade RA in any course implies he/she
has to Re-appear for the examination to complete the course.
18.2 The RA grade once awarded in the grade card of the student is not deleted even when
he/she completes the course successfully later. The grade acquired later by the student
will be indicated in the grade sheet of the subsequent semester in which the candidate has
appeared for clearance in supplementary exams
18.3 If a student secures RA grade in the Project Work/Dissertation, he/she shall improve
it and resubmit it, if it involves only rewriting / incorporating the revisions suggested by
the evaluators. If the assessment indicates lack of student performance or data collection,
then the student maybe permitted to re-register by paying the prescribed re-registration fee
and complete the same in the subsequent semesters.
A candidate shall be declared to have passed the examination if he/she obtains the
following minimum qualifying grade / marks:-
(a) For Core courses CT (Core Theory), CL (Core Lab), DE (Discipline centric Electives),
clinical rotation and internship student shall obtain Grade B (50 % of marks) in the
University End Semester Examination (ES) and in aggregate in each course which
includes both Internal Assessment and End Semester Examination.
(b) For Generic Electives (GE), Ability Enhancement (AE) and Skill Enhancement (SE)
courses student shall obtain a minimum of Grade B (50% of marks) in the College
Examination.
19. Guidelines for Clinical Internship or Research internship:
19.1 Internship may be commenced only on completion of all course work. The internship may
be observed only at the clinical postings and areas of extension activities of MGM
School of Physiotherapy, Navi Mumbai / Aurangabad. No external postings
62
will be considered during internship. Students are expected to act in a responsible and
professional manner at all times during their postings.
19.2 Eligibility for appearing for Internship: On completion of all course work, a
candidate is permitted by the Director/Principal to join internship during the beginning
of the semester i.e., Odd/Even.
19.3 Responsibilities during internship: During the internship period candidates

should show at least 90% attendance. They must engage in practice/ skill based
learning of professional conduct. Their learning outcomes must be maintained and
presented in the form of logbooks/ case studies/ research project report. The
appropriate formats for the postings/ clinical rotations/ research assignments will be
are prescribed as required.
19.4 Evaluation of internees and award of credits: All internees will be assessed based
on their satisfactory attendance, performance in the postings/ research labs,
presentation of the logbook, satisfactory completion of research project and end-
semester clinical examination. The credits and hours of internship will be as defined in
the BPT program.
XV. Computation of SGPA and CGPA
The UGC recommends the following procedure to compute the Semester Grade Point
Average (SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA):
i. The SGPA is the ratio of sum of the product of the number of credits with the grade
points scored by a student in all the courses taken by a student and the sum of the
number of credits of all the courses undergone & earned by a student, i.e.,
SGPA (Si) = ∑(Ci x Gi) / ∑Ci
where Ci is the number of credits of the ith course and Gi is the grade point scored by
the student in the ith course.
ii. The CGPA is also calculated in the same manner taking into account all the courses
undergone & earned by a student over all the semesters of a programme, i.e.
CGPA = ∑(Ci x Si) / ∑ Ci
where Si is the SGPA of the ith semester and Ci is the total number of credits in that
semester.
iii. The SGPA and CGPA shall be rounded off to 2 decimal points and reported in the
transcripts.
63
Illustration of Computation of SGPA and CGPA
Course Credit Grade Grade Point Credit Point

Letter (Credit x
Grade)
Course 1 3 A 8 3 X 8 = 24
Course 2 4 B+ 7 4 X 7 = 28
Course 3 3 B 6 3 X 6 = 18
Course 4 3 O 10 3 X 10 = 30
Course 5 3 C 5 3 X 5 = 15
Course 6 4 B 6 4 X 6 = 24
20 139
Illustration for SGPA
Thus, SGPA = 139/20 = 6.95
Semester 1 Semester 2 Semester 3 Semester 4

Credit : 20 Credit : 22 Credit : 25 Credit : 26
SGPA : 6.9 SGPA : 6.8 SGPA : 6.6 SGPA : 6.0
Semester 5 Semester 6
Credit : 26 Credit : 25
SGPA : 6.3 SGPA : 8.0
Illustration for CGPA
x 8.0
CGPA = =
6.75/B+
ii. Transcript: Based on the above recommendations on Letter grades, grade points and
SGPA and CGPA, the transcript for each semester and a consolidated transcript
indicating the performance in all semesters may be issued.
64
Sample Transcript
MGM School of Physiotherapy

Constituent unit of
MGM Institute of Health Sciences
Sector 1&2, Kamothe, Navi Mumbai
Choice Based Credit System Grade Card
Name of Date of Birth:

Candidate
Program Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) PRN Number:
Semester Semester I Month & Year:
Institute MGM School of Physiotherapy, Navi Mumbai

BPT001 Core Theory Human Anatomy I Letter Grade Result
Theory
BPT002 Core Practical Human Anatomy I
Practical
BPT003 Core Theory Human Physiology I
Theory
BPT004 Core Practical Human Physiology I
Practical
BPT005 Core Theory Kinesiotherapy I
Theory
BPT006 Core Practical Kinesiotherapy I
Practical
AECC001 Ability Biophysics and
Enhancement medical electronics
Compulsory Course
AECC00 Ability Environmental

Enhancement Sciences I
Compulsory
Course
AEEC003 Ability English and
Enhancement Communication
Compulsory Skills
Course
Credits
registered
Credits earned
Grade point
averaged
Date: Signature:
65
XVII. Course Registration
17.1. After admission to a Program, a student identity number is generated. This PRN
number may be used in the process of registration for a course.
17.2 The registration process is a registration for the courses in a semester. The registration card
is generated after a student completes the choice of electives. Every student shall register for
the stipulated number of Courses/Credits semester wise even if electives are not prescribedin
their regulations for the said semester. Every student must register for Elective/Ability
Enhancement Courses semester-wise for the courses he/she intends to undergo in that semester
within two weeks of commencement of the semester.
The list of students registered for each elective will be communicated to the HoDs/
Course Chairpersons. Students will be requested to authenticate the chosen electives by
appending their signature in acceptance with approval by the HoDs/ Course Chairpersons. A
soft copy of the registered students will be submitted to the elective course offering departments
for their official use.
XVIII. Re - Entry after Break of Study:

The University regulations for readmission are applicable for a candidate seeking re-entry to
a program.
a) Students admitted the program and absenting for more than 3 months must seek
readmission into the appropriate semester as per university norms.
b) The student shall follow the syllabus in vogue (currently approved / is
being followed) for the program.
c) All re-admissions of students are subject to the approval of the Vice-Chancellor.
XI. Ranking
The first two ranks of the programme will be decided on the basis of grades of CGPA in the
courses (core and DE courses only). In case of a tie, marks % [of core and DE courses only] will
be taken into account.
66
XII. Classification of Successful Candidates
Overall Performance in a Program and Ranking of a candidate is in accordance with the University
regulations.
Consolidated Grade Card - BPT Program

Letter
% Marks Grade point CGPA
Grade Range RANGE
O 80 & Above 10 9.01 – 10
A+ 75-80 9 8.01 - 9.00

A 60-74 8 7.01 - 8.00
B+ 55-59 7 6.01- 7.00
B 50-54 6 5.01- 6.00
F/RA Less than 50 0 4.51 – 5.00

(Reappear)
Ab (Absent) 0
Not Completed (NC) 0
Repeat the course 0
(RC = <50% in attendance or
Internal Assessment)
A successful candidate will be:
i. Who secures not less than O grade with a CGPA of 9.01 – 10.00 shall be declared to
have secured ‘OUTSTANDING’ provided he/she passes the whole examination in the
FIRSTATTEMPT;
ii. Who secures not less than A+ grade with a CGPA of 8.01 – 9.00 shall be declared to
have secured ‘EXCELLENT’ provided he/she passes the whole examination in the
FIRSTATTEMPT;
iii. Who secures not less than A grade with a CGPA of 7.01 –8.00 and completes the course
within the stipulated course period shall be declared to have passed the examinations
with ‘Very Good’
iv. All other candidates (with grade B and above) shall be declared to have passed the
examinations.
67
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-I (0-6 months)
Course Course Title Course Theory Practical Clinical Credits

Code Description Hours Hours Hours
BPT001 Human Anatomy Core Theory 60 - - 3
I
BPT002 Human Anatomy Core Practical - 80 - 2
I
BPT003 Human Core Theory 60 - - 2
Physiology I
BPT004 Human Core Practical - 40 2
Physiology I
BPT005 Kinesiotherapy I Core Theory 40 - 2
BPT006 Kinesiotherapy I Core Practical 80 - 2
AECC001 Biophysics and Ability 40 40 - 3
medical Enhancement
electronics Compulsory
Course
AECC002 Environmental Ability 20 - - 1
Sciences I Enhancement
Compulsory
Course
AECC003 English and Ability 60 - - 3
Communication Enhancement
Skills Compulsory
Course
BPTCLT001 Introduction to Clinical - - 200 3
basic skills in Training
patient care I
68
Name of the Programme Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)

Human Anatomy-I
Name of the Course
Theory
Course Code BPT-001
Course Description Core Theory
Semester Semester I
Credit per Semester 3 credits
Hours per Semester 60 hours
Course Learning Outcomes: The student will be able to

CO 1 describe anatomical aspects of muscles, bones, joints, their attachments of thorax and
upper quadrant & to understand and discuss analysis of movements with respect to bones,
joints and soft tissues related to musculoskeletal system of thorax, & upper extremity.
CO 2 describe structures of the cardio vascular & respiratory system, mechanism of respiration
and the course of blood vessels, structure of rib cage & its contents with special emphasis
to lungs, tracheo-bronchial tree, respiratory muscles & heart
CO 3 describe source & course of major arterial, venous & lymphatic system, related to upper
quadrant, thorax and heart.
CO 4 describe various structures of the genitor-urinary system, abdomen, pelvic organs and
sense organs and apply knowledge to living anatomy
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
General anatomy
1 a. Introduction, Skin, fascia, vessels, Bone, joint, muscles & nerves 09
Imaging techniques
General Histology
a. Epithelium
b. Connective tissue
2 05
c. Muscle
d. Bone and cartilage
e. Nerve and vessels
3 Embryology 05
4 Musculoskeletal anatomy (dissection / pro-section mandatory) 15
69
a. Superior extremity with shoulder girdle.
Cardiovascular system (Including Lymphatics) and Respiratory system

a. Thoracic wall, Mediastinum
b. Heart and major blood vessels
5 c. Lungs 12
d. Respiratory muscles, Diaphragm, Intercostal, Accessory muscles
e. Lymphatics
f. Applied Anatomy
Systemic Anatomy
a. Urinary system
b. Reproductive system, (special emphasis to Female organs & Pelvic floor
6 muscles supporting system for uterus) 14
c. Abdominal muscles
d. Organs of gastro-intestinal system
e. Sensory organs – Ear ,Eye
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Theory question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80
marks

questions question marks
Section1
Short Answer Questions (from
5 out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,4,5,6)
Brief answer questions (from
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 1,2,4,5,6)
Long Answer Question (from
units 4,5) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Section 2
5out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,4,5,6)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 1,2,4,5,6)
units 4,5) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 80
70
Internal examination pattern (Theory): 40marks

Question type questions question marks Total marks
5 out of 6 3 3x5
units 1,2,4,5,6)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 1,2,4,5,6)
units 4,5) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 40
RECOMMEMDED TEXT BOOKS
1. Snell RS. Clinical anatomy: an illustrated review with questions and explanations.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins;2004.
2. Chaurasia BD. Human anatomy Volume- I, II & III, CBS Publisher; 2004. Singh
Vishram Textbook of Anatomy Head, Neck, and Brain; Volume III;2014
3. Singh I. Textbook of human neuroanatomy. Jaypee Brothers Publishers;2006.
4. Kadasne'S T.B. of Anatomy Vol.1 Upper And Lower Extremities2009
5. Singh V. Textbook of clinical neuroanatomy. Elsevier Health Sciences;2014.
6. Dutta AK. Essentials of human anatomy, head and neck.
RECOMMEMDED REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Johnson TB, Whillis J. Gray's Anatomy: Descriptive and Applied. Longman;1958.

2. Eroschenko VP, Di Fiore MS. DiFiore's atlas of histology with functional correlations.
3. DiFiore's Atlas of Histology with Functional Correlations
4. Wells K. Kinesiology, ed. 3, Philadelphia,1960.
5. Snell RS. Neuroanatomy: a review with questions and explanations. Little, Brown; 1992
Jan.
6. Singh V. Textbook of clinical neuroanatomy. Elsevier Health Sciences; 2014 Aug14.
7. Romanes GJ. Cunningham's manual of practical anatomy.
71

Human Anatomy-I
Name of the Course
Practical
Course Code BPT-002
Course Description Core Practical
Semester Semester I

CO 1 identify anatomical aspects of muscles, bones, joints, their attachments of thorax and
upper quadrant & to understand and discuss analysis of movements with respect to bones,
joints and soft tissues related to musculoskeletal system of thorax, & upper extremity.
CO 2 identify structures of the cardio vascular & respiratory system, mechanism of respiration
and the course of blood vessels, structure of rib cage & its contents with special emphasis
to lungs, tracheo-bronchial tree, respiratory muscles & heart
CO 3 Identify source & course of major arterial, venous & lymphatic system, related to upper
quadrant, thorax and heart.
CO 4 identify various structures of the genitor-urinary system, abdomen and pelvic organs and
apply knowledge to living anatomy
CO 5 demonstrate the movements of various joints, name and identify the origin/insertion, nerve
/blood supply, root value & function of various skeletal muscles (upper extremity,
abdominal wall & pelvic floor) with special emphasis to extremities, find various surface
land-marks.
No of
Unit Topics
Hrs
1 General anatomy 5
2 General Histology 5
Musculoskeletal anatomy 30
3.
Superior extremity – with Radiological, Living Anatomy and Osteology
Respiratory System - Respiratory system, Thoracic cage and respiratory muscles, 15
4 diaphragm, Lung & Pleura, Trachea & Bronchopulmonary segments, Mediastinum -
with Radiological, Living Anatomy and thorax osteology
Circulatory System - Types of blood vessels, Heart & Pericardium, Coronary 10
5 Circulation, Overview of mediastinum, Blood vessels of Thorax with radiological
and living anatomy
6 Systemic Anatomy – with Radiological & Living Anatomy and abdomen and pelvis 15
72
Osteology
Total Hours 80
EXAMINATION SCHEME
(Examination pattern applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020, 2020-2021)
Practical question paper pattern for University Semester Examinations under CBCS -
80 marks
Exercise Descrip Marks Total =

tion 80
Q No 1 Spots (general, upper limb, 2M x 10 = 20 20
cardiorespiratory, radiology anatomy)
Q No 2 OSPE 10 M x 4= 40 40
2 supervised stations (upper limb
anatomy)
2 unsupervised stations
(cardiorespiratory anatomy)
Q No 3 Viva 10 10
Q No 4 Journal 10 M 10
Internal Examination Pattern (Practical): 40 Marks
Spots /OSPE 25marks

Viva 10marks
Journal 05 marks
Total 40marks
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks, for theory and practical,
respectively
(Examination pattern applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2021-22,

As per Resolution 3.8 of AC 41)
Practical question paper pattern for University Semester Examinations under CBCS -
80 marks
Exercise Description Marks Total =

80
Q No 1 Spots (general, upper limb, 2M x 10 = 20 20
cardiorespiratory, radiology anatomy)
73
Q No 2 OSPE 10 M x 4= 40 40
2 supervised stations (upper limb
anatomy)
2 unsupervised stations
(cardiorespiratory anatomy)
Q No 3 Objectively Structured Viva 10 10
Examination(OSVE)
Spots /OSPE 25marks

Objectively Structured Viva Examination(OSVE) 10marks
Journal 05 marks
Total 40marks
respectively
74

Human Physiology I
Name of the Course
Theory
Course Code BPT-003
Semester Semester I

describe relative contribution of each organ system in maintenance of the Milieu
CO 1
Interior (Homeostasis)
describe physiological functions of various systems, with special reference to
CO 2 Musculoskeletal, Neuro-motor, Cardio-respiratory, Excretory, & relate alterations
in function with aging
Acquire the skill of basic clinical examination, with special emphasis to
CO 3
Cardiovascular & Respiratory system
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
General Physiology
1 a. Structure of cell membrane.
04
b. Transport across cell membrane
c. Homeostasis
Blood
a. Overview of Blood
b. Blood Composition
c. Plasma, Red Blood Cells, White Blood Cells, Platelets
2 d. Normal values of Blood 08
e. Homeostasis (Coagulation or Clotting)
f. ABO, Group System Surface Antigens, Inheritance -Incompatibility in
Blood/Plasma Transfusions, Hemolytic Disease of the Newborn- Diseases
of the blood
Muscle
a. Structure
3 b. Properties-classification-excitation/contraction Muscle Coupling-Motor
8
unit- E.M.G. Factors affecting muscle contraction
c. Neuro-muscular transmission work-Involuntary muscle properties-
muscles of heart–Neurophysiology
75
Nerve- Neuron AHC / Neuroglial cells

a. Structure
b. Classification & Properties of nerve fibers
4 6
c. Resting Membrane Potential Action potential
d. Propagation of nerve impulse degeneration &regeneration
e. Reaction of degeneration(retrograde)
Respiratory System
a. Introduction, mechanics of respiration
b. Pulmonary volumes and capacities
c. Anatomical and physiological dead space, surfactant
d. Perfusion, ventilation-perfusion ratio
5 e. Gas exchange and transport of gases 14
f. Nervous and chemical control of respiration,
g. Pulmonary function test
h. Physiological changes at altitude / acclimatization, hypoxia and
abnormal respiration.
i. Effect of exercise on respiratory system
Cardiovascular system
a. Structure and properties of cardiac muscle
b. Cardiac cycle, Heart rate regulation
c. Factors affecting blood pressure
6 d. Cardiac output, Peripheral resistance 14
e. Venous return, Regional circulation, coronary circulation
f. Normal ECG
g. Shock
h. Effects of exercise
Excretory system
7. a. Kidneys, Renal blood flow and JJ apparatus, Glomerular filtration rate
06
b. Body fluid and Electrolyte balance, Urine formation, Micturition,
c. Neural control, Neurogenic bladder
Total 60
76
marks

Question type questions Question marks Total marks
Section1
5 out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,4,5,6,7)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 1,2,4,5,6)
units 3,4,5) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Section 2
5out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,4,5,6,7)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 1,2,4,5,6)
units 3,4,5) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 80

5 out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,4,5,6,7)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 1,2,4,5,6)
units 3,4,5) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 40
77

Human Physiology I
Name of the Course
Practical
Course Code BPT-004
Semester Semester I
Credit per Semester 1 credit
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
1 Hematology – (demonstration only) 6
Graphs
I. Skeletal muscle-properties-pre / after Load-Fatigue-Starling’s law
2 10
II. Cardiac muscle-properties-effect of Ach &Adrenaline
III. Ergography
3 Blood Pressure – Effects of change in posture & exercise 4
4 Spirometry - Lung volumes ii. Timed vital capacity 2
5 Examination of Pulse 4
Clinical Examination - 12
6
i. Respiratory system ii. Cardiovascular system, ECG
Stethography 1
7 i. Voluntary hyperventilation
8 Spots 1
Total 40
78
EXAMINATION SCHEME
(Examination pattern applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020, 2020-2021)
Practical question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS -
80marks

Q No 1 OSPE (4 stations- Cardiorespiratory) 10 M x 4= 40
Q No 2 Spots 2 M x 10= 20
Q No 3 Viva 10
Q No 4 Journal 10
Total = 80
Internal examination pattern (practical): 40 Marks

Q No 1 Clinical 20
Q No 2 Spots /OSPE 20
Total Total= 40
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks, for theory and practical, respectively.
EXAMINATION SCHEME
(Examination pattern applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2021-22,
As per Resolution 3.8 of AC 41)
80marks

Q No 1 OSPE (4 stations- Cardiorespiratory) 10 M x 4= 40
Q No 3 Objectively Structured Viva Examination(OSVE) 10
Q No 4 Journal 10
Total = 80
Internal examination pattern (practical): 40 Marks
(Examination pattern applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020)

79

Q No 1 Clinical 20
Q No 2 Spots /OSPE 20
Total Total= 40
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks, for theory and practical, respectively.
RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS
1. Text book on Medical Physiology –Guyton

2. Textbook of Physiology – A K Jain (for MBBS students)
RECOMMENDED REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Review of Medical Physiology – Ganong

2. Samson & Wright‟s Applied Physiology
3. Textbook of Medical Physiology – Bern and Levy
80
Name of the Programme Bachelor of Physiotherapy

Name of the Course Kinesiotherapy– I
Course Code BPT005
Semester Semester I
Course Learning Outcomes

Cognitive
At the end of the course, the candidate will be able to:
define the various terms used in mechanics, biomechanics & kinesiology
CO 1
explain the basic principles of biophysics related to mechanics of movement / motion

& apply these principles to simple equipment designs along with their efficacy in
CO 2
Therapeutic Gymnasium & various starting positions used in
therapeutics.
explain the concepts of physical, social and mental health, differentiate between
physical activity and fitness, describe factors affecting physical fitness, and
CO 3
importance of regular monitoring of fitness for prevention of non-communicable
diseases
Psychomotor
demonstrate use of various equipment’s of the Therapeutic Gymnasium
CO 4
demonstrate movements in terms of anatomical planes and axes, demonstrate

CO 5 various starting & derived positions used in therapeutics.
CO 6 apply therapeutic skills of massage
Demonstrate assessment of basic evaluation like sensations, reflexes & vital

CO 7
parameters
Acquire the diagnostic skill of objective assessment of Range of Motion of
CO 8
the upper quadrant, head and neck by Goniometry
81
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
Application of Biomechanics in Human Anatomy

a. Types of Muscles- Anatomical &Physiological
b. Types of muscle work /Contraction
1 c. Muscle Action: Roles as Agonist, Antagonist, Fixators, Synergist 5
d. Active & Passive insufficiency
e. Range of muscle work, Angle of pull – with importance to efficiency of muscle work
and stability of joint
Classification of Movements
a. Definition and classification
2 b. Principles of movements 5
c. Effects, uses and Techniques (active: assisted, free, assisted- resisted, resisted &
passive)
Starting Positions & Derived Positions
3 a. Application of stability 5
b. BOS, Gravity and muscle work in relation to various positions
Therapeutic Gymnasium
a. Use of therapy accessories such as Pulleys Springs, Shoulder wheel, Walking aids,
4 5
Finger ladder, Therapeutic balls, Weights, Resistance bands, tubes, & wands
b. Applied mechanics of all above accessories
Assessment of Vital Parameters

a. Blood Pressure
b. Heart Rate/ Pulse rate
c. Respiratory Rate 5
5 d. Chest expansion
e. Assessment of Reflex testing
f. Limb Girth
Goniometry- Diagnostic application for identification of movement dysfunction
Overview of surface anatomy
a. Bony land marks of skeletal system --Reference points for identification of
vertebral level, Carpal & Tarsal bone Land marks for identification of articular
6 surface & peri- articular structures of joints 5
b. Definition and Types of Goniometers
c. Principles
d. Techniques for individual joints with biomechanical principles Uses – upper
quadrant
7 Soft Tissue maneuvers 5
82
a. Types of maneuvers
b. Physiological principles of each
c. Therapeutic uses
d. Indications and contraindications
e. Pre-session preparation – Type of media used for manipulation; Environment
f. Starting positions – used for model as well as therapist.
g. Skills on Upper limb, Face, Scalp and Neck.
Concept of Health, Exercise and Fitness
a. Definition of Health-Physical, social and mental health
b. Physical activity and Fitness, Factors affecting physical fitness
8 c. Energy sources for exercise, Physiological effects and benefits of exercise on 5
body systems
d. Importance of testing fitness and regular monitoring
e. Role of physical activity in preventing non communicable diseases
Total 40
83

Name of the Course Kinesiotherapy– I
Course Code BPT006
Semester Semester I

name different types of muscles, palpate the muscles and able to recognize
CO 1
different types of muscle action
CO 2 demonstrate assisted, resisted and passive movements
apply concept of base of support and gravity, starting positions & derived
CO 3
positions. Identify muscle work in various position
CO 4 demonstrate use of different equipment of therapeutic gymnasium
assess BP, HR, chest expansion, limb girth, reflex testing
CO 5
use goniometry for assessment of upper limb range of motion, identify joint
CO 6 fulcrum ,position of movable and fixed arms, identify factors affecting joint
motion
perform different types of soft tissue maneuvers with understanding of
CO 7 indications and contraindications of each technique on upper limb, face, scalp
and neck.
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
Classification of Movements
1 10
Active, active-assisted, free, assisted- resisted, resisted & passive
Starting Positions & Derived Positions
2 10
BOS, Gravity and muscle work in relation to various positions
Therapeutic Gymnasium
3 Pulleys Springs, Shoulder wheel, Walking aids, Finger ladder, Therapeutic balls, 10
Weights, Resistance bands, tubes, & wands.
4 Assessment of Vital Parameters 10
Blood pressure, pulse rate, respiratory rate, chest expansion, reflex testing
84
5 Goniometry – Upper quadrant 15

Soft Tissue maneuvers 15
6
Skills on upper limb , face, scalp and neck
Fitness program 10
7
Total 80
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Theory question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80 Marks

Section 1
Short answer questions (from unit
8 out of 10 5 8x5 40
1-8)
Section 2
Long answer question (from 1-8) 4 out of 5 10 4 x 10 40
Total= 80
80 marks

Q No 1 Exercise- (from unit 5,6,7- upper 30
quadrant goniometry/ soft tissue
maneuvers/fitness)
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations (from unit 2,3- 2 x 10=20
starting positions & derived
positions/therapeutic
gymnasium)
Q No 3 2 OSPE stations (from unit 4- 2 x 10=20
assessment of vital parameters)
Q No 4 Journal 10
Total = 80
85
Internal examination pattern (theory): 40marks
No. of Question X
Question type questions Marks/question marks Total marks
Short answers(unit 1-8) 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
Long answers (unit 1-8) 2 out of 3 10 2 x 10 20
Total Total= 40
Internal examination pattern (practical): 40 marks

Q No 1 Exercise- (from unit 5,6,7- upper 15
quadrant goniometry/ soft tissue
maneuvers/fitness)
Q No 2 1 OSPE stations (from unit 2,3- 10
starting positions & derived
positions/therapeutic gymnasium)
Q No 3 1 OSPE stations (from unit 4- 10
assessment of vital parameters)
Q No 4 Journal 5
Total= 40
Internal Assessment will be weighted out of 20 marks, for theory and practical, respectively

1. Gardiner MD. The principles of exercise therapy. G. Bell;1957.
2. Licht SH, editor. Massage, manipulation, and traction. E. Licht;1960.
3. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic exercise: Foundations and techniques. Fa
Davis; 2017 Oct18.
4. Hollis M. Massage for therapists: a guide to soft tissue therapy. Wiley-Blackwell; 2009.
5. Hollis M, Cook PF, editors. Practical exercise therapy. Wiley-Blackwell;1999.
6. Practical Exercise therapy, Margaret Hollis, Phyllis Fletcher Cook Wiley
7. Norkin CC, White DJ. Measurement of joint motion. A guide to goniometry.1995
8. Levangie PK, Norkin CC. Joint Structure and function: a comprehensive analysis.
3rd. Philadelphia: FA. Davis Company.2000.
9. Houglum PA, Bertoti DB. Brunnstrom's clinical kinesiology. FA Davis;2011.
10. World Health Organization; Global Strategy on Diet, Physical Activity and Health
11. McArdle WD, Katch FI, Katch VL. Exercise physiology: nutrition, energy, and human
performance. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins;2010.
12. Kennedy-Armbruster C, Yoke M. Methods of group exercise instruction. Human
Kinetics; 2014.
86
RECOMMENDED REFERENCE BOOK

1. ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription
2 Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic exercise: Foundations and techniques. Fa
Davis; 2017
87

Name of the Course Biophysics and medical electronics
Course Code AECC001
Course Description Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course - Theory
Semester Semester I

Explain various terms used in relation to biophysics, mechanics, biomechanics &

kinesiology.
CO 1
Explain the physics principles & Laws of Electricity, & Electro magnetic
Spectrum
Discuss effects of environmental &man made electromagnetic field at the
CO 2 cellular level & outline risk factors on prolonged exposure.
Describe the Main electrical supply, Electric shock, examine precautions to be

CO 3
taken for prevention of electric shock
Identify and describe in brief, certain common electrical components such as
transistors, valves, capacitors, transformers etc. & the simple instruments used to test /
CO 4
calibrate these components (such as potentiometer, oscilloscope,
mustimeter) of the circuit ; & identify such components.
Unit Topics No. of

Hrs.
Basic Physics:
a. Structure of atom, Isotopes, States of matter;
b. Compound formation- (covalent formation),
c. Properties of Electric lines of forces
1 Biophysics- Mechanics & Application to human Body 20

a. Definition and terminologies: Mechanics (Statics & Dynamics), Biomechanics,
Kinetics, Kinematics (Osteo-kinematics, Arthrokinematics, Open Chain &
Closed Chain kinematics)
b. Axes /planes,
c. Laws of inertia &motion,
88
d. Gravity, C.O.G., L.O.G. and B.O.S.

e. Equilibrium – Types and affecting factors
f. Mechanics of Forces Work, Energy, Power, Friction, Momentum, Parallelogram
of Forces
g. Torque
h. Pendulum
i. Mechanical and Anatomical pulleys
j. Levers
k. Fluid mechanics related to Hydrotherapy (physics, statics &dynamics)
Theory of Electricity:
2 a. Production of Electric Charge 4
b. Characteristics of charged electrical body
Main supply:
a. Types: A.C./ D.C.
3 b. Distribution/ Grid system wiring of the house, colour coding of 4
electrical supply to the apparatus
c. Testing of mains
Magnetism:
a. Nature and Types
b. Molecular theory of Magnetism
4 4
c. Property of Magnet
d. Magnetic effect of electric current – Electromagnets
e. Meters for measuring A.C.
Electro Magnetic Spectrum
a. Electro Magnetic Radiation, Laws Governing E.M.R: Laws of Reflection,
5 4
Refraction, Absorption, Attenuation, Cosine Law, Inverse Square Law, Grotthus
Law
Shock
a. Definition
b. Types ( Electric Shock & Earth shock)
6. 2
c. Severity, Causes, Effects &Precaution
d. Types of Plugs &Switches
e. Fuse
7. Earthing and its importance 2
Total 40
89

Name of the Course Biophysics and medical electronics
Course Code AECC001
Course Description Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course – Practical
Semester Semester I
No. of
Sr. No. Topics
Hrs.
List, describe, draw various electrical components like diodes & triodes, rheostat,
1 10
capacitor, potentiometer, switches, plugs and pulse generator
2 Apply technique of testing of mains supply 10
3 Draw free body diagrams, force vectors during walking and further applications 20
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Evaluation will be
conducted at level of the constituent unit. Applicable to batch
admitted in academic year 2019-2020
Examination pattern (theory): 40marks
No. of Question X
Short answer questions 8 out of 9 5 5x8 40
Total Total= 40
Examination pattern (practical): OSPE 10 marks
Question type Marks/question Total marks

Station 1 5 5
Station 2 5 5
Total 10
90
EXAMINATION SCHEME
APLICABLE FOR BATCH ADMITTED FROM ACADEMIC YEAR 2020-2021 ONWARDS as per
Resolution No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Examination Pattern (Theory): 40 marks
No. of Question X
Short answer questions 8 out 9 5 5x8 40
Total Total= 40
University Examination Pattern (Practical): 40 marks

Short Case 20 20
OSPE Stations (2) 10 20
Total 40
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Theory): 20marks
No. of Question X
Total Total= 20
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Practical): 20 marks

Short case 1 10 10
OSPE Stations (2) 5 10
Total 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks from internal examination for theory and
practical respectively

1. Kitchen S, Bazin S, editors. Clayton's electrotherapy. Bailliere Tindall Limited;1996.
2. Robertson V, Ward A, Low J, Reed A, MCSP D. Electrotherapy explained:
principles and practice. Elsevier Health Sciences; 2006
3. Kahn J. Principles and practice of electrotherapy. Saunders;2000.
91
4. Bellis E. Electrotherapy: evidence-based practice.
6. Norkin CC, White DJ. Measurement of joint motion: a guide to goniometry. FA Davis;
2016

1. Nelson RM, Hayes KW, Currier DP, editors. Clinical electrotherapy. Prentice Hall;1999.
2. Clinical Electrotherapy -- Nelson &Currier
3. Biomechanics – Cynthia Norkins
92
Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course (AECC)

Name of the Course Environmental Sciences I
Course Code AECC002

CO1 describe ecosystem and its structural and functional aspects, examine
interconnectedness among all the biotic and abiotic components of environment and
dynamic nature of ecological processes in maintaining equilibrium in nature.
CO2 List Earth’s resources, their generation, extraction and impact of human activities on
earth’s environment, to examine effective management strategies, and critical insight
on major sustainability issues.
No. of
Units Topics
Hrs.
Unit 1: Introduction to environmental studies
1. Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies; components of environment –

atmosphere, hydrosphere, lithosphere and biosphere. 5
2. Scope and importance; Concept of sustainability and sustainable development.
Unit 2: Ecosystems
Structure and function of ecosystem.
3.
Energy flow in an ecosystem: food chain, Food web, Ecological succession.
Case studies of the following ecosystems:
a) Forest ecosystem 5
4. b) Grassland ecosystem
c) Desert ecosystem
d) Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries)
Unit 3: Natural Resources: Renewable and Non-renewable Resources
5. Land Resources and land use change; Land degradation, soil erosion and
10
desertification.
6. Deforestation: Causes and impacts due to mining, dam building on environment,

forests, biodiversity and tribal populations.
93
7. Water: Use and over-exploitation of surface and ground water, floods, droughts,
conflicts over water (international & inter-state).
8. Heating of earth and circulation of air; air mass formation and precipitation
Energy resources: Renewable and non-renewable energy sources, use of alternate
9.
energy sources, growing energy needs, case studies
Total 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
conducted at level of the constituent unit. Applicable for batch
admitted in academic year 2019-2020
Examination pattern (theory): Multiple choice questions :10 marks
No. of Question X
Multiple choice questions 10 1 1 x 10 10
Total Total= 10
EXAMINATION SCHEME
University Examination pattern (Theory):40 marks
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Theory): 20 marks
No. of Question X
Total Total= 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks from internal examination

94
Books:
1. Plumwood V, Low N. Global Ethics and Environment.

2. Gleick PH. Water in crisis. Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security.
Stockholm Env. Institute, Oxford Univ. Press. 473p. 1993;9.
3. Principles of conservation biology Martha J Groom; Gary K Meffe; C Ronald Carroll
Sunderland, Mass. : Sinauer Associates,©2006.
4. Odum, E.P., Odum, H.T. & Andrews, J. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. Philadelphia:
Saunders.
5. Pepper, I.L., Gerba, C.P. &Brusseau, M.L. 2011. Environmental and Pollution Science.
Academic Press.
6. Raven, P.H., Hassenzahl, D.M. & Berg, L.R. 2012. Environment. 8th edition. John Wiley
&Sons.
7. Rosencranz, A., Divan, S., & Noble, M. L. 2001. Environmental law and policy in India.
Tripathi 1992.
8. Sengupta, R. 2003. Ecology and economics: An approach to sustainable development.
OUP.
9. Singh, J.S., Singh, S.P. and Gupta, S.R. 2014. Ecology, Environmental Science and
Conservation. S. Chand Publishing, New Delhi.
10. Sodhi, N.S., Gibson, L. & Raven, P.H. (eds). 2013. Conservation Biology: Voices from
the Tropics. John Wiley &Sons.
11. Warren, C. E. 1971. Biology and Water Pollution Control. WB Saunders.
95

Name of the Course English and Communication Skills
Course Code AECC003
Course Description Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course – Theory
Semester Semester I
Credits per semester 3 credit
Hours per semester 60 hours

CO 1 apply basics of grammar and writing skills
CO 1 apply and communicate ideas orally and in writing with a high level of proficiency
CO 2 use appropriate expressions in varied situations and topics of interest
demonstrate independence in using basic language structure in oral and written
CO 3
CO 4 apply correct usage of English grammar in writing and speaking
CO 5 speak in English both in terms of fluency and comprehensibility
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
Basics of Grammar –
1 Vocabulary, Synonyms, Antonyms, Prefix and Suffix, Homonyms, Analogies and 6
Portmanteau words
Basics of Grammar – Part II –
2 Active, Passive, Direct and Indirect speech, Prepositions, Conjunctions and 6
Euphemisms
Writing Skills -
3 Letter Writing, Email, Essay, Articles, Memos, one word substitutes, note making and 6
Comprehension
4 Writing and Reading, Summary writing, Creative writing, newspaper reading 6
5 Practical Exercise, Formal speech, Phonetics, semantics and pronunciation 6
Introduction to communication skills
Communication process, Elements of communication, Barriers of communication and
6 6
how to overcome them, Nuances for communicating with patients and their attenders in
Hospitals
Speaking
7 6
Importance of speaking efficiently, Voice culture, Preparation of speech. Secrets of
96
good delivery, Audience psychology, handling , Presentation skills, Individual

feedback for each student, Conference/Interview technique
Listening
8 Importance of listening , Self-assessment, Action plan execution, Barriers in listening, 6
Good and persuasive listening
Reading
What is efficient and fast reading, Awareness of existing reading habits, tested
9 6
techniques for improving speed, Improving concentration and comprehension through
systematic study
Non Verbal Communication
10 Basics of non-verbal communication, Rapport building skills using neuro- linguistic 6
programming (NLP), Communication in Physiotherapy practice
Total 60
Text books:
1. Lock G. Functional English grammar: An introduction for second language teachers.

Cambridge University Press;1996
2. Van Servellen G. Communication skills for the health care professional: Concepts,
practice, and evidence. Jones & Bartlett Publishers; 2009.
Examination Scheme
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Evaluation will be conducted at level
of the constituent unit.
Applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020
Theory question paper pattern for assessment under CBCS - 40 Marks

Section 1
Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
97
University Examination pattern (Theory) :40 marks


Total= 40
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) :20 marks


Total= 20
98

Name of the Course Basic Skills in patient care
Course Code BPTCLT001
Course Description Clinical Training
Semester Semester I
Credits per semester 3 credits
Students will be introduced to basic skills in patient care such as history taking, reading
patient files and communication skills.

Q No 1 Case 1 10
Q No 2 Case 2 10
Total = 20
*Students will be evaluated as per their level of knowledge level.
(EXAMINATION SCHEME
University examination pattern (practical): 40 marks

Q No 1 Case 1 20
Q No 2 Case 2 20
Total = 40

Q No 1 Case 1 10
Q No 2 Case 2 10
Total = 20
99
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-II (7-12 months)
Course Theory Practical Clinical

Course Code Course Title Credits
Description Hours Hours Hours
Human Anatomy
BPT007 Core Theory II 60 - - 3
Theory
Human Anatomy
BPT008 Core Practical - 80 - 2
II Practical
Human Physiology
BPT009 Core Theory 60 - - 3
II
Human Physiology
BPT010 Core Practical - 40 1
II
BPT011 Core Theory Kinesiotherapy II 40 - - 2
BPT012 Core Practical Kinesiotherapy II 80 2
BPT013 Core Theory Thermal Agents 40 - - 2
BPT014 Core Practical Thermal Agents - 40 - 1
Ability
Enhancement
AECC004 Biochemistry 60 - - 3
Compulsory
Course
Ability
Environmental
AECC005 Enhancement 20 40 - 2
Sciences II
Elective Course
Introduction to
basic skills in
BPTCLT002 Clinical Training - - 160 2
patient care
Clinics II
100

Human Anatomy-II
Name of the Course
Theory
Course Code BPT-007
Semester Semester II

CO 1 describe anatomy of lower quadrant including spine, pelvis and lower extremities: list bones,
joints, soft tissues, muscles related to musculoskeletal system of spine & lower extremities
and to localize various surface land-marks, apply related
radiological and living anatomy
CO 2 describe anatomy of structures of head, face and neck
CO 3 describe and outline various parts of nervous system: Source, course & components of
various trans-sections of spinal tracts and C.N.S; Source, course & components of various
trans-sections of brain, cranial nerves (Special emphasis to III, IV, V, VI & VII) &
peripheral nerves.
CO 4 describe blood circulation of C.N.S. & spinal cord.
CO 5 describe the course of peripheral nerves.
CO 6 discuss anatomical basis of clinical conditions of nervous system.
CO 7 demonstrate movements of lower extremity joints – Identify & describe the
origin/insertion, nerve /blood supply, root value & function of various skeletal muscles
(including lower extremity and spine)
101
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
Musculoskeletal anatomy
a. Inferior extremity
1
b. Overview of pelvic girdle & pelvic floor muscles.
18
c. Spine
Head, Face and Neck
a. Facial muscles and its blood and nerve supply.
b. Triangles of neck, Glands, Tongue &Palate
c. Larynx &Pharynx
2
d. Muscles of Mastication & T.M. joint
e. Extra ocular muscles with nerve supply 14
f. Nose & Para nasal sinuses
Neuro anatomy
a. General organization of C.N.S. (Brain & spinal cord)
b. Central Nervous System
3 c. Cranial nerves -Peripheral nervous system
d. Autonomic Nervous System -Sensory system, 28
e. Neuro-muscular junction
f. Neuro-muscular integration
Total 60
102
EXAMINATION SCHEME
marks

Section1
5 out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,3)
3 out of 4 5 5x3
units 1,2,3)
Long Answer Question (from 40
units 1,3) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Section 2
5out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,3)
3 out of 4 5 5x3
units 1,2,3)
units 1,3) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 80

Section1
5out of 6 3 3x 5
units 1,2,3)
3 out of 4 5 5x3
units 1,2,3)
units 1,3) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 40
103

Human Anatomy-II
Name of the Course
Practical
Course Code BPT-008

CO 1 Identify and list bones, joints, soft tissues, muscles related to musculoskeletal system of
spine & lower extremities and to localize various surface land-marks, apply related
radiological and living anatomy
CO 2 Identify structures of head, face and neck

CO 3 Identify source, course & components of various trans-sections of spinal tracts and C.N.S;
Source, course & components of various trans-sections of brain, cranial nerves (Special
emphasis to III, IV, V, VI & VII) & peripheral nerves.
CO 4 demonstrate movements of lower extremity joints – Identify & describe the

origin/insertion, nerve /blood supply, root value & function of various skeletal muscles
(including lower extremity and spine) , course of peripheral nerves
104
No of
Unit Topics
Hrs
Musculoskeletal anatomy 30
1 Lower Quadrant: Inferior extremity & Spine – with Radiological & Living Anatomy
and Osteology
2 Head, face and neck – with Radiological & Living Anatomy, Osteology 20
3 Neuro anatomy 30
Total Hours 80
80 marks
Exercise Description Marks Total

= 80
Q No 1 Spots (lower limb, spine, neuroanatomy, 2M x 10 = 20 20
head, neck, face)
Q No 2 OSPE 10 M x 4= 40 40
2 supervised stations (lower limb, spine
anatomy)
2 unsupervised stations (neuroanatomy, head,
neck and face anatomy)
Q No 3 Viva 10 10
Description Marks
Spots 25
/OSPE
Viva 10
Journal 05
Total 40
respectively.
105
80 marks
(As per Resolution 3.8 of AC 41, applicable from batch 2021-22)
Exercise Description Marks Total

= 80
Q No 1 Spots (lower limb, spine, neuroanatomy, 2M x 10 = 20 20
head, neck, face)
Q No 2 OSPE 10 M x 4= 40 40
2 supervised stations (lower limb, spine
anatomy)
2 unsupervised stations (neuroanatomy, head,
neck and face anatomy)
Q No 3 Objectively Structured Viva Examination(OSVE) 10 10

Description Marks
Spots 25
/OSPE
Objectively 10
Structured
Viva
Examination
(OSVE)
Journal 05
Total 40
respectively.
106
1. Snell RS. Clinical anatomy: an illustrated review with questions and explanations.
2. Chaurasia BD. Human anatomy Volume- I, II & III, CBS Publisher; 2004. Singh
Vishram Textbook of Anatomy Head, Neck, and Brain; Volume III;2014
3. Singh I. Textbook of human neuroanatomy. Jaypee Brothers Publishers;2006.
4. Kadasne'S T.B.of Anatomy Vol.1 Upper And Lower Extremities2009
5. Singh V. Textbook of clinical neuroanatomy. Elsevier Health Sciences;2014.
6. Dutta AK. Essentials of human anatomy, head and neck.
1. Johnson TB, Whillis J. Gray's Anatomy: Descriptive and Applied. Longman;1958.

2. Eroschenko VP, Di Fiore MS. DiFiore's atlas of histology with functional correlations.
3. DiFiore's Atlas of Histology with Functional Correlations
4. Wells K. Kinesiology, ed. 3, Philadelphia,1960.
5. Snell RS. Neuroanatomy: a review with questions and explanations. Little, Brown; 1992
Jan.
6. Singh V. Textbook of clinical neuroanatomy. Elsevier Health Sciences; 2014 Aug14.
7. Romanes GJ. Cunningham's manual of practical anatomy.
107

Name of the Course Human Physiology II
Course Code BPT-009

describe of various systems, with special reference to Nervous system, & neuro-
CO 1
motor alterations in function with aging
analyze physiological response & adaptation to environmental stresses-with
CO 2
special emphasis on physical activity, altitude, temperature
demonstrate basic clinical examination, with special emphasis to special senses,
CO 3
sensations, reflex testing, Exercise tolerance / Ergography.
CO 4 describe physiological functions of reproductive system, gastro intestinal system
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
Nervous system
a. Introduction of nervous system, classification – C.N.S, P.N.S. &A.N.S.
b. Synapse-structure, properties, &transmission;
c. Reflexes-classification &properties;
d. Receptor physiology: classification, properties.
e. Physiology of Touch, Pain, Temperature &Proprioception;
f. Sensory and motor tracts: effect of transaction (complete and incomplete)
1 at various levels 25
g. Physiology of Muscle Tone (muscle spindle); Stretch reflex.
h. Connection & function of Basal ganglia, Thalamus, Hypothalamus,
Sensory and Motor cortex, Cerebellum, Limbic system, Vestibular
Apparatus
i. Autonomic nervous system: Structure and functions of the sympathetic
and the parasympathetic nervous system.
j. Learning, memory & conditioned reflex
k. Physiology of Voluntary movement
Endocrine
2 a. Secretion-regulation & function of Pituitary-thyroid-adrenal-parathyroid- 7
pancreas (emphasis on insulin)
Temperature Regulation
3 a. Circulation of the skin- body fluid- electrolyte balance 3
108
Special Senses
a. Structure and function of the eye
b. Applied physiology: errors of refraction, accommodation,
4 5
c. Reflexes - dark and light adaptation, photosensitivity.
d. Structure and function of the ear
e. Applied physiology- types of deafness
Reproductive system-
5 a. Function of estrogen, progesterone, testosterone, spermatogenesis, 5
menstruation ,menopause
Gastrointestinal system
6 a. Motility-Secretion-Regulation-Digestion- Splanchnic circulation 5
7 Exercise Physiology BMR 6
8 Physiology of Ageing 4
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
marks
Section1
5 out of 6 3 3x 5
units 2-6,8)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 2-6,8)
units 1,7) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Section 2
5out of 6 3 3x 5
units 2-6,8)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 2-6,8)
units 1,7) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 80
109

Section1
5out of 6 3 3x 5
units 2-6,7)
3 out of 4 5 5x3 40
units 2-6,7)
units 1,7) 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10
Total= 40
110

Name of the Course Human Physiology II
Course Code BPT-010
No. of
Sr. No. Topics
Hrs.
Clinical Examination
1 i. Nervous system - higher functions /Memory/ Time/ Orientation / Reflexes/
Motor & Sensory System 20
Physical fitness
i. Breath holding
2 15
ii. Mercury Column Test
iii. Cardiac Efficiency Test – Harvard Step Test, Master Step Test
3 Perimetry 5
Total 40
80 marks
Q No 1 OSPE (4 stations- Central Nervous system) 10 M x 4= 40
Q No 3 Viva 10
Q No 4 Journal 10
Total = 80
Practical question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS -80 marks

Q No 1 OSPE (4 stations- Central Nervous system) 10 M x 4= 40
Q No 3 Objectively Structured Viva Examination(OSVE) 10
Q No 4 Journal 10
111
Total = 80

(Examination pattern applicable for batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020)

Q No 1 OSPE (2 stations) 20 marks
Q No 2 Spots (4 x 5 marks) 20 marks
Total Total = 40 M
112
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks, for theory and practical, respectively
Text Books same as for Human Physiology I
1. Text book on Medical Physiology –Guyton

2. Textbook of Physiology – A K Jain (for MBBS students)
1. Review of Medical Physiology –Ganong

2. Samson & Wright’s Applied Physiology
3. Textbook of Medical Physiology – Bern and Levy
113

Name of the Course Kinesiotherapy – II
Course Code BPT011

describe the physiological effects, therapeutic use, merits / demerits of soft tissue
CO 1 manipulations (massage), & demonstrate the skill of application of various manipulations &
the limbs, face, back & abdomen
describe types of Goniometry, methods of assessment of joint range of motion,
CO 2 measure range of motion of joints of lower extremity and spine by using
Goniometry
discuss physiological basis, principles, therapeutic use of relaxation & demonstrate
CO 3
various methods of relaxation
demonstrate group & recreational activities, examining advantages and disadvantages of
group exercises, general fitness exercises used in physical training, describe physiological
CO 4
responses and principles of aerobic exercises for general
fitness & demonstrate fitness skills on self/healthy people.
114
No. of
Units Topics
Hrs.
Goniometry- Diagnostic application for identification of movement

dysfunction
a. Overview of surface anatomy
b. Bony land marks of skeletal system --Reference points for identification of
vertebral level, Tarsal bone Land marks for identification of articular surface &
peri- articular structures of lower extremity joints
1 12
c. Revision of Definition and Types of Goniometers
d. Principles
e. Techniques for individual joints with biomechanical principles–
Lower quadrant
f. Assessment of Spinal mobility
Soft Tissue maneuvers

a. Types of maneuvers
b. Physiological principles of each
c. Therapeutic uses
2 d. Indications and contraindications 8
e. Pre-session preparation–Type of media used for manipulation
; Environment
f. Starting positions – used for model as well as therapist.
g. Skills on Lower limb, Abdomen and back.
Principles of General Fitness

a. Physiology of aerobic and anaerobic exercise.
3. b. Components of fitness (definition of terms only) 8
c. Warmup
d. Cool down exercises
Group & recreational activities
a. Advantages and disadvantages
4. 7
b. Basic principles of General fitness exercises for healthy
c. Need for fitness exercise for sedentary life
Relaxation
a. Principles,
5. b. Techniques along with their effects &uses 5
General – Jacobson’s, Shavasana & Reciprocal ( Laura Mitchell ) Local-
Heat, Massage, Gentle/Rhythmic passive movements
Total 40
115

Name of the Course Kinesiotherapy – II
Course Code BPT012

demonstrate techniques for measurement of range of motion of individual joints with
application of biomechanical principles – Lower quadrant and assessment of Spinal mobility,
CO 1
identify bony fulcrum, fixed arm and movable arm of goniometer for
testing joint movement, identify structures affecting joint mobility
demonstrate and apply different types of soft tissue maneuvers on lower limb,
CO 2
abdomen and back with understanding of indications and contraindications of each.
design general fitness program inclusive of warm up, conditioning phase and cool
CO 3
down.
CO 4 demonstrate group & recreational activities focusing on special groups of people,
Demonstrating relaxation techniques: General – Jacobson’s, Shavasana
CO 5 &Reciprocal ( Laura Mitchell ) Local- Heat, Massage, Gentle/Rhythmic passive
movements, with understand of principles, techniques, effects & uses
Sr. No. Topics No. of Hrs.

1 Goniometry – Lower quadrant and spinal mobility 20
Soft Tissue maneuvers
2 20
Skills on Lower limb, Abdomen, Back
Principles of Physical fitness
3 10
Warm up and cool down, aerobic activities
4 Group and recreational activities 10
5 Relaxation techniques 20
Total 80
116
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks
Section 1
Short answer questions
8 out of 10 5 8x5 40
(from units 1-5)
Section 2
Long answer question
4 out of 5 10 4 x 10 40
(from units 1-5)
Total= 80
Practical question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80 marks

Q No 1 Exercise- (from unit 1,2-lower 2x10=20
quadrant goniometry, Soft Tissue
maneuvers )
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations (from unit 3- 2x10=20
fitness)
Q No 3 2 OSPE stations (from unit 4,5- 30
Group and recreational activities
/ Relaxation techniques)
Q No 4 Journal 10
Total = 80
No. of Question X
Short answers (units 1-5) 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
Long answers (from units
2 out of 3 10 2 x 10 20
1-5)
Total Total= 40
117
Internal examination pattern (practical): 40marks

Exercise- (from unit 1,2-lower
Q No 1 quadrant goniometry, Soft Tissue 1x10=10
maneuvers )
2 OSPE stations (from unit 3-
Q No 2 1x10=10
fitness)
2 OSPE stations (from unit 4,5-
Q No 3 Group and recreational activities / 15
Relaxation techniques)
Q No 4 Journal 5
Total 40 marks

2. Licht SH, editor. Massage, manipulation, and traction. E. Licht;1960.
3. Kisner C, Colby LA, Borstad J. Therapeutic exercise: Foundations and techniques. FaDavis;
2017 Oct18.
4. Hollis M. Massage for therapists: a guide to soft tissue therapy. Wiley-Blackwell; 2009.
5. Hollis M, Cook PF, editors. Practical exercise therapy. Wiley-Blackwell;1999.
6. Practical Exercise therapy Margaret Hollis, Phyllis Fletcher Cook Wiley
7. Norkin CC, White DJ. Measurement of joint motion. A guide to goniometry.1995
8. Levangie PK, Norkin CC. Joint Structure and function: a comprehensive analysis. 3rd.
Philadelphia: FA. Davis Company.2000.
9. Houglum PA, Bertoti DB. Brunnstrom's clinical kinesiology. FA Davis;2011.
10. World Health Organisation; Global Strategy on Diet, Physical Activity and Health
11. McArdle WD, Katch FI, Katch VL. Exercise physiology: nutrition, energy, and human
performance. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins;2010.
12. Kennedy-Armbruster C, Yoke M. Methods of group exercise instruction. HumanKinetics;
2014 .
respectively
118

Name of the Course Thermal Agents
Course Code BPT013

At the end of the course the candidate will be able to –
CO 1
Test the working of the various superficial thermal agents
State and explain physical principles of Thermal Energy,
Cryotherapy and equipment used to deliver cryotherapy- assess physiological effects,
CO 2 therapeutic effects/uses, compare and contrast merits/demerits, Indications/contra-
indications, demonstrate skills of application, discuss dosage
Describe & identify various equipment’s used to deliver superficial heat therapy - radiant
energy techniques like Infrared, Ultraviolet and LASER therapy (production, physiological,
therapeutic effects, techniques of application, indications & contraindications, dangers,
precautions and dosage) ; superficial thermal agents such as Paraffin wax bath, Hydrocollator
CO 3
packs, IRR, UVR, Laser, home remedies, their
physiological & therapeutic effects, Merits / demerits & acquire the skill of application.
CO 4 Distinguish between Cryotherapy and Thermotherapy
Unit Topics No. of

Hrs.
Physical Principles of Thermal Energy
a. Specific Heat
1. 8
b. Modes of Heat Transfer
Physiological effects, Therapeutic effects/ Uses, Merits/demerits,

Indications/contra-indications, Skills of application of:
a. Paraffin wax bath
2. 10
b. Hydro-collator hot packs
c. Contrast bath
d. Whirl pool
119
e. Cryotherapy
3. Choosing Between Cryotherapy and Thermotherapy 2
Infra-red Radiation (I.R.R)
a. Definition, Types and production
b. Physiological & Therapeutic effects
4. c. Technique & Methods of Application 7
d. Dosage control
e. Indications &contraindications
f. Dangers &Precautions
Ultra-violet Radiation (U.V.R)
a. Definition, Types and production
5. c. Test Dose and Dosage calculation 6
d. Technique & Methods of Application
e. Indications &contraindications
LASER
a. Definition, Types and Production.
6. c. Technique & Methods of Application 7
d. Indications &Contraindications
e. Dosage
Total 40
120

Name of the Course Thermal Agents
Course Code BPT014
No. of
Sr. No. Topics
Hrs.
The skill of application of thermal agents (on models):
a. Hot packs
b. P.W.B.
1 20
c. Whirlpool
d. Contrast bath
e. Cryotherapy
2 The techniques of testing I.R. ,U.V.R. ,LASER 20
Total 40
Examination Scheme
conducted at the level of the constituent unit.
Examination pattern (theory): 40marks
No. of Question X
Short answers
8 out of 9 5 8x5 40
(from units 1-6)
Examination pattern (practical): 40marks
Exercise Question X marks Marks

Station 1 1x10 10
Station 2 1x10 10
Station 3 1x10 10
Station 4 1x10 10
Total 40
121
EXAMINATION SCHEME
APLICABLE FOR BATCH ADMITTED FROM ACADEMIC YEAR 2020-2021 ONWARDS as per Resolution
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
End Semester University Examination pattern (Theory): 40marks
No. of Question X
Short answers
8 out of 10 5 8x5 40
(from units 1-6)
End Semester University Examination pattern (Practical): 40marks

Case 1 1x10 10
Case 2 1x10 10
Case3 1x10 10
Case 4 1x10 10
Total 40
No. of Question X
Short answers
4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
(from units 1-6)
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Practical): 20marks

Case 1 1x10 10
Case 2 1x10 10
Total 20

1. Kitchen S, Bazin S, editors. Clayton's electrotherapy. Bailliere Tindall Limited;1996.
2. Robertson V, Ward A, Low J, Reed A, MCSP D. Electrotherapy explained:principles
and practice. Elsevier Health Sciences; 2006
3. Kahn J. Principles and practice of electrotherapy. Saunders;2000.
118
6. Norkin CC, White DJ. Measurement of joint motion: a guide to goniometry. FA Davis;2016
1. Nelson RM, Hayes KW, Currier DP, editors. Clinical electrotherapy. Prentice Hall;1999.
119

Name of the Course Environmental Sciences II
Course Code AECC005
Course Description Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course (AECC)
Course continued from Semester I

CO1 Categorize different aspects of environmental contamination, which adversely
affect human health, mechanisms of pollutants impacting human health, different
types of pollutants, their sources and mitigation measures
CO2 Outline the legal structure of India and fundamentals of environmental
legislation and policy making.
CO3 Identify environmental hazards, their causes, classifications, and impacts, management
strategies and governmental action plan to mitigate and prepare for such hazards, global
changes on human communities and initiatives taken at
global and regional levels to combat them.
CO4 Describe the multidisciplinary nature, components of environment, concept of
sustainable development and structure and function of ecosystem.
CO5 Plan strategies to conserve and protect the natural resources such as fuel, food,
water, electricity at home and in the community and social environment
CO6 Assess the impact of significant global environmental issues such as acid rain, climate
change, and resource depletion; historical developments in cultural, social and economic
issues related to land, forest, and water management in a
global context; interface between environment and society.
120
No. of
Units Topics
Hrs.
Unit 4: Environmental Pollution
1 Environmental pollution: types, causes, effects and controls; Air, water, soil,
chemical and noise pollution
5
2 Solid waste management: Control measures of urban and industrial waste
3 Nuclear hazards and human health risks
Unit 5: Environmental Policies & Practices
1 Climate change, global warming, ozone layer depletion, acid rain and impacts on
human communities and agriculture.
Environment Laws: Environment Protection Act; Air (Prevention & Control of
Pollution) Act; Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act; Wildlife Protection Act;
2 Forest Conservation Act; International agreements; Montreal and Kyoto protocols and 5
conservation on Biological Diversity (CBD). The Chemical Weapons
Convention(CWC).
Nature reserves, tribal population and rights, and human, wildlife conflicts in Indian
3
context
Unit 6: Human Communities and the Environment
1 Human population and growth: Impacts on environment, human health and

welfares.
2 Carbon foot-print.
3 Resettlement and rehabilitation of project affected persons; case studies.
4 Disaster management: floods, earthquakes, cyclones and landslides.
10
5 Environmental movements: Chipko, Silent valley, Bishnios of Rajasthan.
Environmental ethics: Role of Indian and other religions and cultures in
6
environmental conservation.
7 Environmental communication and public awareness, case studies (e.g., CNG

vehicles in Delhi).
Practical Aspects : Field Visits 40
Total 60
121
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Applicable to batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Evaluation will
beconducted at the level of the constituent unit.
Theory question paper pattern - 40 Marks

Short answers (from unit 1-6) 8 out of 9 5 8x5 40
Total Total= 40
Practical evaluation – Students will submit a field visit report which will be evaluated
for 20 Marks
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Theory question paper pattern - 40 Marks

Short answers 8 out of 9 5 8x5 40
Total Total= 40
Practical evaluation – Students will submit a field visit report which will be evaluated out of 40 Marks
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) - 20 Marks

Total Total= 20
122
Mid Semester Practical evaluation – Students will submit a field visit report which will be evaluated
out of 20 Marks
Recommended Books:
1. Plumwood V, Low N. Global Ethics and Environment.

2. Gleick PH. Water in crisis. Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment &
Security. Stockholm Env. Institute, Oxford Univ. Press. 473p.1993;9.
3. Principles of conservation biology Martha J Groom; Gary K Meffe; C Ronald Carroll
Sunderland, Mass. : Sinauer Associates,©2006.
4. Odum, E.P., Odum, H.T. & Andrews, J. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. Philadelphia:
Saunders.
5. Pepper, I.L., Gerba, C.P. &Brusseau, M.L. 2011. Environmental and Pollution Science.
AcademicPress.
6. Raven, P.H., Hassenzahl, D.M. & Berg, L.R. 2012. Environment. 8th edition. John Wiley
&Sons.
7. Rosencranz, A., Divan, S., & Noble, M. L. 2001. Environmental law and policy in India.
Tripathi 1992.
8. Sengupta, R. 2003. Ecology and economics: An approach to sustainable development.
OUP.
9. Singh, J.S., Singh, S.P. and Gupta, S.R. 2014. Ecology, Environmental Science and
Conservation. S. Chand Publishing, New Delhi.
10. Sodhi, N.S., Gibson, L. & Raven, P.H. (eds). 2013. Conservation Biology: Voices from
the Tropics. John Wiley &Sons.
11. Warren, C. E. 1971. Biology and Water Pollution Control. WB Saunders.
123

Name of the Course Biochemistry
Course Code AECC004
Course Description Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course - Theory
Course Outcomes
describe carbohydrate, fat and protein metabolism, classification, digestion,
CO 1
absorption , regulation and clinical application
CO 2 define bio-enzymes, classify, factors affecting enzyme action and therapeutic uses
describe vitamins, minerals, hormones - classify, discuss manifestations of
nutritional deficiency
discuss normal levels in body fluids required for functioning and their abnormal
CO 3
levels to understand the disease process
discuss biochemical mechanisms of muscle contraction and biochemistry of
CO 4
connective tissue
CO 5 describe functions of nucleic acids
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
Cell
1 -Introduction, Cell structure, Cell membrane structure and function, various types of 1
absorption. Intracellular organelles and their functions, briefly on cytoskeleton.
Carbohydrates
a. Definition, general classification with examples, Glycosidic bond

b. Structures, composition, sources, properties and functions of Monosaccharides,
Disaccharides, Oligosaccharides and Polysaccharides.
c. Glycosaminoglycan(mucopolysaccharides)
2 6
Carbohydrate metabolism
a. Introduction, Glycolysis – Aerobic, Anaerobic Citric acid cycle, Substrate level
phosphorylation.
b. Glycogen metabolism – Glycogenesis, Glycogenolysis, Metabolic disorders
glycogen, Gluconeogenesis, Coricycle
c. Hormonal regulation of glucose, Glycosuria, Diabetes mellitus.
124
Proteins
a. Amino acid chemistry: Definition, Classification, Peptide bonds

b. Peptides: Definition, Biologically important peptides
c. Protein chemistry: Definition, Classification, Functions of proteins, 6
3
Protein metabolism
a. Catabolism of amino acids -Introduction, transamination, deamination,
Fate of ammonia, transport of ammonia, Urea cycle
b. Specialized products formed from amino acids - from glycine, arginine,
methionine, phenylalanine and tyrosine.
Lipid
a. Definition, general classification

b. Definition, classification, properties and functions of Fatty acids,
Triacylglycerol, Phospholipids, Cholesterol
c. Essential fatty acids and their importance
d. Lipoproteins: Definition, classification, properties, Sources and function Ketone
bodies
Lipid Metabolism
4 a. Introduction to lipid metabolism, Lipolysis, Oxidation of fatty acids -oxidation 6
of fatty acids,
b. Lipogenesis - Denovo synthesis of fatty acids, chain elongation, desaturation,
triacylglycerol synthesis, fat metabolism in adipose tissues
c. Ketone body metabolism: Ketone body formation (ketogenesis), utilization
(ketolysis), ketosis, Rothera’s test.
d. Cholesterol metabolism: synthesis, degradation, cholesterol transport
e. Hypercholesterolemia and its effects (atherosclerosis and coronary heart diseases)
Hypocholesterolemia agents, Common hypolipoproteinemia, Fatty liver
Digestion and Absorption
5 General characteristics of digestion and absorption, Digestion and absorption of 2

carbohydrates, proteins and lipids. Disorders of digestion and absorption – Lactose
intolerance.
Enzymes
6 Definition, Active site, Cofactor (Coenzyme, Activator), Proenzyme. Classification with 4

examples, Factors effecting enzyme activity, Enzyme inhibition and significance,
Isoenzymes, Diagnostic enzymology (clinical significance of enzymes)
Vitamins
7 a. Definition, classification according to solubility, 4

b. Individual vitamins - Sources, Coenzyme forms, functions, RDA, digestion,
absorption and transport, deficiency and toxicity.
125
Minerals
8 Definition, Sources, RDA, Digestion, absorption, transport, excretion, functions, disorder 3

of Individual minerals - Calcium, phosphate, iron, Magnesium, fluoride, selenium,
molybdenum, copper. Phosphate, calcium and iron in detail.
Nutrition
a. Introduction, Importance of nutrition Calorific values, Respiratory quotient –

Definition, and its significance Energy requirement of a person - Basal metabolic
rate: Definition, Normal values, factor affecting BMR Special dynamic action of
food.
b. Physical activities - Energy expenditure for various activities. Calculation of
energy requirement of person
9 c. Balanced diet 3
i. Recommended dietary allowances
ii. Role of carbohydrates in diet: Digestible carbohydrates and dietary fibers
iii. Role of lipids in diet
iv. Role of proteins in diet: Quality of proteins - Biological value, net protein
utilization, Nutritional aspects of proteins-essential and non- essential amino
acids. Nitrogen balance
v. Nutritional disorders.
Hormones
10 1
Definition, classification, Mechanism of hormone action. Receptors, signal transduction,
second messengers and cell function.
Muscle Contraction and Connective Tissue
Contractile elements in muscle, briefly on the process of muscle contraction, Energy for
11 muscle contraction 2
Connective Tissue-
Introduction, various connective tissue proteins: Collagen, elastin - Structure and
associated disorders. Glycoproteins, Proteoglycans.
Nucleic Acid
a. Nucleotide chemistry: Nucleotide composition, functions of free nucleotides in

12 body. 1
b. Nucleic acid (DNA and RNA) chemistry: Difference between DNA and RNA,
Structure of DNA (Watson and Crick model), Functions of DNA. Structure and
functions of tRNA, rRNA,mRNA.
Acid-Base balance –
13 Acids, bases and buffers, pH. Buffer systems of the body, bicarbonate buffer system 1
Role of lungs and kidneys in acid base balance, Acid base imbalance.
Water and Electrolyte –Osmorality and role of aldosterone and ADH
126
Clinical Biochemistry
a. Normal levels of blood and urine constituents, Relevance of blood and urine
levels of Glucose, Urea, Uric acid, Creatinine, Calcium, Phosphates, pH
and Bicarbonate. Liver function tests, Renal function tests.
Normal levels of blood and urine constituents(1 Hour each= 13 hours)
1. Introduction to clinical biochemistry laboratory, blood collection and
anticoagulants.
2. Demonstrate the estimation of blood glucose
3. Demonstrate the estimation of blood urea
4. Demonstrate the estimation of serum creatinine and creatinine
clearance
5. Demonstrate estimation of serum proteins, albumin and A: Gratio
6. Demonstrate estimation of calcium and phosphorous
7. Demonstrate the estimation of serum bilirubin
8. Demonstrate the estimation of SGOT and SGPT
14 9. Demonstrate the estimation of alkaline phosphatase 20
10. Demonstrate the estimation of Uric acid
11. Normal and abnormal constituents of urine
12. Demonstrate the estimation of ABG analysis
13. Water balance and imbalance and Interpretation of serum
electrolytes
Case studies based on Relevance of blood and urine levels of various
constituents in various diseases. (1 hour each= 7 hours)
1. Diabetes mellitus
2. Dyslipidemia, Myocardial infarction
3. Renal failure,- proteinuria,- nephrotic syndrome
4. Jaundice,- liver diseases
5. Gout
6. Thyroid disorders
7. Muscular and connective tissue disorders
Total 60
127
EXAMINATION SCHEME
conducted at level of the constituent unit
Theory question paper pattern for Internal Assessment under CBCS - 40 Marks

Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Theory question paper pattern - 40 Marks

Total Total= 40
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) - 20 Marks

Total Total= 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks.
128

1. Satyanarayana Biochemistry Aug2013
2. Vasudevan DM, Sreekumari S, Vaidyanathan K. Textbook of biochemistry
for medical students. JP Medical Ltd;2013
3. Naik P. Essentials of Biochemistry (for Medical Students). JP Medical Ltd;2011.
1. Wood EJ. Harper's biochemistry 24th edition
129

Students will be introduced to basic skills in patient care such as history taking, reading
patient files and communication skills.

Q No 1 OSPE Station 1 10
Total = 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Short Case 1 20
Total = 40

Total = 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks from internal examination.
130
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)Semester-III (13- 18 months)
Course Course Theory Practical Clinical

Course Title Credits
Codes Description Hours Hours Hours
BPT015 Kinesiology Core Theory 60 - - 3
Clinical
applications of Core Practical - 80 - 2
BPT016
Kinesiology
Electrotherapy
Theory
Electrotherapy
Practical
BPT019 Pharmacology Core Theory 60 - - 3
Psychology &
Psychiatry
Indian Human Skill Elective
SEC001 Movement Science I Course
20 40 - 2
-Yoga therapy
Ergonomics and
health promotion/ Ability
AECC001/ Enhancement
AECC002
Personality 40 - - 2
development and Elective Course
learning styles
Basic skills in Clinical

BPTCLT003 - - 280 4
patient care I Training
Total 280 160 280 22
131

Kinesiology
Name of the Course
Theory
Course Code BPT015
Semester Semester III

CO 1 explain principles of biophysics related to mechanics of movement / motion & apply
these principles to biomechanics of human movement
CO 2 explain kinetics and kinematics of spine, joints of upper and lower extremities,
Temporo- Mandibular joint and thoracic cage
CO 3 explain musculoskeletal movements during normal gait and Activities of Daily Living
CO 4 explain factors determining muscle action during normal gait and Activities of Daily
Living
CO 5 explain factors influencing normal human posture [static & dynamic], postural control
mechanisms and postural deviations
Unit Topics Hours

1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMECHANICS:
a. Muscle Biomechanics
i. Elements of muscle structure – fiber, size, motor unit, length tension,
arrangement & number relationship
ii. Classification of muscles
iii. Mobility and Stability of muscles
iv. Types of muscle contraction and factors affecting muscle function.
b. Joint Biomechanics 5
i. Basic principles of joint design
ii. Classification of joints
iii. Osteo-kinematics & Arthro-kinematics
iv. Concave Convex Rule
v. Joint function, kinetics & kinematics
132
2 REGIONAL KINESIOLOGY
Biomechanics of
i. Vertebral Column
ii. Thorax
iii. Upper Quadrant - Shoulder Complex, Elbow joint, Wrist and Hand Complex
35
iv. Lower Quadrant – Sacroiliac, Hip, Knee, Ankle-foot complex
v. Temporo-mandibular joint
3 KINETICS AND KINEMATICS OF GAIT AND ADLS

a. Gait
i. Human locomotion
ii. Subjective & Objective evaluation
iii. Gait cycle & Measurable parameters
(Step Length, Step Width, Stride Length, Foot Angle, Cadence)
iv. Kin0etics and kinematics of gait
v. Determinants of gait 10
b. Kinetics and kinematics of various Activities of daily living

i. Supine to Sitting, sitting to Standing, Squatting, Climbing up &down
ii. Lifting, Pulling, Pushing, Overhead activities,
iii. Running, Jogging.
4 POSTURE 5
1. Definition
2. Human posture –Changes from quadruped to biped
3. Correct and faulty posture
4. Postural patterns and Postural Mechanism
5. Factors affecting posture
6. Physiological deviations
7. Analysis of all views
5 BALANCE, MOTOR CONTROL AND POSTURAL CONTROL 5
i. Motor Control
ii. Postural Alignment & Weight Distribution
iii. Sensory Organization
iv. C.N.S. Integration
v. Motor Strategies
60
133
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks

Section 1
Short answer questions (from unit
8 out of 10 5 8x5 40
1-5)
Section 2
Long answer question (from 2-5) 4 out of 5 10 4 x 10 40
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
1. Cynthia C, Norkin D, Pamela K. Joint structure and function. A comprehensive

analysis.1992.
2. Houglum PA, Bertoti DB. Brunnstrom's clinical kinesiology. FA Davis; 2011 Dec7.
1. Steindler A. Kinesiology of the human body under normal and pathological conditions.
Spring-field, IL. Charles C Thomas.1977.
2. Neumann DA. Kinesiology of the musculoskeletal system-e-book: foundations for
rehabilitation. Elsevier Health Sciences; 2013 Aug7.
3. Oatis CA. Kinesiology: the mechanics and pathomechanics of human movement.
134
4. Hamill J, Knutzen KM. Biomechanical basis of human movement. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins; 2006 Oct1.
5. Robert shawe P. Kapandji AI.: The Physiology of the Joints, Volume 3: The Spinal
Column, Pelvic Girdle and Head. Journal of the Australian Traditional-Medicine
Society. 2009 Sep1;15(3):178-9.
6. Margareta Nordin: Basic Biomechanics of Musculoskeletal System, 4thEdition
135

Clinical Applications of Kinesiology
Name of the Course
Practical
Course Code BPT016

CO 1 demonstrate analytical skills in describing kinematics of normal gait and Activities of
Daily Living through observation and 2D analysis
CO 2 demonstrate skill in measuring gait speed, spatial-temporal variables of gait, muscle
action during normal gait and Activities of Daily Living
CO 3 analyze normal human posture [static & dynamic].
CO 4 Apply skills in analysis of joint kinesiology
No of
Unit Topics
Hrs
1 Gait 20
2 Kinetics and kinematics of various Activities of daily living 20
3 Posture and balance 20
4 Joint Kinesiology 20
Total Hours 80
80 marks

Q No 1 Exercise (gait analysis) 30
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations (from unit 1-3) 2 x 20 = 40
Q No 3 Journal 10
Total = 80
136

Q No 1 Exercise (gait analysis) 15
Q No 2 2 OSPE station (from unit 1-3) 20
Q No 3 Journal 5
Total = 40
137

Name of the Course Electrotherapy
Course Code BPT017

Cognitive
CO 1 state and explain physiology of pain, pain pathways &methods of pain
modulation, selection of appropriate modality for pain modulation
State, explain and assess physiological effects, therapeutic effects/uses, compare
and contrast merits/demerits, indications/contra-indications of various Low/
CO 2 Medium & High Frequency currents / Actinotherapy, describe & identify various
equipment’s used to deliver therapeutic currents
State, explain and assess physiological effects, therapeutic effects/uses, compare and
contrast merits/demerits, indications/contra-indications of various therapeutic
CO 3 ions & topical pharmaco -therapeutic agents to be used for the application of
Iontophoresis & sono/ phonophoresis, describe & identify
equipment’s used to deliver Iontophoresis & sono/ phonophoresis
Explain phases of wound healing, physiological effects, therapeutic effects/uses,
CO 4 compare and contrast merits/demerits, indications/contraindications of various
electrotherapy modalities for wound healing
Psychomotor
demonstrate skills of application on models, discuss dosage of various Low/
CO 4 Medium & High Frequency currents / Actinotherapy
demonstrate skills of application on models, discuss dosage and choice of ions

for therapeutic application of iontophoresis, methods of application of
CO 5
phonophoresis, analytical ability to select the appropriate mode of application
based on tissues involved, area of application, chronicity of disorder etc.
demonstrate skills of application on models, discuss dosage, choice of modality
CO 6 for therapeutic wound healing, analytical ability to select the appropriate modality
based on tissues involved, area of application, chronicity
of wound
138
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
PAIN
i. Pain pathway
1 ii. Pain gate theory 3
iii. Descending pain suppressing system
iv. d. Physiological block
LOW FREQUENCY CURRENTS
a. Faradic currents: Physiological & Therapeutic effects, indications,
contraindications-
i. Faradic type
ii. Strong Surged Faradic
iii. Sinusoidal currents
iv. Application of Faradic current
a. Faradism Under pressure – Indications, Principle of application, Technique of
application
b. Faradic re-education: Indications, Principle of application, Technique of
application
v. Short/Long pulse currents Motor Points: Definition., Identification
b. Galvanic / Direct currents (Continuous DC &Interrupted DC) : Physiological &

Therapeutic effects, Indications, Contraindications
i. Definition: Galvanic & Interrupted Galvanic Currents
2 ii. Property of Accommodation 18
iii. Technique & Methods of Application of Galvanic currents
iv. Types – Anodal & Cathodal, Therapeutic effects & uses, Technique & Methods
of application, Dangers & precautions
v. Ionization / Iontophoresis: Theory of Medical Ionization, Effects & Uses of
various Ions, Indications and contraindications, Dangers and precaution
c. High Voltage Currents

d. Micro Currents
e. Didynamic Currents
f. Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation(T.E.N.S.)

i. Definition, Types
ii. Physiological & Therapeutic effects
iii. Technique & Methods of Application
iv. Indications &contraindications
MEDIUM FREQUENCY CURRENTS

3 6
a. Interferential Therapy
139
i. Definition, Types,
ii. Physiological & Therapeutic effects
iii. Technique & Methods of Application
iv. Electrodes types (including vacuum), Effects Uses
v. Advantages of I.F.T. over Low frequency currents
vi. Indications &contraindications.
b. Russian Currents
BIOFEEDBACK
4 i. Principle
1
ii. Methods: Electro biofeedback.
iii. Uses of Biofeedback
HIGH FREQUENCY CURRENTS
Short Wave Diathermy (S.W.D)

i. Types: continuous /Pulsed
ii. Definition and types
5 4
iii. Physiological & Therapeutic effects
iv. Technique & Methods of Application
v. Electrodes types, Effects &Uses
vi. Indications &contraindications
vii. Dangers &Precautions
SOUND
Therapeutic Ultra Sound: Pulsed / Continuous
i. Physiological & Therapeutic effects
6 ii. Technique & Methods of Application 4
iii. Phonophoresis
iv. Indications &Contraindications
v. Dangers &Precautions
ELECTROTHERAPY WOUND CARE
7 i. Types of wound 4
ii. Application of Therapeutic currents, Ultrasound, U.V.R. &LASER
Total 40
140
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks
No. of Marks/ Question x
Section 1
Section 2
Long answer question 4 out of 5 10 4 x 10 40
Total = 80
No. of Question X
Long answers 2 out of 3 10 2 x 10 20
Total Total= 40
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks for theory examination.
RECOMMENDED TEXTBOOKS
1. Forster A, Clayton EB, Palastanga N. Clayton's electrotherapy: theory and practice.
Bailliŕe Tindall;1985.
2. Robertson V, Ward A, Low J, Reed A, MCSP D. Electrotherapy explained: principles
and practice. Elsevier Health Sciences; 2006 May1.
RECOMMENDED REFERENCEBOOK
1. Kahn J. Principles and practice of electrotherapy. Saunders; 2000.

2. Nelson RM, Hayes KW, Currier DP, editors. Clinical electrotherapy. Prentice
Hall; 1999.
141

Name of the Course Electrotherapy
Course Code BPT018

Cognitive
CO 1 state and explain physiology of pain, pain pathways &methods of pain
modulation, selection of appropriate modality for pain modulation
State, explain and assess physiological effects, therapeutic effects/uses, compare
and contrast merits/demerits, indications/contra-indications of various Low/
CO 2 Medium & High Frequency currents / Actinotherapy, describe & identify various
equipment’s used to deliver therapeutic currents
State, explain and assess physiological effects, therapeutic effects/uses, compare and
contrast merits/demerits, indications/contra-indications of various therapeutic
CO 3 ions & topical pharmaco -therapeutic agents to be used for the application of
Iontophoresis & sono/ phonophoresis, describe & identify
equipment’s used to deliver Iontophoresis & sono/ phonophoresis
Explain phases of wound healing, physiological effects, therapeutic effects/uses,
CO 4 compare and contrast merits/demerits, indications/contraindications of various
electrotherapy modalities for wound healing
Psychomotor
demonstrate skills of application on models, discuss dosage of various Low/
CO 4 Medium & High Frequency currents / Actinotherapy
demonstrate skills of application on models, discuss dosage and choice of ions

CO 5 for therapeutic application of iontophoresis, methods of application of
phonophoresis, analytical ability to select the appropriate mode of application
based on tissues involved, area of application, chronicity of disorder etc
demonstrate skills of application on models, discuss dosage, choice of modality
CO 6 for therapeutic wound healing, analytical ability to select the appropriate modality
based on tissues involved, area of application, chronicity
of wound
142
No. of
Unit Topics
Hrs.
Low Frequency Currents
a. Faradic currents
b. Faradism under pressure
1 20
c. Motor point stimulation
d. Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation(TENS)
e. Iontophoresis
Medium Frequency Currents
2 5
a. Interferential therapy
High Frequency Currents
3 5
a. Short wave diathermy
4 Sound – Ultrasound : Methods of application 5
5 Wound Healing 5
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
80 marks
Q No 1 Exercise- (from unit 1,6) 30
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations (from unit 2-5) 2 x 20 = 40
Q No 3 Journal 10
Total = 80

Q No 1 Exercise (from Unit 1,6) 15
Q No 2 2 OSPE station(from unit 2-5) 20
Q No 3 Journal 5
Total= 40
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks for practical examination.
143
1. Forster A, Clayton EB, Palastanga N. Clayton's electrotherapy: theory and
practice. Bailliŕe Tindall;1985.
1. Kahn J. Principles and practice of electrotherapy. Saunders; 2000.

2. Nelson RM, Hayes KW, Currier DP, editors. Clinical electrotherapy. Prentice
Hall; 1999.
144

Name of the Course Pharmacology
Course Code BPT019

Describe pharmacological effects of commonly used drugs by patients referred for
CO 1 Physiotherapy; list their adverse reactions, precautions, contraindications, formulation
& route of administration.
CO 2 identify whether the pharmacological effect of the drug interferes with the therapeutic
response of Physiotherapy & vice versa
indicate the use of analgesics & anti-inflammatory agents with movement disorders
CO 3
with consideration of cost, efficiency, & safety for individual needs.
CO 4 describe use & adverse reactions of commonly used drugs by patients
Sr. No Topics Hours

GENERAL PHARMACOLOGY
i. Pharmacokinetics & Pharmacodynamics
1 ii. Routes of administration 6
iii. Adverse drug reaction and reporting
iv. Factors modifying drug effect
DRUGS ACTING ON CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM (CNS)
i. Introduction
ii. Alcohols + Sedatives &Hypnotics
iii. Anti-convulsants
2 8
iv. Drug therapy in Parkinsonism
v. Analgesics & antipyretics –especially Gout &R.A.
vi. Psychotherapeutics
vii. Local anesthetics, counterirritants
DRUGS ACTING ON AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM (ANS)
i. Adrenergic
3 ii. Cholinergic 6
iii. Skeletal muscle relaxants
DRUGS ACTING ON CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM (CVS)
i. Antihypertensive
4 ii. Anti-anginal – Antiplatelet, Myocardial infarction
6
iii. Congestive cardiac failure
iv. Shock
145
v. Coagulants and Anticoagulants

DRUGS ACTING ON RESPIRATORY SYSTEM
i. Cough
5 6
ii. Bronchial asthma
iii. C.O.P.D.
CHEMOTHERAPY
i. General principles
6 8
ii. Anti-Tuberculosis
iii. Anti–Leprosy
OTHER CHEMO THERAPEUTIC DRUGS
i. Drugs used in Urinary Tract Infection
ii. Tetra /cholera
7 iii. Penicillin 8
iv. Cephalosporin
v. Aminoglycosides
vi. Macrolides
ENDOCRINE DRUGS
i. Insulin and oral Anti diabetic drugs
ii. Steroids-Anabolic steroids
8 6
iii. Drugs for osteoporosis, Vitamin D, Calcium, Phosphorus
iv. Thyroid &Anti thyroid
v. Estrogen +Progesterone
DRUGS IN G.I. TRACT
9 i. Peptic ulcer 4
ii. Diarrhea, Constipation & Anti-emetics
HEAMATINICS
10 1
i. Vitamin B, Iron
DERMATOLOGICAL DRUGS
11 1
i. Scabies, Psoriasis, Local antifungal
TOTAL HOURS 60
146
EXAMINATION SCHEME
marks
Question type No. of Marks/ Question x

questions question marks Total marks
Total= 40
Question type No. of Marks /question Question x Total marks

questions marks
Total Total = 20
1. Udaykumar P. Pharmacology for physiotherapy. Jaypee Bros. Medical Publishers;2011.
2. Ramesh KV, Shenoy KA. Pharmacology for Physiotherapist. Jaypee Brothers

Medical Publishers Pvt. Limited;2005.
3. Tripathi KD. Essentials of medical pharmacology. JP Medical Ltd; 2013 Sep 30.
4. Satoskar RS, Rege N, Bhandarkar SD. Pharmacology and pharmacotherapeutics.

Elsevier India; 2017 Aug10.
147

Name of the Course Psychology & Psychiatry
Course Code BPT020

define the term Psychology & its importance in health delivery system, explain
CO 1 psychological maturation during human development & growth & alterations during
aging process
CO 2 explain the importance of psychological status of the person in health & disease;
environmental & emotional influence on the mind & personality
CO 3 apply skills required for good interpersonal communication
CO 4 describe various psychiatric disorders with special emphasis to movement / Pain &
ADL
CO 5 describe pathological & etiological factors, signs /symptoms & management of
various psychiatric conditions
Unit Topics Hours

Psychology 30
1 Definition, understanding, nature & its fields and subfields. 5
Developmental psychology (childhood, adolescence, adulthood and old age)
2 and its theories in brief 5
3 Learning: Theories of learning, Role of learning in human life 5

4 Memory – types – Causes of Forgetting 5
Attention & perception- Nature of attention, Nature of perception, Principles of
5 grouping 5
Motivation and theories: conflict and frustration – Types of common defense

6 mechanisms, Stress – common reactions to frustrations 5
Psychiatry 30
1 Psychiatric history &examination of mental status 2
2 Classification of mental disorders 2
3 Schizophrenia & its types 2
Other psychotic disorders (Psychotic disorder, Delusional disorder, Schizo-
4 affective disorders, Postpartum psychosis 2
5 Mood disorder 2
148
Organic brain disorders (delirium, dementia, Amnestic syndromes, Organic

6 2
personality disorder,)
Anxiety disorders: Phobia, Obsessive Compulsive Disorder, Post Traumatic
7 Disorders and Conversion disorder 2
Somatoform disorder, (Hypochondriasis, Dissociative disorder, Conversion
8 2
disorder, & Pain disorder)
9 Somatization disorder 2
10 Personality disorder 2
11 Substance related disorder (alcohol) 2
Disorders of infancy – childhood & adolescence
i. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder,
ii. Mental Retardation
12 iii. Conduct disorder, 2
iv. Pervasive developmental disorder
v. Enuresis
vi. Speech disorder
13 Geriatric Psychiatry 2
14 Eating disorder 2
Management: ECT, Pharmacotherapy, Group therapy, Psychotherapy,
15 Cognitive Behavioral Therapy and Rational Emotive Therapy. 2
TOTAL HOURS 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
conducted at the constituent unit level
No. of Marks / Question x

Section 1
Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
149
University Examination Pattern (Theory): 40marks

Section 1
Total = 40
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Theory): 20marks


Total = 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks for internal examination (Theory)
RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS:

1. Morgan C.T. & King R.A. Introduction to Psychology– recent edition [Tata McGraw-Hill
publication]
2. Munn N.L. Introduction to Psychology [Premium Oxford, I.B.P. publishing.]
3. Clinical Psychology –Akolkar
4. Hurlock EB. Development psychology. McGraw-Hill; 1953. ( 5thedition)
5. Ahuja N, Ahuja S. A Short Book of Psychiatry.
6. Bhatia, M. S. (Ed.). (2004). Short Textbook of Psychiatry:(aids to Psychiatry). CBS
Publishers &Distributors.
150
Skill Elective Course (SEC)

Name of the Course Indian Human Movement Science I -Yoga therapy
Course Code SEC001
Course Description Skill Elective Course – Theory and Practical

describe physiological principles and acquire the skill of performing
CO 1
Pranayama &Yogasanas
describe and demonstrate the joint positions and muscle work involved in
CO2
each asana
Sr. No. of
Topics (Theory)
No. Hrs.
1 Yoga–Definition, Principles of Yoga, Physiological effects, 05
Indications/Contraindications, Benefits, various schools of Yoga
Technique, benefits, contraindications & cautions for each Asanas:
i. Asanas in supine: Pawanamuktasana, ArdhaHalasana, Halasana,

Setubandhasana, Naukasana, Matsyasana, Shavasana, Sarvangasana
ii. Asanas in prone: Bhujangasana, Ardha- Shalabhasana, Dhanurasana,
Makarasana
iii. Asanas in sitting: Padmasana, Yogamudrasana, Virasana, Vajrasana,
2 15
Gomukhasana, Pashchimottanasana
iv. Asanas in standing:Padhastasana,Padangusthasana,Uttanasana,Utkatasana,
Tadasana, Trikonasana
v. Pranayama and meditation : Anulom-vilom, Bhramari, Sitali,Kapalbharti,
Omkar, meditation
vi. Suryanamaskar
Total 20
151
Sr. No. of
Topics (Practical)
No. Hrs.
Practical sessions :
vii. Asanas in supine: Pawanamuktasana, ArdhaHalasana, Halasana,

Setubandhasana, Naukasana, Matsyasana, Shavasana, Sarvangasana
viii. Asanasinprone:Bhujangasana,Ardha-Shalabhasana,Dhanurasana,
Makarasana
ix. Asanas in sitting: Padmasana, Yogamudrasana, Virasana, Vajrasana,
1 40
Gomukhasana, Pashchimottanasana
x. Asanasinstanding:Padhastasana,Padangusthasana,Uttanasana,Utkatasana,
Tadasana, Trikonasana
xi. Pranayama and meditation : Anulom-vilom, Bhramari, Sitali,Kapalbharti,
Omkar, meditation
xii. Suryanamaskar
Total 40

1. McCall, T. (2007). Yoga as medicine: the yogic prescription for health & healing:a
yoga journal book.Bantam.
2. Gore, M. M. (2008). Anatomy and Physiology of Yogic practices. New AgeBooks.
3. Malshe, P. C. (2017). Medical Understanding of Yoga. JP MedicalLtd.
RECOMMENDED REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Uebelacker, L. A., Lavretsky, H., Tremont, G., Khalsa, S. B., Cohen, L., McCall,
T.,& Telles, S. (2016). The Principles and Practice of Yoga in Health Care.
152
Examination Scheme
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Assessment will
be conducted at the constituent unit level
Theory question paper pattern for internal assessment under CBCS - 40 Marks
Question type No. of Marks/ Question x Total marks

Section 1
Total = 40

Total = 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Semester Examination (Theory)- 40 marks

Total= 40
University Semester Examination (Practical): 40 marks

Q No 1 Short Case 20
Total = 40
153
Question type No. of Marks / Question x Total marks

Section 1
Total = 20
Mid-Semester Examination Pattern (Practical): 20 marks

Q No 1 Short Case 10
Total = 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks each for internal examination (theory and practical)
154
Ability Enhancement Elective Course (AEEC)

Name of the Course Ergonomics and Health promotion
Course Code AEEC001
Course Description Ability Enhancement Elective Course – Theory

CO 1 explain the idea of safety culture and its importance in work place.
CO 2 explain role of OSHA in job-site safety
CO 3 identify hazards and assess risk techniques at work place
CO 4 analyze work place demands and modify dysfunctional body postures
CO 5 Prescribe ergonomic management at work place.
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
1 Introduction to Ergonomics and Health promotion 1
2 Safety and health training 2
Occupational Safety and Health Administration-
1. OSHA Act of1970
3 2. What does OSHA do? 5
3. Worker’s Rights
4. Employer Responsibilities
4 Ergonomic considerations including repetitive motion, sustained postures 1
5 Stress and safety. 1
6 OSHA's voluntary Ergonomics guidelines. 1
7 Job Analysis 1
8 Workers’ compensation 1
9 Work conditioning and work hardening 2
Understanding work demands of: (on-field visit)
1. Desk worker.
10 2. Teacher 4
3. Industrial worker
4. Manual laborer
Job analysis:
1. Desk worker.
2. Teacher
11 4
3. Industrial
worker Manual
laborer
155
12 Evaluation of impairments amongst the professions defined. 4

13 Management of the impairments. 4
Preparation of the ergonomic checkpoints that can help to systematically examine
14 the existing workplace conditions and improve the workplace to create a safe 5
working condition
15 Work conditioning and Work hardening 4
TOTAL 40
HOURS
1. Salvendy, G. (Ed.). (2012). Handbook of human factors and ergonomics. John Wiley
&Sons.
2. Stack, T., Ostrom, L. T., & Wilhelmsen, C. A. (2016). Occupational ergonomics: A
practical approach. John Wiley &Sons.
3. Waqar Naqvi. Physiotherapy in community health and rehabilitation.
1. Naidoo, J., & Wills, J. (2009). Foundations for Health Promotion E-Book. Elsevier
Health Sciences.
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Total = 40
156
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
Theory question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 40 marks

Total= 40
Mid Semester Examination Pattern (Theory): 20marks


Total = 20
157

Name of the Course Personality development and learning styles
Course Code AEEC002
Course Description Ability Enhancement Elective Course – Theory

CO 1 describe personality development and define the stages of personality development
CO 2 describe basic personality traits and personality types
CO 3 describe how to work on personality changes and personality disorders
CO 4 describe the process of learning and identify learning styles
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
1 Introduction to the personality development, need of personality and basic personality
5
traits
2 The developing personality and stages of development , Moral development 4
3 Types of Personality 4
4 Personality and career choice 4
5 Changing your personality 4
6 Personality growth 4
7 Personality disorders 5
8 Learning styles – visual, auditory, kinesthetic, verbal, physical, logical, social, solitary
Identification of learning styles through questionnaires, prescription of methods to 10
enhance learning
40
1. Looking at Type and Learning Styles by Gordon D.Lawrence

2. The Personality Development Book – 2016 by SouravDas
3. Personality Development and Soft Skills by Barun Mitra.2016

1. Life's Amazing Secrets: How to Find Balance and Purpose in Your Life - 2018 by
Gaur Gopal Das
158
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40


Total = 20
159

Students will be introduced to basic application of Physiotherapeutic skills.

Q No 4 OSPE Station4 10
Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Examination Pattern (practical): 40 marks

Q No 1 Case1 20
Q No 2 Case 2/Skill Demonstration 20
Total = 40
Mid Semester Examination Pattern (Practical): 20 marks

Q No 1 Case1 10
Q No 2 Case 2/ Skill Demonstration 10
Total = 20
160
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-IV (19 - 24 months)

Physiotherapy Skills Core Practical - 80 - 2

BPT022
BPT023 Electro-diagnostics Core Theory 40 - - 2
BPT024 Electro-diagnostics Core Practical - 80 - 2

Pathology &
Microbiology
BPT026 Sociology Core Theory 40 - - 2
Research
Methodology
Indian Human Skill Elective

SEC002
Movement Science 20 40 - 2
Course
II- Dance & Sports
Biostatistics and
SPSS / Medical Ability
AEEC003/ 20 40 - 2
Ethics, Human rights Enhancement
AEEC004
& Elective Course
professional values

BPTCLT004 - - 200 3
patient care Training
TOTAL 280 240 200 23
161

Name of the Course
Theory
Course Code BPT021
Semester Semester IV

CO 1 describe the biophysical properties of connective tissue, explain effect of mechanical
loading & factors which influence the muscle strength, & mobility of articular &peri-
articular soft tissues
CO 2 apply the biomechanical principles governing assessment methods of mobility and
muscle strength
CO 3 acquire the skill of subjective and objective assessment of individual & group muscle
strength testing
CO 4 discuss, compare and contrast various methods of muscle strengthening, merits and
demerits, physiological effects, benefits, risks and hazards of various strengthening
techniques
explain the physiological effects, therapeutic uses, merits / demerits of various land
CO5
and water based(Hydrotherapy)exercise modes
CO6 prescribe home exercise programs
discuss functional re-education techniques, principles of application of balance and
CO 7 coordination exercises, PNF, principles governing postural correction exercises and
methods used for postural correction
identify and describe walking aids and methods used for gait training while using
CO 8
various walking aids
describe types of lung expansion therapy- breathing exercises, physiological effects,
CO 9 benefits, indications-contraindications, methods of breathing retraining and lung re-
expansion therapy, respiratory PNF, thoracic expansion techniques, adjuncts used
describe anatomy of broncho-pulmonary segments, surface anatomy of lung, methods
used for maintaining lung hygiene viz postural drainage, autogenic drainage, active
CO 10 cycle of breathing techniques, principles governing, physiological effects, benefits,
indications-contraindications, method of application, humidification and nebulization
therapy, adjuncts used
162
Unit Topics Hours

BIOPHYSICS
i. Biophysical Principles: Structures & Properties of connective and
non-connective tissues
ii. Stretching:
1. Definition
1 2. Types 4
3. Assessment of muscle length and fascia around the joint
4. Principles of stretching
5. Techniques for all joints
6. Individual muscle stretching
JOINT MOBILITY
1. Definition
2. Causes of limitation
3. Indication and contraindications
2 4. Principles 4
5. Techniques
6. Assessment methods
7. Individual joints mobility Exercises– Upper Limb, LowerLimb
& Spine (Using active, assisted, passive movements)
MANUAL MUSCLE TESTING AND ASSESSMENT (SUBJECTIVE &
OBJECTIVE)
1. Principle
2. Trick movements
3 3
3. Group Muscle Testing
4. Individual Muscle testing – Upper & Lower Limbs, Trunk&Face
MUSCLE STRENGTHENING
1. Concepts -Strength, Power, Endurance
2. Factors influencing the Strength of normal muscle/ hypertrophy,
recruitment of motor units, change after the training, training with
isometric, isotonic &Iso-kinetic musclecontraction
3. Principles: Overload, Intensity, Motivation, Learning,
Duration, Frequency, Reversibility, Specificity,
4 Determinants 5
4. Methods : Subjective &Objective
5. Individual joint Strengthening Exercises Upper Limb,Lower
Limb &Spine
6. Concepts- 1 RM, 10 RM &Dynamometry
7. Progressive Resisted Exercise - Delorme, Zinoveiff, Mc
163
queen protocols
8. Use of gymnasium equipment’s
HYDROTHERAPY
1. Physiological effects
5 2
2. Indication and Contraindications
3. Techniques
TRACTION (CERVICAL & LUMBAR)
1. Introduction
2. Types (Mechanical / Electrical, Continuous/Intermittent)
6 2
3. Indications and Contraindications
4. Techniques
5. Effects and uses
HOME PROGRAM
1. Principles
7 2
2. Ergonomic advice for ADLs
3. Home based exercise program
FUNCTIONAL REEDUCATION
Principles &Indications
8 b. Mat exercises- mobility, strength and balance training 4
Progression to sitting, standing and walking
d. Transfers
NEUROMUSCULAR CO-ORDINATION AND BALANCE
a. Definition
b. Physiology related to coordination &Balance
9 4
c. Frenkel’s exercise (Principles &Techniques)
d. Balancing Exercise
e. Proprioceptive neuromuscular-ordination
WALKING AIDS AND GAIT TRAINING
a. Walking Aids
i. Types
ii. Indications
10 iii. Selection /Prescription 3
iv. Pre ‘Walking Aids ‘training
v. Measurements
vi. Gait with walking aids
LUNG EXPANSION THERAPY

1. Breathing exercises
2. Types – Inspiratory, Expiratory (including forced expiratory
technique)
11 3. Goals &Uses 3
4. Techniques
5. Thoracic expansion
6. Respiratory PNF
164
BRONCHIAL HYGIENE
1. Postural Drainage – Definition, Indications &
Contraindications, Principles, preparation, assessment &
Techniques
2. ACBT
12 3. Autogenic drainage 4
4. Humidification & Nebulization –Definition, Types, Method of
delivery, Indications and contraindications, physiological principles
and benefits
TOTAL HOURS 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
165
1. Progressive Resisted Exercises – Margaret Hollis,
2. Kisner, C., Colby, L. A., & Borstad, J. (2017). Therapeutic exercise: foundations and
techniques. FaDavis.
3. Kendall, F. P., McCreary, E. K., Provance, P. G., Rodgers, M., & Romani, W. A. (1993).
Muscles, testing and function: with posture and pain (Vol. 103). Baltimore, MD:
Williams &Wilkins.
4. Gardiner, M. D. (1957). The principles of exercise therapy. Bell.
5. O'Sullivan, S. B., Schmitz, T. J., & Fulk, G. (2019). Physical rehabilitation. FADavis.
1. Basmajian, J. J., & Wolf, S. L. (1992). Therapeutic exercise. Physiotherapy, 78(10),732.
2. Dutton, M. (2004). Orthopaedic examination, evaluation, and intervention (Vol. 1).

McGraw-HillMedical.
3. Downie, P. A., Innocenti, D. M., & Jackson, S. E. (1987). Cash's textbook of chest, heart
and vascular disorders for physiotherapists.
166

Name of the Course
Practical
Course Code BPT022

CO 1 describe the biophysical properties of connective tissue, & effect of mechanical
loading, & factors which influence the muscle strength, & mobility of articular &
peri-articular soft tissues
CO 2 apply the biomechanical principles for the efficacy in the assessment methods for
mobility, muscle strength
CO 3 acquire the skill of subjective and objective assessment of individual & group muscle
strength
CO 4 acquire the skills of subjective and objective methods of muscle strengthening
describe the physiological effects, therapeutic uses, merits / demerits of various
CO5
exercise modes including Hydrotherapy
demonstrate various therapeutic exercises on self& acquire the skill of application on
CO6
models with home programs
acquire the skill of functional re-education techniques on models, balance and
CO 7
coordination exercises, PNF, postural correction
CO 8 apply skill of gait training while using various walking aids
apply skills of breathing exercises and retraining on self and others, postural drainage
CO 9
on models.
Unit Topics No of
Hrs
1 Stretching 10
2 Joint Mobility 10
3 Manual Muscle Testing and assessment 10
4 Muscle Strengthening 10
5 Posture 06
6 Functional Re-education 06
7 Balance, Co-ordination, PNF 08
8 Walking aids and gait training 10
9 Breathing exercises, Postural Drainage 10
Total Hours 80
167
Practical examination pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80

marks

Q No 1 Exercise 30
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations 2 x 20 = 40
Q No 3 Journal 10
Total = 80

Q No 1 Exercise 15
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations 20
QNo3 Journal 5
Total= 40
168

Name of the Course Electro-diagnostics
Course Code BPT023
Course Learning Outcomes: : At the end of the course, the candidate will be able to
Cognitive
CO 1 describe structure and function of nerve and muscle as a base for understanding
the electro-diagnostic assessment
describe neuro physiology of muscle and effect of various therapeutic currents
CO 2 on nerve-muscle complex, use of tests-Galvanic-Faradic test, Sensory, pain,
vibration threshold, Strength duration curves, nerve conduction velocity, needle
and surface electromyography
knowledge regarding advanced methods of electro diagnosis and its application
CO 3
in pediatric and adult neurological conditions
Psychomotor
CO 4 apply skills of electro-diagnosis (SD Curve), observe needle and surface EMG
and NCV studies and analyze test results
CO 5 interpretation and analysis of assessment and findings
No. of
Unit. Topics Hrs.
1 Physiology of resting membrane potential, action potential, Propagation of Action

Potential 3
2 Physiology of muscle contraction
3 Motor unit &recruitment pattern of motor unit – Size principle
2
Therapeutic current –as a tool for electro diagnosis
1. Electrophysiology of muscle &nerve
4 2. Faradic Galvanic Test, Strength Duration Curve-tests 2
3. Test for Sensory, Pain, Vibration Threshold/ pain Tolerance
5 Strength Duration Curves (SDC) 10
1. Principle of S-D curves
2. Technique of plotting
3. Interpretation of normal curves
4. Chronaxie and Rheobase
6 Nerve Conduction Studies (NCV) 13
1. Principles , Technique, Reporting, Interpretation
169
2. F wave
3. H reflex
Electromyography (EMG)
1. Definition Instrumentation – Basic components like C.R.O., Filter, Amplifier
& Preamplifier, and Types of Electrodes
7
2. Needle EMG- Normal & Abnormal E.M.G. pattern
3. Surface EMG 10
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
170
RECOMMENDEDTEXTBOOKS
1. O'Sullivan, S. B., Schmitz, T. J., & Fulk, G. (2019). Physical rehabilitation. FA

Davis
4. U K Misra, J Kalita : Clinical Neuro Physiology; 4thEdition
171

Name of the Course Electro-diagnostics
Course Code BPT024
Course Learning Outcomes: : At the end of the course, the candidate will be able to
Cognitive
describe structure and function of nerve and muscle as a base for understanding
CO 1
the electro-diagnostic assessment
describe neuro physiology of muscle and effect of various therapeutic currents on
nerve-muscle complex, use of Tests-Galvanic-Faradic test, Sensory, pain,
CO 2
vibration threshold, Strength duration curves, nerve conduction velocity, needle
and surface electromyography
CO 3 knowledge regarding advanced methods of electro diagnosis and its application
in pediatric and adult neurological conditions
Psychomotor
apply skills of electro-diagnosis (SD Curve), observe needle and surface EMG
CO 4
and NCV studies and analyze test results
CO 5 interpretation and analysis of assessment and findings
Unit Topics No of
Hrs
a) Faradic Galvanic Test

1 b) S.D.C. 60
c) Sensory, pain, vibration threshold
2 a) N.C. V Studies 10
a) Surface E.M.G 10
3
Total Hours 80
172
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Practical examination pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80

marks
Q No 1 Long Case- (from unit 1) 30
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations (from unit 1-3 ) 2x20= 40
Q No 3 Journal 10
Total = 80

Q No 1 Case (from unit 1) 15
Q No 2 2 OSPE stations (from unit 1-3 ) 20
Q No 3 Journal 5
Total= 40
respectively
1. O'Sullivan, S. B., Schmitz, T. J., & Fulk, G. (2019). Physical rehabilitation. FA

Davis
4. U K Misra, J Kalita : Clinical Neuro Physiology; 4th Edition
Bellis E. Electrotherapy: evidence-based practice
173

Name of the Course Pathology & Microbiology
Course Code BPT025
Credit per week 4 credits
Course Outcomes : At the end of the course, the candidate will be able to
Cognitive
describe cell injury &response of different tissues, organs and capacity of thebody
CO 1
to heal
acquire knowledge of general concepts of neoplasia with reference to etiology,
CO 2 gross & microscopic features, & diagnosis, in different tissues, & organs of the
body.
acquire knowledge of common immunological disorders & their effects on the
CO 3
human body
acquire knowledge of prevalent communicable diseases, agents responsible for causing
clinical infections, pertaining to C.N.S, C.V.S, musculoskeletal system, respiratory
CO 4
system, genitourinary system, wound infections and newly emerging
pathogens
describe etiology–pathogenesis, effects & clinical–pathological correlation of
CO 5
common infections & non-infectious diseases.
describe common hematological disorders & investigations necessary todiagnose
CO 6 them.
describe importance and best practices to prevent development of infections in
CO 7 self and patients (universal safety precautions).
Unit Topics (Pathology) No. of

Hrs.
GENERAL PATHOLOGY
1. Cell Injury-Causes, Mechanism & Toxic injuries with special reference
to Physical including ionizing radiation, Chemical &Biological
2. Reversible injury (degeneration)- types- morphology-cloudy swelling,
hyaline, fatty changes
1 3. Intra-cellular Accumulation- Mucin, Protein 03
4. Irreversible cell injury-types of necrosis- Apoptosis–Calcification-
Dystrophic &Metastasis
5. Extra-cellular accumulation-Amyloidosis
INFLAMMATION & REPAIR
2 05
1. Acute inflammation – features, causes, vascular & cellular events
174
2. Morphologic Variations-Ulcers
3. Inflammatory cells &Mediators
4. Chronic inflammation: Causes, Types, Non- specific & Granulomatous–
with examples
5. Wound healing by primary & secondary union, factors promoting &delaying
healing process
6. Healing at various sites- bone, nerve & muscle g. Regeneration &Repair
IMMUNO –PATHOLOGY
1. Immune system: organization-cells- antibodies- regulation of immune
responses
3 2. Hyper-sensitivity (types and examples including graft rejection) 03
3. Secondary Immuno-deficiency including H.I.V.
4. Basic concepts of autoimmune disease (emphasis on S.L.E. &R.A.)
CIRCULATORY DISTURBANCES
1. Edema - pathogenesis - types - transudates /exudates
2. Chronic venous congestion- lung, liver
3. Thrombosis – formation – fate –effects
4 4. Embolism – types- clinical effects 03
5. Infarction – types – common sites
6. Gangrene – types –etiopathogenesis
7. Shock – Pathogenesis, types
5 PATHOLOGIC CHANGES IN VITAMIN DEFICIENCIES 01
GROWTH DISTURBANCES
1. Atrophy, Hypertrophy, Hypoplasia, Metaplasia, Agenesis, Dysplasia,
2. Neoplasia classification, Histogenesis, Biologic behaviors, difference
between Benign & Malignant tumour
3. Malignant neoplasms- grades-stages-local & distal spread
6 4. Carcinogenesis: Physical, Chemical, Occupational, Heredity, 04
Viral, Nutritional
5. Precancerous lesions & Carcinoma in situ
6. Tumor & host interactions–local and systemic effects-metastatic (special
reference to bones and C.N.S.)
MEDICAL GENETICS (in brief):

7 01
a. Classifications with examples of Genetic disorders
SPECIFIC PATHOLOGY
A. C.V.S.
1. Atherosclerosis - Ischemic Heart Diseases – Myocardial Infarction–
Pathogenesis/Pathology
8 11
2. Hypertension
3. C.C.F.
4. Rheumatic Heart Diseases v. Peripheral Vascular Diseases
175
B. Respiratory
1. C.O.P.D.
2. Pneumonia (lobar, bronchial, viral), Lung Abscess
3. T. B.: Primary, Secondary – morphologic types
4. Pleuritis & its complications
5. Lung collapse –Atelectasis
6. Occupational Lung diseases (with special emphasis on Silicosis,
Asbestosis, Anthracosis)
7. A.R.D.S.
C. Neuropathology:
1. Reaction of nervous tissue to injury, infection &ischemia
2. Meningitis: Pyogenic, T.B.M., Viral
3. Cerebro-Vascular Diseases – Atherosclerosis – Thrombosis,
Embolism, Aneurysm, Hypoxia, Infarction &Hemorrhage,
Hydrocephalous, Increased Intracranial Pressure
4. Leprosy
5. Parkinsonism
MUSCULAR DISORDERS
9 a. Classification of Muscular disorders with emphasis on Muscular Dystrophies 03
NEURO-MUSCULAR JUNCTION
10 1. Myasthenia gravis 01
2. Myasthenic syndrome
BONE & JOINTS
1. Osteomyelitis – Rickets – Osteomalacia –Osteoporosis
2. Arthritis- degenerative (Osteoarthritis, Calcaneal spur, Periarthritis,
11 Spondylosis) - inflammatory (R.A., Ankylosing Spondylitis, Gout) 07
3. Miscellaneous-P.I.D., Haemarthosis
4. Infective-T.B.
G.I. SYSTEM
12 1. Gastric / Duodenal ulcer, Enteric fever, T.B., Enteritis, Gastritis (related to 01
consumption of NSAID)
ENDOCRINE
13 1. Hypo and Hyperthyroidism 05
2. Diabetes
HEPATIC DISEASES
14 01
1. Cirrhosis – emphasis to systemic effects of portal
CLINICAL PATHOLOGY
1. Anemia – (deficiency) – T.C./D.C./ Eosinophilia Anaemia
15 2. Muscle / Skin / Nerve biopsy 01
3. Microscopic appearance of muscle necrosis – fatty infiltration
Total 50
176
Unit TOPICS (Microbiology) No. of

Hrs.
GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY
• Introduction &Scope
• History – Contributions of Louis Pasteur, Robert Koch
• Classification of Micro-Organisms & Morphology of Bacteria (Various parts)–
1
structure and functions. 03
• Bacterial Growth Curve
• Growth requirements of Bacteria
• Sterilization &Disinfection
LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS OF INFECTION
• Culture media and identification of bacteria
2 02
• Sample collection for smear examination and cultures
• Demonstration of Gram staining, ZN staining and culture media
IMMUNOLOGY
• Antigen definition &types
• Determinants of Antigenicity
• Antibody definition, different types, functions
• Antigen-Antibody reaction – Classification, principle, uses
• Agglutination, precipitation& enzyme immunoassay
• Radio immune assay, immunoflorescent, compliment fixation test,
3 Neutralization test. 05
• Immune response – Definition &types.
• Humoral& CMI difference
• Innate immunity & acquired immunity(Vaccination).
• Hypersensitivity – Classification & Type I (in detail)
• Hypersensitivity – Type II, III &IV
• Autoimmunity
SYSTEMIC BACTERIOLOGY
• Bacteriology – Morphology, Pathogenicity & Lab diagnosis of
important bacteria.
• List of Gram Positive Cocci & infections caused
• List of Gram Negative Cocci & infections caused
4 • Gas gangrene, Diphteria – Gram Positive Bacilli. 06
• Cholera, Typhoid – Gram Negative Bacilli.
• Mycobacterium Tuberculosis.
• Leprosy
• Atypical Mycobacterium
177
• Syphillis
MYCOLOGY
• Introduction & Superficial Mycosis.
6 04
• Mycetoma & Opportunistic fungal infection.
• Mycology & Virology demonstration.
VIROLOGY
• Introduction & General Properties
• DNA & RNA viruses.
7
• Measles, congenital viral infections, Rubella, CMV, Herpes, 05
Dengue, Rabies (Clinical feature only.)
• HIV, Hepatitis, Polio.
PARASITOLOGY
• Introduction & Entamoeba histolytica
8 03
• Malaria, Filaria
• Toxoplasma, Cystisarcosis & Echinococcus.
APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
• Hospital acquired infections, Universal safety precautions &Waste
10 disposal 02
• Diseases involving Bones, Joints, Nerves, Muscles, Skin, Brain,
Cardiopulmonary system, Burn and wound infections
Total 30
1. Mohan, H. (2010). Textbook of pathology., Mohan P, Mohan T, Mohan S.,(eds.),New

Delhi: Jaypee Bros.
2. SL, R. (2012). Robbins basic pathology. New York: Elsevier Health Sciences.
1. Cotran, R. S., Kumar, V. N., & Stanley, R. L. (2004). Robbins pathologic basis of disease.
WB Saunders CompHny, Philadelphia,USA..
2. Bhende, Y. M., Deodhare, S. G., & Kelkar, S. S. (1976). General Pathology. Popular
Prakashan.
178
EXAMINATION SCHEME
be conducted at constituent unit level

Short answer questions (from
5 out of 8 5 5x5 25
units of Pathology 1-15)
3 out of 5 5 3x5 15
units of microbiology 16-23)
Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Examination Theory - 40 Marks

5 out of 8 5 5x5 25
3 out of 5 5 3x5 15
Total = 40
179
Mid Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) : 20marks

2 out of 4 5 2x5 10
2 out of 4 5 2x5 10
Total = 20
180

Name of the Course Sociology
Course Code BPT026
Course Description Core theory
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the candidate shall be able to
describe social factors affecting health, influence of family, social groups,

CO 1
culture, community and governmental policies on health perspectives
identify vulnerable population, role of social support systems and NGOs,
CO 2
legislations related to disability and role of medical social worker,
CO 3 describe the interaction between social problems and public health
Unit Topics No. of

Hrs.
Introduction: Definition & Relevance with Physiotherapy and social factorsaffecting
1 2
Health status, Decision Making in taking treatment.
Socialization: Definition, Influence, of Social Factors, on Personality,Socialization
2 2
in the Hospital & Rehabilitation of the patients.
Social Groups: Concepts, Influence of formal & informal groups of Health &
3 Diseases, Role of Primary & Secondary Groups in the Hospital & Rehabilitation 2
Setting.
4 Family: Influence on human personality, Role of family in health and disease 2
Community Role: Rural & Urban communities in Public Health, Role of
5 community in determining Beliefs, Practices & Home Remedies in Treatment 4
Culture: Component’s impact on human behavior, Role of community in

6 2
determining beliefs, practices and health seeking behavior and home remedies
Social Change Factors: Human Adaptation, Stress, Deviance, Health ProgramRole
7 of Social Planning in the improvement of Health & in Rehabilitation. 2
Social Control: Definition, Role of norms, Folkways, Customs, Morals, Religion,

8 Law & other means of social controls in the regulation of Human Behavior, Social 2
Deviance & Disease
Population Groups:
a) Children: Street children, Child labor, Juvenile delinquency.
9 b) Women’s: Victims of domestic violence and addiction, C.S.W., physically 8
and /or mentally challenged
c) Role of NGOs, Social support systems
181
10 Social Security & Social Legislation in relation to the Disabled 4

11 Role of a Medical Social Worker 2
12 Sociology of Brain Death and/ or Organ donation: 4
Social Problems:
13 Population explosion, Poverty, Dowry, Illiteracy- Causes, prevention & Control 4
measures.
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Examination Pattern (Theory) : 40 marks

Section 1
Total= 40
182
Mid Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) : 20 marks


Total= 20
1. Bhushan, V., & Sachdeva, D. R. (2005). Introduction to sociology. KitabMahal.
2. Indian Social Problems - Madan, Vol-I-Madras
183

Name of the Course Research Methodology
Course Code BPT027
Course Outcomes
CO 1 enumerate the steps in Physiotherapy research process.
CO 2 describe the importance & use of biostatistics for research work.
describe the PICO format, methods of reviewing literature, formulating
CO 3
hypothesis, collecting data, writing research proposal and research ethics
describe study designs, define sampling techniques, discuss the concept of
CO 4 probability and probability distribution, application of inferential statistics and
descriptive analysis
demonstrate skill of preparing a research proposal, data tabulation, graphical
CO 5
representation of data and research report
Unit Topics No. of

Hrs.
RESEARCH IN PHYSIOTHERAPY
a. Introduction
1 b. Research for Physiotherapist: Why? How? When? 05
c. Research – Definition, concept, purpose, approaches
d. Internet sites for Physiotherapists
RESEARCH FUNDAMENTALS
a. Define measurement
b. Measurement framework
c. Scales of measurement
2 05
d. Pilot Study
e. Types of variables
f. Reliability &Validity
g. Drawing Tables, Graphs, Master chart
WRITING A RESEARCH PROPOSAL
a. Defining problem
b. Review of Literature
3 c. Formulating a question, Operational Definition 05
d. Inclusion & Exclusion criteria
e. Methodology- Forming Groups Data collection & method for analysis
f. Informed Consent Steps of documentation – Title to Scope of study
184
RESEARCH ETHICS
a. Importance of Ethics in Research
4 b. Main ethical issues in human subjects research 05
c. Main ethical principles that govern research with human subjects
d. Components of an ethically valid informed consent for research
OVERVIEW OF STUDY DESIGNS
a. Observational-
i. Descriptive-Case study/ series, Cross sectional, Normative,
5 03
Correlational
ii. Analytical; case control, cohort
b. Experimental- True & quasi experimental
SAMPLING
a. Random and non-random sampling.
6 b. Various methods of sampling – simple random, stratified, systematic, 03
cluster and multistage. Sampling and non-sampling errors and methods of
minimizing these errors.
BASIC PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS AND SAMPLING
DISTRIBUTIONS
a. Concept of probability and probability distribution.
7 b. Normal, Poisson and Binomial distributions, parameters and application. 02
c. Concept of sampling distributions.
d. Standard error and confidence intervals.
e. Skewness and Kurtosis
TESTS OF SIGNIFICANCE
a. Basics of testing of hypothesis – Null and alternate hypothesis, type I
and type II errors, level of significance and power of the test, p value.
b. Tests of significance (parametric) - t – test (paired and unpaired), Chi
8 square test and test of proportion, one-way analysis of variance. 03
c. Repeated measures analysis of variance.
d. Tests of significance (non-parametric)-Mann-Whitney u test, Wilcoxon test,
e. Kruskal-Wallis analysis of variance. Friedman’s analysis of variance.
CORRELATION AND REGRESSION

9 a. Simple correlation – Pearson’s and Spearman’s; testing the significance 01
of correlation coefficient, linear and multiple regressions.
STATISTICAL DATA
a. Tabulation, Calculation of central tendency and dispersion, Using
10 03
software packages, Analysis, Presentation of data in diagrammatic &
Graphic form
RESEARCH REPORT
11 05
a. Overview, Types and Publication
Total 40
185
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Question type No. of Marks/ Question X Total marks

Section 1
Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Examination Pattern (Theory) - 40 Marks

Section 1
Total = 40
Mid Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) : 20 marks


Total= 20
186
RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOK
1. Mahajan, B. K. (2002). Methods in biostatistics. Jaypee Brothers Publishers.
2. Hicks, C. (1995). Research for physiotherapists: project design and analysis. Churchill
Livingstone.
187

Name of the Course Indian Human Movement Science II – Dance & Sports
Course Code SEC002
CO 1 Describe the science and art of typical movements in traditional Indian dance
forms and sports.
CO 2 gain skills in performing basic movements of one traditional dance form and
sport
CO 3 analyze kinematics and muscle work involved in traditional Indian dance and
sport movement for potential use in therapy
Unit Topics No. of

Hrs.
1 Origin and History of dance 01
2 7 classical dance styles of India 01
3 Contribution of Nathuvanars 01
4 Folk dances of India 01
5 Namaskar- hands, legs, sthanakas 02
6 Hasta Bhedas – Hasta Prachar, Rechaka, Karna, Asamyuta Hasta, Samyuta hasta- 02
7 Padabhedas- Padaprachar, Shadvidhpada 01
8 Shim bheda- head gestures 01
9 Dhrishtibheda- eye gestures 01
10 Bhramari, Chari, Gati 01
11 Dashavatara 01
12 Sthanakas, Mandalas, Dev hasta 01
Adavus – Tattaadavu, Natta adavu, Chatushram,Vardhaman,Uttandvanchita,
13 01
tattamettu , Kuditamettu, Periyaadavu – Kinematics and muscle work
14 Ginatom 01
15 History of sports in India 01
16 Malkhamb – kinematics and muscle work 01
17 Lezim- kinematics and muscle work 01
18 Kabbadi- kinematics and muscle work 01
Total 20
188
Practical
Sr. No. Topics No. of

Hrs.
1 7 classical dance styles of India 05
2 Namaskar- hands, legs, sthanakas 05
3 Hasta Bhedas – Hasta Prachar, Rechaka, Karna, Asamyuta Hasta, Samyuta hasta 05
4 Padabhedas- Padaprachar, Shadvidhpada 05
5 Shim bheda- head gestures 05
6 Dhrishtibheda- eye gestures 05
7 Bhramari, Chari, Gati 05
8 Dashavatara 05
9 Sthanakas, Mandalas, Dev hasta 05
Adavus – Tattaadavu, Natta adavu, Chatushram,Vardhaman,Uttandvanchita,
10 05
tattamettu , Kuditamettu, Periyaadavu
11 Ginatom 05
12 Malkhamb 03
13 Lezim 03
14 Kabbadi 03
Total 60

1. Nrityawishkar-Bharat Natyam, 3rd edition 2009 – Published by Shri Sarfojiraje
Bhosale Book House
2. Indian Classical Dance – Tradition in Transition- Leela Venkataraman , Avinash
Pasricha-Lustre press roli Books 2005

1. Franklin, E. (2003). Conditioning for Dance: Training for Peak Performance in All
Dance Forms. Human Kinetics, PO Box 5076, Champaign, IL61825-5076.
2. Clarkson, P. M., & Skrinar, M. (1988). Science of dance training. Champaign,IL:
HumanKinetics.
189
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Examination Pattern (Theory) - 40 marks

Total= 40
University Examination Pattern (Practical): 40marks

Total = 40
190
Mid Semester Examination Pattern (Theory) :20 marks


Total = 20

Total = 20
191

Name of the Course Biostatistics & SPSS
Course Code AEEC003
Course Description Ability Enhancement Elective Course – Theory &
practical

CO 1 Enumerate the steps in Physiotherapy research process.
CO 2 Describe the importance & use of biostatistics for research work.
CO 3 Acquire skills of reviewing literature, formulating a hypothesis,
collecting data, writing research proposal etc.
CO 4 Acquire skills for analyzing data in SPSS software and interpret the results
CO 5 Acquire skills in writing a research report
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOSTATISTICS 1
a. Introduction to biostatistics
2 SOURCES & PRESENTATION OF DATA 3

a. Statistical data
b. Methods of presentation
c. Presentation / illustration of Quantitative data
d. Presentation / illustration of Qualitative data
3 MEASURES OF LOCATION 3
a. Measures of Central tendency –Averages
b. Measures of Location –Percentiles
4 NORMAL DISTRIBUTION AND NORMAL CURVE 3

a. Demonstration of normal distribution
b. Normal curve
c. Asymmetrical distributions
192
d. Normal probability distributions
5 SAMPLING 3
a. Sampling characteristics
b. Sampling techniques
c. Sampling distribution
6 TESTS OF SIGNIFICANCE 4
a. Significance of difference in Means
b. Significance of difference in Proportion of large samples
c. The Chi- square test
7 CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 3

a. Measures of Relationship between continuous variables
b. Types of Correlation
c. Calculation of Correlation Coefficient from ungrouped series.
d. Calculation of Correlation Coefficient from grouped series.
e. Regression
f. Calculation of Regression Coefficient
8 DESIGNING & METHODOLOGY 3

a. Steps in Methodology & designing of protocol.
9 SPSS SOFTWARE (PRACTICAL) 5

a. Starting SPSS &introduction
b. Data entry and importing data files
c. Data view & Variable view
10 ANALYZING DATA USING SPSS (PRACTICAL) 12

a. Descriptive statistics
b. Analyzing – Frequency tables
c. Saving modified data tables
d. Coding and recoding variables
193
e. Specific values labels
11 STATISTICAL TESTS USING SPSS (PRACTICAL) 20

a. T- Test : One sample T-test, Independent T-test, Paired Sample T-test
b. Chi-Square Test of independence
c. Bivariate correlations
d. Linear regression
e. Interpreting output charts and crosstabs.
TOTAL HOURS 60
RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOK
1. Mahajan, B. K. (2002). Methods in biostatistics. Jaypee Brothers Publishers.
2. Hicks, C. (1995). Research for physiotherapists: project design and analysis. Churchill
Livingstone.

1. Kothari, C. R. (2004). Research methodology: Methods and techniques. New Age
International.
Examination Scheme

Section 1
Total = 40
194
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University examination pattern (Theory) - 40 marks

Total= 40
University examination pattern (Practical): 40marks

Total = 40


Total = 20

Total = 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks each for internal examination (theory
and practical)
195

Name of the Course Medical Ethics, Human rights and Professional values
Course Code AEEC004
Course Description Ability Enhancement Elective Course – Theory &
Practical

Cognitive
CO 1 describe moral values and meaning of ethics
CO 2 acquire bedside manners and communication skills in relation with patients, peers,
seniors and other professionals
Pyschomotor
CO 3 apply psychomotor skills for physiotherapist-patient relationship.
CO 4 Skill to evaluate and make decision for plan of management based on socio-cultural
values and referral practice
CO 5 examine ethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent, demonstrating
community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-cultural competency
record patients concern and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to reach
CO 6 decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
Affective
apply behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating with patients,
CO 7
relatives, society at large and co-professionals
CO8 develop bed side behavior, respect & maintain patients‟ confidentiality
list patients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options, their
CO 9 views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved in
decision-making regarding their care and treatment.
CO 10 communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with patients, caregivers, and
colleagues from the medical and other professions, by listening, sharing and responding.
communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with individuals and groups regardless
CO 11 of their age, social, cultural or ethnic backgrounds or their disabilities including when
English is not the patient’s first language.
communicate by spoken, written and electronic methods (including medical records),
CO 12
and be aware of other methods of communication used by patients.
communicate appropriately in difficult circumstances, such as when breaking bad news,
and when discussing sensitive issues, such as alcohol consumption, smoking or obesity,
CO 13
with difficult or violent patients, people with mental illness and with vulnerable
population
196
Unit Topics No. of

Hrs.
1 Concept of morality and ethics 01
2 Concept of professionalism and Professional dress code 01
3 Ethical code of conduct 01
4 Communication skills 01
a. Physiotherapist -Patient Relationship
5 01
b. Interviewing -Types of interview, Skills of interviewing
Collecting data on psychosocial factors in Medicine / Surgery / Reproductive Health /
6 01
Pediatrics
7 Inter professional communication. 02
8 Ethics in clinical practice 02
Roles of Physiotherapist as patient manager, Consultant, Critical inquirer, Educator,
9 02
Administration
10 Laws and regulations 01
11 Professional development, competence and expertise 01
12 Professional bodies 01
13 Ethics in Research 02
14 Ethics in Teaching 02
15 Role of W.C.P.T. & Council 01
Total 20
1. Percival, T. (2014). Medical ethics. Cambridge University Press.

2. Dunn, M., & Hope, T. (2018). Medical ethics: a very short introduction. Oxford
University Press.
3. Blackburn, S. (2003). Ethics: A very short introduction (Vol. 80). Oxford University
Press.

1. Hébert, P. C., & Rosen, W. (2009). Doing right: a practical guide to ethics for
medical trainees and physicians (p. 352). Don Mills, ON: Oxford University Press.
2. American Medical Association, & New York Academy of Medicine. (1848). Code of
medical ethics. H. Ludwig &Company.
197
Examination Scheme

Section 1
Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University examination pattern (Theory)- 40 marks
No. of Marks/ Question x

Total= 40

Total = 40
198

Total = 20

Total = 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks each for internal examination (theory
and practical)
199

Students will be introduced to basic application of Physiotherapeutic skills, ethical consideration

along with research methodology

Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Case1 20
Total = 40

Q No 1 Case1 10
Total = 20
200
SEMESTER V (25-30 months)

Medical and Surgical

aspects of
Musculoskeletal
conditions

aspects of cardiovascular
Respiratory disorders and
Diagnosis movement
BPT030 dysfunction and ICF Core Theory 20 0 - 1
Theory
Diagnosis movement
BPT031 dysfunction and ICF Core Practical 0 40 - 1
Practical
BPT032 Public Health Core Theory 60 - - 3
Generic
2D motion capture /
Elective Theory
GEC001/GEC002 Device Innovation and 20 40 - 2
IPR and
Practical
Ability
Enhancement
AECC005 / Diagnostic Radiology/ Elective
20 40 - 2
AECC006 Pulmonary Function test Course Theory
and
Practical
Basic skills in patient Clinical
BPT CLT005 280 120 320 5
care Training
201

Name of the Course Medical and surgical aspects of Musculoskeletal conditions
Course Code BPT-028

CO 1 Explain the, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations & m e d i c a l / surgical
management of various traumatic & non-traumatic (degenerative, inflammatory,
infective, autoimmune) musculoskeletal conditions.
CO 2 perform clinical examination; apply and interpret special tests in both
preoperative and post-operative patients
CO 3 interpret investigations such as X-ray of spine & extremities and correlate radiological
findings with clinical findings
CO 4 Interpret pathological / biochemical studies pertaining to musculoskeletal
conditions.
Unit Topics Hours

1 Traumatic Bony and Soft tissue conditions – Upper Quadrant 25
• Definition, Classification, Causes, Clinical features, healing of fractures
&Complication
• Principles of general management of fracture of the upper extremity
• Definition, General description, Principles of general description and
management of traumatic dislocation and subluxation of common joints-
shoulder joint, Acromioclavicular joint, Elbow joint
• Introduction, Anatomy & physiology general description, grade of injury
and management of injuries of ligaments, bursae, fascia, muscles &
tendons of upper extremity
• Injuries of Cervico-Thoracic region, Whiplash of the cervical spine, D4
Syndrome
• Crush injuries offhand
• Definition, Cause, Classification of congenital and acquired deformities
of upper quadrant - Physical and clinical and radiological features,
Complications, principles of medical and surgical management of the
deformities – Sprengel’s shoulder, Cubitus varus, Cubitus valgus,
Dupuytren’s contracture, Carpel tunnel syndrome /Entrapment nerve
injuries, Compartment syndrome, Ischemic contracture
202
2 Traumatic Bony and soft tissue conditions – Lower Quadrant 25
• Definition, Classification, Causes, Clinical features, healing of fractures

& Complications of fracture of the lower extremity, lumbo-sacral
spine and pelvis
• Management of traumatic dislocation and subluxation of hip, knee and
ankle joint
• Management of injuries of ligaments, bursae, fascia, muscles &tendons
of lower extremity and crush injuries of foot
• Spinal deformities: Scoliosis, Kyphosis, Lordosis, Flat back, Torticollis
• Congenital and acquired deformities of the lower limb: C.D.H., coxa
vara , coxa valga , anteversion, Retroversion , Genu valgum, Genu
varum, Genu recurvatum, C.D.K., Talipes calcaneous equinus, varus
&valgus,
Pes cavus, Pes planus, Hallux valgus & varus, Hallux rigidus and
hammer toe
3 Degenerative and inflammatory disorders 10

Osteo-orthosis/Arthritis, Spondylosis, Spondylolysis and listhesis, Pyogenic
arthritis, Rheumatoid arthritis, Juvenile arthritis, Tuberculous arthritis, Gouty
arthritis, Haemophilic arthritis, Neuropathic arthritis, Ankylosing spondylitis,
Psoriatic arthritis
4 Rheumatological disorders 10
Rheumatoid Arthritis, S L E, S S A, Gout, Polymyositis, Fibro myalgia,
Ankylosing spondylitis
5 Management of Metabolic Disorders- Osteoporosis, Osteomalacia & Rickets 10
Total Hours 80
203
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks
Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
1. Adams's Outline of Fractures, Including Joint Injuries

2. Book by A. Hamish R. W. Simpson, David L. Hamblen, and John Cranford Adams
3. Outline of Fractures–Adams
4. Outline of Orthopedics. --Adams
5. Apley’s systems of orthopedics and fractures by Louis Solomon, 9thedition
6. Short practice of surgery—Bailey and Love
7. Textbook of Surgery - DAS
204

Medical and surgical aspects of cardiovascular, Respiratory
Name of the Course
disorders and general medical conditions
Course Code BPT-029

CO 1 Explain etiology, pathophysiology, clinical signs, symptoms & management
of cardiovascular, pulmonary and general medical conditions.
CO 2 Acquire skill of history taking and clinical examination of respiratory,
cardio-vascular system as a part of clinical teaching.
CO 3 Interpret auscultation findings related to respiratory system.
CO 4 Interpret Chest X-ray, Blood gas analysis, Pulmonary Function Tests&
Haematological studies relevant to cardiovascular, respiratory and general
medical conditions.
CO5 Describe the principles of management in the Intensive Care Unit.
CO6 Acquire the skills of Basic Life Support.
CO7 Acquire knowledge for drugs used in each condition to understand its effect and its
medical uses and influence on Physiotherapy management.
Unit Topics Hours

1 Cardio-vascular diseases 20
• Hypertension – systemic
• Cardiac Conditions- I.H.D. (Angina, Myocardial infarction), R.H.D,
Infective Endocarditis, Cardio myopathy, Heart Failure
• Valvular Heart Disease -Congenital, Acquired
• Congenital Heart Disease
• Peripheral arterial diseases, Varicose veins and PVD, lymphatic
disorders
• Congenital vascular disorders
• Investigations- Basics of E.C.G. [ Normal & Abnormal (Ischaemia,
Infarction & Arrhythmias)], Observation of conduction of stress test on
patient, 2D Echo (Ejection Fraction & Wall motion Abnormality)
2 Respiratory Diseases 20
• Common Infectious diseases like Tuberculosis, Pneumonia, Lung
Abscess, Bronchiectasis, SARS-CoV, MERS-CoV, andCOVID-19.
• Diseases of Pleura like Pleural Effusion, Pneumothorax,
Hydro pneumothorax, and Empyema.
• ILD & Occupational lung diseases like Silicosis, Asbestosis,
205
Pneumoconiosis, Brucellosis, Farmer’s Lung.

• Obstructive Airway Diseases (C.O.P.D. with Cor Pulmonale, Pulmonary
Hypertension, Bronchial, Asthma & Cystic Fibrosis)
• Intensive Care Unit- Infrastructure, Instrumentation, Mechanical
Ventilation (settings & monitoring), Assessment, monitoring &
management of patient in I.C.U.
• Investigation: Normal & Abnormal- Chest X-ray, Blood Gas Analysis,
PFT(Observation of conduction on patient)
• Management of infectious disease as COVID-19, Severe Acute
Respiratory Syndrome Middle East Respiratory Syndrome and others
3 General medical conditions 10
• General Medicine
• Disorders of Endocrine system (Diabetes) Introduction, pathophysiology,
types, role of physical activity, complications of diabetes (autonomic
neuropathy, myopathy, weakness) &medications.
• Thyroid, Pituitary & Adrenal conditions Cushing’s syndrome
• Obesity
• Nutrition Deficiency Disease (Rickets, Vit. E, Vit. D, Vit. B , micro
nutrients,(Zn,Se)
• Intoxication (Drug abuse; Alcohol, smoking, cocaine dependence
4 General Surgeries 15
• Types of Anesthesia, Effect, indications and contraindications and
common postoperative complications
• Hemorrhage and Shock, classification, description and treatment
• Water & Electrolyte imbalance
• Inflammation – acute & chronic-signs, symptoms, complications &
management
• Wounds & Ulcers, Cellulitis – classification, healing process,
management, bandaging, Dressing solutions and its uses and debridement
Procedure, hand washing and universal precautions.
• Common abdominal surgical incisions – classification, indications,
opening – closure, advantages and disadvantages, complications
(including burst abdomen and fecal fistula), minimally invasive surgery.
• Mastectomy and onco surgery– approach, complications &management
• Amputation – types, sites, complications &management
• Burns – causes, complications, classification &management
• Hernias-surgery, precautions and complications
• Transplantation approach, risk problems related to donor and recipient,
precautions.
5 Cardio-Thoracic Surgeries 15
• Introduction, Cardiorespiratory resuscitation, cardiopulmonary bypass,
Special investigation procedures in cardiac surgery, Basic techniques in
cardiac surgery approach, incisions, Types of operation, Complications
206
of cardiac surgery, Lines, drains and tubes.
• Brief description of indications, surgery, complications for:
Surgeries of thorax, lung, pleura and pericardium
Surgery for coronary artery disease
Valvular surgeries
Surgery for Congenital Heart Disease
Peripheral arterial disorder, Burger’s disease, Raynaud’s disease and
Aneurysm
Gangrene, Amputation, DVT
Total Hours 80
207
Applicable for batch admitted from Academic Year 2019-2020

EXAMINATION SCHEME
Section 1
(from unit 1-5)
Section 2
(from 2-5)
Total= 80
Internal examination pattern (theory): 40 marks
No. of Question
Question type questions Marks/question X Total marks
marks
Total Total= 40
Applicable for batch admitted from Academic Year 2020-2021 onwards as per Resolution No 6.8 of Academic
Council (AC-44/2022)
Theory question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS- 80 Marks
Section 1 (Medical aspects of Cardiovascular, Respiratory disorders and general medical
conditions)
Q1-Short answer questions 6 out of 7 5 6x5 30
(From units 1-3)
Q2-Long answer question 2 out of 3 10 2 x 10 20

(from 1 & 2)
Section 2 (Surgical aspects of Cardiovascular, Respiratory disorders and general medical conditions)

(From unit 4 & 5)
Q2-Long answer question 1 out of 2 10 1x10 10
(From unit 4 & 5)
Total= 80
208
No. of questions Question X marks

Question type Marks/ question Total marks
Section 1 (Medical aspects of Cardiovascular, Respiratory disorders and general medical conditions)

(From units 1-3)
Q2-Long answer question (From 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10 10
unit 1 & 2)
Section 2 (Surgical aspects of Cardiovascular, Respiratory disorders and general medical conditions)
Short answer questions (From 3 out of 4 5 3x5 15

unit 4 & 5)
Total Total= 40
1. Short practice of surgery- Bailey and Love
2. A manual on Clinical surgery- S.Das
3. A textbook of surgery- S. Das
209
Bachelor of Physiotherapy
Name of the Course Diagnosis of movement dysfunction and ICF Theory
Course Code BPT030

Cognitive
explain movement dysfunction and models used to evaluate function-
CO 1
ICICDH, ICF
CO 2 explain choice of appropriate tools/instruments of assessment in
musculoskeletal, neurological and cardio-vascular and respiratory conditions
CO 3 explain principles of manipulative skills, neurotherapeutic skills and skills of
cardiopulmonary care and resuscitation
document evaluation of patient based on ICF model identifying structural
CO 4 impairments, functional impairments, participation, contextual factors,
performance and capacity measurement
Psychomotor
apply evaluation methods to measure body functions related to tissue mechanics,
CO 4 apply sound biomechanical principles for appropriate handling techniques that is
ensuring privacy, positioning of body parts to be treated,
position of therapist, , manual techniques, lifting and transfer techniques
apply evaluation methods to measure body function related to motor control
CO 5
affecting activity and participation, quality of life and independence
apply skills of manual therapy musculoskeletal, neurotherapeutics and
CO 6
cardiovascular and respiratory skills on models (Laboratory work)
Affective
use ethical, safe, gender sensitive methods to evaluate and treat movement
CO 7
dysfunction
demonstrate ability to execute ethical, evidence-based practices, deliver
CO 8 effective, environment-friendly, physiotherapy management techniques
appropriate to patient’s clinical condition within constraints of available
resources
communicate with patients and their families/caregivers regarding the need and
CO 9
uses of various assessment techniques, inform risks and benefits of therapy
210
Revised as per Resolution no 4.9 of AC-42/2022 dated 26/04/2022
Unit Topics Hours

1 Functional Diagnosis using International Classification of Function, Disability 2
& Health (I.C.F.) (Applicable for all units mentioned below) and Treatment
Techniques
2 Special Tests 3
Cervical Spine: Foraminal compression, Distraction, Shoulder depression,
vertebral artery, Dizziness tests
Shoulder: Yergason’s, Speed’s, Drop- Arm, Supraspinatus, Impingement,
Anterior & Posterior Apprehension, Allen’s, Adson’s test.
Elbow: Cozen’s, Miller’s, Tinel’s sign
Forearm, Wrist &Hand: Phalen’s,Bunnel-Littler, Froment’s sign
Lumbar Spine: Schober’s, SLR, Prone,Knee Bending, Slump.
Sacro Iliac joint: Faber- Patrick’s, Gaenslen, Gillet, March’s test
Hip: Nelaton’s line, Bryant’s triangle, Thomas, Ober’s, Tripod sign,
Trendlenburg sign
Knee: Tests for collateral & cruciate ligaments (valgus, varus, Lachman,
Drawer’s, McMurray’s, Fluctuation, Patellar tap, Q- angle, Clarke’s test
Ankle & Foot: Anterior Drawer, Talar Tilt, Homan’s & Moses test
3 Response of soft tissues to trauma: 1

Trigger points, Spasm, Ligament Sprains, Muscle Strains
4 Basics in Manual Therapy with Clinical Reasoning: 2
Assessment of Articular and extra-articular soft tissue status
Contractile tissues, Non contractile tissues, Examination of joint integrity,
Accessory movement, End feel
Examination of musculoskeletal Dysfunction:
Subjective examination, Objective examination, Special tests,
Functional Diagnosis using ICF
5 Basic principles, indications, contra indications of mobilization skill for 2
joints and Soft tissues: Maitland, Mulligan, Kaltenborn, Mckenzie, Cyriax,
Myofascial Release Technique, Muscle Energy Technique, Neural Tissue
Mobilization (Neuro Dynamic Testing)
6 Cardiorespiratory techniques: 2
Vital parameters, Chest expansion, Symmetry of chest movement, Breath
Holding Test, Breath Sounds, Rate of Perceived Exertion (R.P.E.), 6minute walk
test, Auscultation, Breathing exercises, postural drainage, thoracic
expansion, rib mobilization, Respiratory PNF
7 Energy Systems & Exercise Physiology: 2
Physiological response to immobility and activity.
Aerobic & Anaerobic metabolisms
8 Fitness & Health 2

Screening for risk factors
Body composition-B.M.I., use of skin fold calipers, Girth measurement
Physical fitness: Flexibility, Strength, Endurance, Agility
211
Physical Activity Readiness Questionnaire

Screening for health and fitness in childhood, adulthood and geriatric group
Quality of life
Principles & components of exercise prescription for healthy
9. a. General principles of Human development& maturation 2
i. Aspects
a) Physical
b) motor
c) Sensory
d) Cognitive & Perceptive
e) Emotional
f) Social
ii. Factors influencing human development & growth:
a) Biological
b) Environmental inherited
iii. Principles of maturation in general & anatomical directional pattern –
a) Cephelo – caudal
b) Proximo – distal
c) Centero – lateral
d) Mass to specific pattern
e) Gross to fine motor development
f) Reflex maturation tests
iv. Development in specific fields - Oromotor development, sensory
development, neurodevelopment of hand function.
Neurological Assessment and Movement Dysfunction

i. Higher functions, Cranial nerves, Sensations , sensory organization &
body image, Joint mobility, Tone, Reflexes-Superficial & Deep,
Voluntary control, Muscle Strength, Co-ordination, Balance,
Endurance, Trick movements, Limb Length, Posture deviations, Gait
deviations due to neurological dysfunction, Functional Diagnosis
using I.C.F., Interpretation of Electro diagnostic findings( Physiology
of resting membrane potential, action potential, Propagation of
Action Potential
ii. Physiology of muscle contraction
iii. Motor unit & Recruitment pattern of motor unit – Size principle
iv. Therapeutic current –as a tool for electro diagnosis.
a) Electrophysiology of muscle & nerve
b) Faradic Galvanic Test, Strength Duration Curve-tests
shouldbe carried out on relevant patients,
c) Test for Sensory & Pain Threshold/Pain Tolerance – technique
only
v. Electro-Myography
a) Definition
b) Instrumentation – Basic components like C.R.O., Filter, Amplifier
& Preamplifier and Types of Electrodes Normal & Abnormal
E.M.G. pattern
i. at rest
ii. on minimal contraction
212
iii. on maximal contraction
c) Nerve Conduction Studies
i. Principles & Technique
ii. F wave
H reflex), routine Biochemical investigations
SCALES: Berg Balance, Modified Ashworth, F.I.M., Barthel Index,
G.C.S.,D.G.I., M.M.S.,S.T.R.E.A.M. & A.S.I.A.
10. Basics in Neuro Therapeutics Skills & Applications with Clinical 2
reasoning- Principles, Technique & Indications for Application of Bobath,
Neuro Developmental Technique, Rood’s Technique, P.N.F., Brunnstrom,
Techniques of Motor Relearning Program (M.R.P.)
Total 20
1. Orthopaedic Physical Examination–Magee

2. Clinical Electro Therapy – Nelson – Currier --- Appleton &Lange publication
3. Clinical Electromyography–Mishra
4. Therapeutic Exercises – Colby & Kisner
5. Physical Rehabilitation, Assessment and treatment - Susan BO’s Sullivan
6. Neurological Examination –John Patten

1. Maitland‟s book on Manual therapy,
2. Mobilisation of Extremities – Kaltenborn
3. Clinical Electromyography–Kimura
4. Orthopaedic Physical therapy–Donnatelli
5. NAGS, SNAGS and MWMS – Brian Mulligan
6. Exercise & Heart–Wenger
7. Exercise Physiology – William D Mc’Ardle
8. Facilitation techniques based on NDT principles - Lois Bly Allison Whiteside
9. Movement therapy in Hemiplegia–Brunnstrom
10. Cash textbook of Physiotherapy in neurological conditions –Patricia Downie
11. Physical Dysfunction –Trombly Scoot
12. Infant Motor Development-Jan Piek
13. Neurology & Neurosurgery Illustrated (3rd edition)-Bone & Callander
14. Neuro-developmental Therapy–Janett Howle
213
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks
Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks.
214
Bachelor of Physiotherapy
Name of the Course Diagnosis of movement dysfunction and ICF Practical
Course Code BPT031

Cognitive
explain movement dysfunction and models used to evaluate function-
CO 1
ICICDH, ICF
CO 2 explain choice of appropriate tools/instruments of assessment in
musculoskeletal, neurological and cardio-vascular and respiratory conditions
CO 3 explain principles of manipulative skills, neurotherapeutic skills and skills of
cardiopulmonary care and resuscitation
Psychomotor
apply evaluation methods to measure body functions related to tissue
CO 4 mechanics,applysoundbiomechanicalprinciplesforappropriatehandling
techniques that is ensuring privacy, positioning of body parts to be treated,
position of therapist, , manual techniques, lifting and transfer techniques
apply evaluation methods to measure body function related to motor control
CO 5 affecting activity and participation, quality of life and independence
apply skills of manual therapy musculoskeletal, neurotherapeutics and
CO 6
cardiovascular and respiratory skills on models (Laboratory work)
Affective
use ethical, safe, gender sensitive methods to evaluate and treat movement
CO 7
dysfunction
demonstrate ability to execute ethical, evidence-based practices, deliver effective,
CO 8 environment-friendly, physiotherapy management techniques appropriate to
patient’s clinical condition within constraints of available
resources
communicate with patients and their families/caregivers regarding the need and
CO 9 uses of various assessment techniques, inform risks and benefits of therapy
215
Unit Topics Hours

Musculoskeletal Assessment and management 4
1 Soft tissue flexibility, Joint mobility, Muscle strength & Endurance, Trick
movement, Sensations, Limb length, Abnormal posture, Gait deviations due to
musculoskeletal dysfunction
2 Special Tests 4
Cervical Spine: Foraminal compression, Distraction, Shoulder depression,
vertebral artery, Dizziness tests
Shoulder: Yergason’s, Speed’s, Drop- Arm, Supraspinatus, Impingement,
Anterior & Posterior Apprehension, Allen’s, Adson’s test.
Elbow: Cozen’s, Miller’s, Tinel’s sign
Forearm, Wrist &Hand: Phalen’s,Bunnel-Littler, Froment’s sign
Lumbar Spine: Schober’s, SLR, Prone,Knee Bending, Slump.
Sacro Iliac joint: Faber- Patrick’s, Gaenslen, Gillet, March’s test
Hip: Nelaton‟s line, Bryant‟s triangle, Thomas, Ober‟s, Tripod sign,
Trendlenburg sign
Knee: Tests for collateral & cruciate ligaments (valgus, varus, Lachman,
Drawer’s, McMurray’s, Fluctuation, Patellar tap, Q- angle, Clarke’s test
Ankle & Foot: Anterior Drawer, Talar Tilt, Homan‟s & Moses test
3 Response of soft tissues to trauma: 2

Trigger points, Spasm, Ligament Sprains, Muscle Strains
5 Basics in Manual Therapy and Applications with Clinical Reasoning: 4
Assessment of Articular and extra-articular soft tissue status
Contractile tissues, Non contractile tissues, Examination of joint integrity,
Accessory movement, End feel
Examination of musculoskeletal Dysfunction:
Subjective examination, Objective examination, Special tests,
Functional Diagnosis using ICF
6 Assessment of Pain: 2
Types of pain: Somatic, Somatic referred, Neurogenic, Visceral
Subjective Assessment: Location, duration, progression, distribution, quality,
diurnal variations, modifying factors, Severity, nature of pain, tissue irritability
Objective Measurement & Documentation- Visual
Analogue Scale (V.A.S), Numerical Rating Scale(N.R.S.), McGill‟s modified
questionnaire(including Body Charts)
7 Basic principles, indications, contra indications of mobilization skill for 4
joints and Soft tissues: Maitland, Mulligan, Kaltenborn, Mckenzie, Cyriax,
Myofascial Release Technique, Muscle Energy Technique, Neural Tissue
Mobilization (Neuro Dynamic Testing)
8 Cardiorespiratory Assessment and management techniques: 4
Vital parameters, Chest expansion, Symmetry of chest movement, Breath
Holding Test, Breath Sounds, Rate of Perceived Exertion (R.P.E.), 6minute walk
test , Auscultation, Breathing exercises, postural drainage, thoracic expansion,
rib mobilization, Respiratory PNF
216
9 Energy Systems & Exercise Physiology: 4

Evaluation of Functional Capacity using sub maximal tests (Exercise Tolerance
– Six Minutes Walk test)Theoretical bases of different protocols for maximal
exercise testing
(e.g.: Bruce Protocol, Modified Bruce Protocol, Balke)
Interpretation of reports – A.B.G., P.F.T., P.E.F.R., E.C.G.- (Normal &
Variations due to Ischemia & Infarction), X-ray Chest, Biochemical Reports
Ankle Brachial Index
Tests for Peripheral Arterial & Venous circulation
10 Assessment of Fitness & Health 4
Screening for risk factors
Body composition-B.M.I., use of skin fold calipers, Girth measurement
Physical fitness: Flexibility, Strength, Endurance, Agility
Physical Activity Readiness Questionnaire
Screening for health and fitness in childhood, adulthood and geriatric group
Quality of life
Principles & components of exercise prescription for healthy
11 Neurological Assessment and Movement Dysfunction 4
Higher functions, Cranial nerves, Sensations , sensory organization & body
image, Joint mobility, Tone, Reflexes-Superficial & Deep, Voluntary control,
Muscle Strength, Co-ordination, Balance, Endurance, Trick movements, Limb
Length, Posture deviations, Gait deviations due to neurological dysfunction,
Functional Diagnosis using I.C.F., Interpretation of Electro diagnostic findings,
routine Biochemical investigations
12 Basics in Neuro Therapeutics Skills & Applications with Clinical reasoning- 4
Principles, Technique & Indications for Application of Bobath, Neuro
Developmental Technique, Rood’s Technique, P.N.F., Brunnstrom,
Techniques of Motor Relearning Program (M.R.P.)
Total 40
1. Orthopaedic Physical Examination–Magee

2. Clinical Electro Therapy – Nelson – Currier --- Appleton &Lange publication
3. Clinical Electromyography–Mishra
4. Therapeutic Exercises – Colby & Kisner
5. Physical Rehabilitation, Assessment and treatment - Susan BO’s Sullivan
6. Neurological Examination –John Patten

1. Maitland’s book on Manual therapy,
2. Mobilisation of Extremities – Kaltenborn
3. Clinical Electromyography–Kimura
217
4. Orthopaedic Physical therapy–Donnatelli

5. NAGS, SNAGS and MWMS – Brian Mulligan
6. Exercise & Heart–Wenger
7. Exercise Physiology – William D Mc’Ardle
8. Facilitation techniques based on NDT principles - Lois Bly Allison Whiteside
9. Movement therapy in Hemiplegia–Brunnstrom
10. Cash textbook of Physiotherapy in neurological conditions –Patricia Downie
11. Physical Dysfunction –Trombly Scoot
12. Infant Motor Development-Jan Piek
13. Neurology & Neurosurgery Illustrated (3rd edition)-Bone & Callander
14. Neuro-developmental Therapy–Janett Howle
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Q No 1 Exercise 15
Q No 2 2 OSPE station 20
Q No 3 Journal 5
Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Exercise 40
Q No 2 4 OSPE stations 40
Total= 80
Mid Semester Examination pattern (Practical): 40 marks
Q No 1 Exercise 20
Q No 2 2 OSPE station 20
Total= 40
218
Internal Assessment marks will be weighted out of 20 marks.
219
Name of the Program Bachelor of Physiotherapy

Name of the Course Public health
Course Code BPT-032

CO 1 Explain the concept of health care, determinants of health, health care delivery
systems and management issues in Health Services.
CO 2 explain National Health Care Policies
CO 3 explain epidemiology of communicable, non-communicable, nutritional diseases
explain levels of health care services, hospital waste management, disaster
CO 4
management
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
1. General Concepts & Determinants Of Health & Diseases: 08

• National & International Definition of Health, Role of Socio-Economic &
Cultural Environment in Health & Disease.
• Epidemiology – Definition & scope, uses with relevance to physiotherapy
Environmental Hygiene including man & his surrounding,
• Occupational & Industrial hygiene, Village & Town Sanitation, Bacteriology
of Water, Milk, & Food Hygiene.
2. National Public Health Administration 04

3. Healthcare Delivery System: 06
• Healthcare Delivery System of India
• National Health Programs
• Role of W.H.O.
• Millennium Development Goals for all
4. Primary Healthcare 04
• Definition
• Principles
• Elements & its application
220
Epidemiology of Socio-Economical & Cultural Issues - related to morbidity in

relation to the following vulnerable groups.
• Women: Pregnant and lactating women, maternal health (ANC, PNC, INC),
peri-menopausal women’s health: physical &psychological
• Infants: (Low Birth Weight, Breast feeding, Complimentary feeding, IYCN,
5. 08
IMNCI Vaccine preventable diseases, Immunization programs, Infant and
childhood mortality)
• Children: Child health, Growth monitoring under five clinic, ICDS, PEM
• School aged population health: Early detection and prevention of disabilities,
behavioral problems
Demography and Objectives of National Family Welfare Programs And
6. 04
National Population Policy
7. Epidemiology of Communicable Diseases 06
An over-view [including prevention & control] T.B., H.I.V., Leprosy, Vector borne
diseases- Malaria / Filariasis / Dengue/ Chikungunya/ Japanese encephalitis/Covid
19/SARS/H1N1.
8. Epidemiology of Non Communicable Diseases: 06
Diabetes Mellitus, Hypertension, Coronary Heart Disease / Obesity / Blindness/
Accidents /Stroke/ Cancer.
9. Epidemiology of Nutritional Diseases: 04
Malnutrition, Nutritional disorders and National nutrition programmes, Osteomalacia,
Rickets, Neuropathies due to Vitamin - deficiency, skeletal Deformities.
10. Hospital Waste Management: 04

Universal Safety Precautions, Immunization of health care providers including them
vaccination.
11. Introduction to Disaster Management 06
Types of disaster- Natural, manmade, complex emergencies, pandemic emergencies
Aspects of disaster management- disaster prevention, disaster preparedness, disaster

response/ relief, disaster recovery
Total 60
221
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks

Total 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 20
1. An Introduction to Sociology – Sachdeva &Bhushan

2. Indian Social Problems -Madan, Vol-I-Madras
3. Preventive and social medicine- K. Park.
4. WHO guidelines
222

Name of the Course 2D Motion Capture
Course Code GEC001
Course Description Generic Elective Theory and Practical

CO 1 explain process of capture of photographs and videos using digital cameras
explain technical considerations- equipment, concept of composition, light, exposure,
CO 2 focus, alignment, depth of field, different types of photography, post photo
processing, , identify bony landmarks, position reflective markers and capturing
unobtrusive movement
CO 3 apply ethical considerations while capturing photographs of human participants,
seeking written informed consent
capture photographs and videos of healthy participants while performing ADL,
CO 4
walking, exercise, running etc.
use software’s for analysis of 2D motion capture, measure spatial-temporal variables,
CO 5
joint angles, measure inter tester ad intra tester reliability of data captured
Units Topics Hours

1 Introduction to Photography and videography 2
2 Technical aspects of photography and videography- Photography Equipment:
Camera, Lens, Tripods, Digital storage
Camera settings: Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO, Camera modes, Flash,
Metering, Color filters, Focus, Exposure, Composition, Depth of field
Common camera settings to take sharp pictures
Lighting: Natural vs Artificial light, Indoor vs Outdoor photography, Reflection 8
Different types of photography: Portrait, Landscape, Macro, Motion Photography
Representation of digital image: Resolution, Pixel Depth, Pixel Aspect Ratio, Image
Compression, File Formats.
Digital Output: Placing photos in other documents, Printers as output devices –
Different types of Print, Proofing, Photo quality printing
3 Post photo processing: Digital Retouching & Image Enhancement, Image editing
through image editing software like Adobe Photoshop – Adjustment of Brightness, 4
Contrast, Tonal and Color Values, fixing blemishes, color correcting.
4 Ethical considerations and informed consent 1
5 Softwares used to analyse 2D motion capture 5
Theory Total 20
223
Topics (Practical)
1 2 D capture of ADL 10
2 2D capture of gait 10
3 Inter and intra tester reliability 20
Practical Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME


Total= 40
Q1 2 OSPE stations 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Semester Examination (Theory)- 40 marks

Total= 40
224
University Examination Pattern (Practical): 40marks

Total = 40


Total = 20

Total = 20
Reference Books:
1. The Focal Encyclopedia of Photography by Michael Peres4thEdition
2. Mastering Aperture, Shutter Speed, ISO & Exposure by Al Judge ISBN-10:1482314452
3. Adobe Photoshop CC for Photographers 2018 by Martin Evening ISBN-10:1138086762
4. The Beginner's Photography Guide by Chris Gatcum 2nd Edition ISBN-10:1465449663
5. Complete Digital Photography by Ben Long 9th editionISBN-10:1732636923
6. Light--science & magic byFil Hunter,Paul Fuqua5thEdition
225

Name of the Course Medical Device Innovation and IPR
Course Code GEC002

Explain steps involved in developing medical device from prototype designing to
CO 1 final product development and testing related to the same in order to improve
healthcare among patients and general population.
explain technology innovation, product development, project and business
management, intellectual property, regulatory affairs, clinical needs,
CO 2 entrepreneurship, emerging trends, globalization, reimbursement, and public
policy.
apply a repeatable process for identifying and characterizing a significant unmet

CO 3 health need and inventing and evaluating a new technology to address it.
explain risks and challenges that are unique to medical device innovation and
CO 4 develop strategies for assessing and managing them.
Work effectively in a multidisciplinary team.
Units Topics Hours
1 Introduction to Medical Device Innovation

• Orientation to the curriculum
• Approaches in Device Innovation 2
• Future scope
2 Clinical Foundations of Medical Device Innovation

• Identifying need for device innovation: A problem-solution based approach
3
to understand unmet health care needs
3 Product Innovation and Development Management

• Concept of prototype and design development
4
• Framework for conceptualization, design, development and the
commercializationprocessformedicalproducts,withasurveyofkeysteps
226
in innovation from an engineering and business perspective.
4 Quality, Regulatory, and Manufacturing Management

• Examine process validations, Good Laboratory Practice (GLP), Good
Manufacturing Practice (GMP), appropriate management of Standard 4
Operating Procedures (SOPs) and knowledge sharing across the value chain.
5 Role of IPR in device innovation

• Understanding various policies and steps for safeguarding newly
4
designeddevices through filing of copyright and patent
6 Technical Writing
• Develop the professional skills required to communicate technical
3
information to a broad audience in an effective manner
Theory Total 20
Topics (Practical)
1 Visit to Healthcare centers
• Interviews, Surveys among clinicians to identify problem 10
2 Visit to Macro environment of Technology incubation centers:

• Understanding basics of mechanics, availability, functioning and cost of
10
resources
3 Development of Product design

• Multi-disciplinary team building to develop prototype, work on
20
fabrication, making of final product and plan for commercialization
Practical Total 40
227
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Applicable for batch admitted in 2019-2020
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Assessment

willbe conducted at the constituent unit level


Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University Semester Examination (Theory) - 40 marks

Total= 40
University examination pattern (practical): 40marks

Q No 1 Prototype protocol presentation 40
Total = 40
228
Checklist for evaluation of prototype protocol presentation Marks

Statement of problem 10
Market research 10
Designing and validation the prototype 20
Total marks 40

Section 1
Total = 20

Q No 1 Designing and preparation of 20
prototype proposal
Total = 20
Reference Books:
1. The Essence of medical device Innovation; B Ravi, The Write Place, 1stEdition
2. Inventing Medical Devices: A perspective from India; Dr. Jagdish Chaturvedi, Notion
Press, 1stEdition
3. Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation; R.S. Khandpur; McGraw Hill Education,
3rd Edition
229

Name of the Course Diagnostic Radiology
Course Code AEEC005

CO 1 explain different aspects of diagnosis and intervention in radiology.
CO 2 explain use of imaging techniques like X Rays, ultra-sonography, CT scan, MRI and
interventional radiology.
CO 3 explain technical aspects of clinical radiology and applied radiology and post
treatment follow up in disease.
interpret radiological reports of X Rays, ultra-sonography, CT scan, MRI related to
CO 4
musculoskeletal system, neurological system and cardiorespiratory system
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
Radiological studies in musculoskeletal, neurological, cardiovascular and respiratory

1. 4
conditions.
2 Basic principles of X-rays, instrumentation, observations related to musculoskeletal,
4
neurological and cardiovascular and respiratory conditions
Ultrasonography- Principles, instrumentation, observations in vascular disorders,
3 4
gynecological conditions, recent advances in musculoskeletal ultrasonography
4 CT scan and MRI- Principles, instrumentation and observations related to
4
musculoskeletal, neurological and cardiovascular and respiratory conditions
5 Interventional Radiology 4
6 Practical: Observation and interpretation of radiological investigations related to
40
musculoskeletal, neurological and cardiovascular and respiratory conditions
60
230
EXAMINATION SCHEME


Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40
231

Section 1
Total = 20

Total = 20
Reference Books:
1. Diagnostic and Interventional Radiology- Thomas J. Vogl, Wolfgang Reith, Ernst J.

Rummeny.
2. Learning Radiology- William Herring.
3. Vascular and Interventional Radiology- KarimValji
4. Textbook of Radiology and Imaging- David Sutton.
232

Name of the Course Pulmonary Function Test
Course Code AEEC006

explain principles behind pulmonary function tests, types of tests-spirometer, DLCO,
CO 1 indications and contraindications of pulmonary function test
explain normal physiology and pathophysiological changes in lung volumes and

capacities, respiratory muscle strength, gas exchange, reversibility, flow volume loops
CO 2
in respiratory diseases, importance of pre-operative PFT, recent advances in PFT
CO 3 perform bedside pulmonary function test

Explain principles of maximal and sub-maximal exercise testing, methods, protocols,
CO 4 equipment’s used for testing functional capacity, indications and contra-indications of
testing
explain normal physiology and pathophysiological changes during exercise test
CO 5
related to cardiovascular, respiratory, metabolic systems
perform sub-maximal exercise tests – Bruce’s treadmill protocol, cycle ergometer
CO 6 testing, walk tests; observe and interpret Stress Test reports, and Holter monitor
reports
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
1. Introduction to PFT, Instrumentation, Indications, Contraindications 2

2 Spirometry, Lung volumes and capacities, Flow-Volume loops, Reversibility 2
3 Respiratory muscle strength 2
4 Gas exchange studies-Diffusing capacity, Alveolar -Arterial O2 gradient 2
5 Bedside- PFT and Preoperative assessment: TISI guidelines ACP guidelines 2
6 Pulmonary function test report in various lung conditions 2
Exercise testing – Submaximal and maximal testing, Principles, Instrumentation,
7 Indications and Contraindications, Exercise testing Protocols – Treadmill and Cycle 4
Ergometer testing
8 Stress Testing and Holter monitoring 2
233
9 Pediatric Exercise Testing 2

10 Practical: Performing and Interpretation of Pulmonary function test in healthy people 20
11 Practical: Performing and interpreting sub-maximal exercise tests in healthy people 20
Total Hours 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME


Total= 40

EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40
234

Section 1
Total = 20

Total = 20
Reference Books:
1. Ruppel's Manual of Pulmonary Function Testing by Carl Mottram 10thEdition

2. Pulmonary Function Tests & Interpretation In Health & Diseases By P.S.Shankar3rd
Edition
3. Murray & Nadel's Textbook of Respiratory Medicine by Robert J. Mason MD6th Edition
4. Interpretative strategies for lung function tests by R. Pellegrino et al European
Respiratory Journal 2005 26:948-968.
5. The ATS/ERS consensus on clinical pulmonary function testing by V. Brusasco et al
Breathe2005
6. Standardisation of spirometry by M. R. Miller et al European Respiratory Journal 2005
26:319-338.
7. Recommendations for a Standardized Pulmonary Function Report An Official
American Thoracic Society Technical Statement Am J Respir Crit Care Med Vol 196,
Issue11, pp 1463–1472, Dec 1, 2017
235

Semester Semester V
Students will be learning about patient evaluation, assessment techniques and critical
thinking in patient care.

Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Case1 20
Total = 40

Q No 1 Case1 10
Total = 20
236
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-VI
Course Course Theory Practical Clinical

Course Title Credits
Code Description Hours Hours Hours
Medical and
surgical aspects of
Neurological
disorders
Physiotherapy for
BPT034 women and child Core Theory 40 - - 2
care theory
Physiotherapy for
BPT035 women and child Practical - 80 2
care practical
Public Health and
Preventive
Physiotherapy
theory
Public Health and

Preventive
Physiotherapy
practical
Physiotherapy in
BPT038 Geriatric Care Core Theory 20 - - 1
Theory
Physiotherapy in
BPT039 Geriatric Care Core Practical - 40 - 1
Practical
Introduction to
Evidence Based
BPT 040 Core Theory 20 - - 1
Physiotherapy
theory
Introduction to
Evidence Based
BPT 041 Core Practical - 40 - 1
Physiotherapy
practical
Clinical Skill Based
SEC003 20 40 - 2
Biomechanics Elective Course
Vestibular Skill Based
SECC004 20 40 - 2
Rehabilitation Elective Course
Basic skills in
BPTCLT006 - - 260 4
patient care
237

Name of the Course Medical and Surgical Aspects of Neurological Disorders
Course Code BPT-033

CO 1 describe neuro-anatomy, neurophysiology and medical management of neurological
conditions
CO 2 describe procedures followed during neuro-surgery, effects of surgical trauma
&anesthesia in general surgery
CO 3 assess and treat medically managed patients with neurological dysfunction, perform
pre-operative evaluation of patient undergoing neurosurgery, describe indications for
various surgical approaches, apply treatment techniques to manage patient post-
operatively, describe post-operative complication during and following neurosurgery
CO 4 interpret relevant investigations related to neurological disorders such as CT scan, MRI
reports, blood investigations, EMG-NVC studies, Doppler and others
Unit Topics Hours

1 NEUROLOGY
Introduction to Nervous System 5
• Applied Neuro-anatomy
• Applied Neuro-physiology
2 Cerebro-Vascular Accidents 5
• Thrombosis, Embolism, Haemorrhage
• Level of Lesion & symptoms
• Management
3 Extra Pyramidal lesions 5
• Basal Ganglia
• Parkinsonism
• Atherosis, Chorea, Dystonia
4 Differential diagnosis of muscle wasting 5
• Approach to neuropathies
• Myopathies and neuromuscular junction disorders.
5 • Disorders of Anterior Horn cell with differential diagnosis of Motor 10
Neuron Disease, S.M.A., Syringomyelia, Peroneal Muscular Atrophy,
and Poliomyelitis.
6 Disorders of Spinal cord 10

• Syndromes
• Bladder dysfunction
• Autonomic dysfunction
238
7 • Infections of the nervous system: Encephalitis, Neurosyphilis, H.I.V. 10
infection, Herpes, Meningitis, Tabes Dorsalis
8 • Disorders of cerebellar function 10
• Disorders of cranial nerves & Special Senses
9 Tetanus, Epilepsy, Alzheimer’s Disease, Dementia , Multiple Sclerosis 10
10 Neurosurgery 10
• Head Injury –management
• Intra cranial & Spina ltumors
• Intracranial Aneurysm and AV malformation
• Post operative Neurosurgical care
Total 80
Applicable for batch admitted in Academic Year 2019-2020

EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks
Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
239
Applicable for batch admitted from Academic Year 2020-2021 onwards as per Resolution No 6.9 of Academic
Council (AC-44/2022)

Section 1 (Medical aspects of Neurological Disorders)

(from unit 1-9)
Q2-Long answer question 2 out of 3 10 2 x 10 20
(from unit 2-6 & 8)
Section 3 (Surgical aspects of Neurological Disorders)
Short answer questions (from unit 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
10)
Total= 80
No. of questions Question X

Question type Marks/ marks Total marks
question
Section 1 (Medical aspects of Neurological Disorders)
Q1- Short answer questions (from unit 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
1-9)
Q2- Long answer question (from unit 2- 1 out of 2 10 1 x 10 10
6 & 8)
Section 2 (Surgical aspects of Neurological Disorders)
Short answer questions (from unit 10) 2 out of 3 5 2x5 10
Total Total= 40
RECOMMEMDED TEXTBOOKS
1 .API- Text book of Medicine, 5thedition
2. Medicine-- P.J. Mehta
1. Principles & Practice of Medicine --Davidson
240
Revised as per Resolution no 6.10 of AC-44/2022

Name of the Course Physiotherapy for Women and Child care
Course Code BPT 034

CO 1 describe normal development & growth of a child
CO 2 describe neuromuscular, musculoskeletal, cardio-vascular & respiratory conditions,
immunological conditions, nutritional deficiencies, infectious diseases, & genetically
transmitted conditions in children and women
CO 3 assess function of a neonate / child with respect to neurological, musculoskeletal &respiratory
function
CO 4 describe normal & abnormal physiological events, complications and management
during puberty, pregnancy and menopause
CO 5 describe uro-genital dysfunction.(Antenatal, Postnatal, during menopause)
CO 6 apply skill of clinical examination of pelvic floor
CO 7 apply Physiotherapeutic interventions for women and child health
Unit Topics Hours

PAEDIATRICS
1 Normal intra-uterine development of foetus with special reference to Central 1
Nervous System, Neuromuscular System, Cardiovascular Respiratory System
2 Immunization and breast-feeding 1
3 Sepsis, Prematurity, Asphyxia Hyperbilirubinemia and birth injuries 1
4 Cerebral Palsy- Medical Management including early intervention 1
5 Developmental disorders associated with spinal cord: Spinal Dysraphism, 1
Spina Bifida, Meningocele, Myelomeningocele, hydrocephalus
6 Common infections 1
• C.N.S.& Peripheral Nervous System
• Typhoid, Rubella, Mumps, Measles, Diphtheria,
Chickengunia, Malaria
7 Genetically transmitted neuromuscular conditions 1
8 Juvenile R. A. & other Rheumatologic conditions of Musculoskeletal system 1
9 Common diseases of the Respiratory system: Asthma, Bronchitis, 1
Bronchiectasis, T.B., Pneumonia, Lung collapse, Pleural effusion.
241
10 Respiratory distress in neonate 1

11 Rheumatic & Congenital Heart disease 2
12 Physiotherapy assessment and management of common pediatric cardiorespiratory, 8
musculoskeletal and neurological disorders
Obstetrics and Gynaecology
13 Anatomical And Physiological Variations Associated With Puberty & Menstruation: 1
Abnormalities & Common Problems Of Menstruation
14 Anatomical And Physiological Variations Associated With Pregnancy Development of 1
the foetus, Normal/ Abnormal / multiple gestations, Common Complications during
pregnancy: Anaemia, PIH , Eclampsia , Diabetes,Hepatitis,TORCH infection or HIV
15 Physiology of Labour 1
Normal – Events of Ist, IInd& IIIrd Stages of labour
Complications during labour &management
Caesarean section- elective/ emergency & post-operative care
16 Post Natal Period 1
Puerperium &Lactation
Complications of repeated child bearing with small gaps
Methods of contraception
17 Infertility - Management with emphasis on PCOS/PCOD 1
18 Urogenital Dysfunction 1
Uterine prolapse – Classification & Management (Conservative / Surgical) Cystocoele,
Rectocoele, Enterocoele, Urethrocoele
Incontinence, malignancy and their therapeutic interventions.
19 Gynaecological Surgeries (Pre And Post Surgical Management) 1
20 Pre,Peri,Post Menopause- 1
Anatomical and Physiological variations associated with 0Menopause
Complications
Management
21 Pelvic Inflammatory Diseases - with special emphasis to backache due to Gynecological 1
/ Obstetrical conditions
22 Women in India and Social issue having impact on physical Function 1
23 Legal rights and benefits related to health 1

24 Physiotherapy for women’s health 9
Physiotherapy management after gynecological surgeries (pre and post-surgical care)
Physiotherapy management in urogenital dysfunction Physiotherapy management in
antenatal and post-natal care
Total 40
242
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
respectively
1. Essentials of Paediatrics – O.P. Ghai-Inter Printpublications

2. Clinical Paediatrics - MeherbanSingh
3. Text book of Gynaecology – Datta – New Central BookAgency
4. Text book of Obstetrics --Datta – New Central BookAgency
5. Physiotherapy in Gynecological & Obstetrical conditions–Mantle
6. Therapeutic Exercise –Kisner
7. Text of Physiotherapy for obstetrics and Gynecology – G.B. Madhuri&Pruthvish
1. Women’s Health – Sapsford
243
Revised as per Resolution no 6.10 of AC-44/2022

Name of the Course Physiotherapy for Women and Child care
Course Code BPT 035

CO 1 demonstrate skill in evaluation of normally developing children
CO 2 demonstrate skill in evaluation of neuromuscular, musculoskeletal, cardio-vascular & respiratory
conditions, & other conditions in neonates and children
CO 3 apply physiotherapy techniques for management of neuromuscular, musculoskeletal, cardio-

vascular & respiratory conditions, & other conditions in neonates and children
CO 4 demonstrate skill in evaluation and management of physiotherapy pertinent health issues in
pregnant and post menopause women
CO 5 demonstrate skill in evaluation of clinical examination of pelvic floor and uro-genital
dysfunction.(Antenatal, Postnatal, during menopause)
Unit Topics Hours

I PEDIATRICS : Physiotherapy Assessment,
and management of
Cerebral Palsy- Medical Management including early intervention 20
Developmental disorders associated with spinal cord: Spinal Dysraphism,
Spina Bifida, Meningocele, Myelomeningocele, hydrocephalus
Common infections of C.N.S.& Peripheral Nervous System
Mental Retardation and Down‟s Syndrome
Genetically transmitted neuromuscular conditions
Basics in Neurotherapeutic skills in Pediatric disorders
Juvenile R. A. & other Rheumatologic conditions of Musculoskeletal system 4
Common diseases of the Respiratory system: Asthma, Bronchitis, 8
Bronchiectasis, T.B., Pneumonia, Lung collapse, Pleural effusion.
Respiratory distress in neonate 4
Rheumatic & Congenital Heart disease 4
II OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY: Physiotherapy Assessment and
management techniques for
Pre-pregnancy counselling 3
244
Physiotherapy management in antenatal period 10

1st trimester
2nd trimester
3rd trimester
Physiotherapy in different stages of labour 3
Physiotherapy in post-natal care 3
Physiotherapy in gynecological conditions and surgeries 3
Physiotherapy in Urogenital dysfunction (Cystocoele, Rectocoele, Enterocoele, 3
Urethrocoele)
Physiotherapy in PCOS/ PCOD, dysmenorrhea, and menopause 3
Recent Physiotherapeutic advancement in women’s health 2
Observation of normal delivery, field visits for promoting ante natal care in rural 10
communities
Total 80
245
EXAMINATION SCHEME
80 marks

Q No 1 Long case 40
Q No 2 OSPE station 2x20=40
Total = 80

Q No 2 OSPE station 2 20
Total= 40
respectively
246
1. Essentials of Paediatrics – O.P. Ghai-Inter Printpublications

2. Clinical Paediatrics - MeherbanSingh
3. Text book of Gynaecology – Datta – New Central BookAgency
4. Text book of Obstetrics --Datta – New Central BookAgency
5. Physiotherapy in Gynecological & Obstetrical conditions–Mantle
6. Therapeutic Exercise –Kisner
7. Text of Physiotherapy for obstetrics and Gynecology – G.B. Madhuri&Pruthvish
1. Women’s Health – Sapsford
247

Name of the Course Public Health and Preventive Physiotherapy
Course Code BPT 036

CO 1 explain the concept of health care, determinants of health, health care delivery systems
and management issues in Health Services.
CO 2 explain role of Physiotherapists in preventing non-communicable diseases
CO 3
CO 4 It will help them in improving their performance through better understanding of the
health services at all the levels of community.
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
1. Prevention of Communicable Diseases 04

Prevention & control of T.B., H.I.V., Leprosy, Vector borne diseases- Malaria /
Filariasis / Dengue/ Chikungunya/ Japanese encephalitis/Covid 19, SARS/H1N1.
2. Prevention of Non-Communicable Diseases: 06
Diabetes Mellitus, Hypertension, Coronary Heart Disease / Obesity / Blindness/
Accidents /Stroke/ Cancer.
3. Prevention of Nutritional Diseases: 04
Malnutrition, Nutrional disorders and National nutrition programmes, Osteomalacia,
Rickets, Neuropathies due to Vitamin - deficiency, Skeletal Deformities.
4. Promotion of Sound Mental Health: 04
1. Socio-economical & cultural aspects
2. Substance abuse and addiction –tobacco, alcohol and others
5. Occupational Health and Industrial Therapy: 02

Occupational diseases & hazards - definition, scope, prevention & legislations,
Occupational lung diseases & Physical injuries/pains, Industrial therapy
6. Concepts of Rehabilitation 20
Disability- evaluation, types, prevention.
Rehabilitation- definition, types {Institutional, Reach out and Community}
National policies for rehabilitation
Rehab Team work: Medical practitioner, P.T. / O.T., A.S.T., P.&O., Clinical
psychologist, and vocational counselors and social workers.
CBR – Role of Physiotherapy & Physiotherapist
248
CBR strategies in:
i. Urban area e.g. UHC, Community Centre, Clubs, Mahila Mandals,

Social centers, Schools, industries, sports centers.
ii. Rural area- by using PHC / rural hospital, district hospital infrastructure.
Locomotor aids using local resources.
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks


Total= 40
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
respectively
1. Park’s Textbook of Preventive & Social Medicine - K.Park

2. Textbook of Preventive & Social Medicine - P.K. Mahajan & M.C. Gupta
3. Essential of Community Medicine - Baride and Kulkarni
4. Text book of Community Health for Physiotherapists – Bhaskar Rao
249
1. Status of Disabled in India -2000-RCIpublication

2. Legal Rights of disabled in India- Gautam Bannerjee
3. ICF –WHO Health Organisation 2001publication
4. Training in the Community for the people with disability – Hallender Padmini
Mendes
5. Disabled Village Children—David Werner
6. Chorin C& M Desai, C Gonsalves, 1999, Women & the Law, Vol. I & II Socio -
legal Information Centre Mumbai
250

Name of the Course Public Health and Preventive Physiotherapy
Course Code BPT 037

CO 1 explain the concept of health care, determinants of health, health care delivery systems
and management issues in Health Services.
CO 2 explain role of Physiotherapists in preventing non-communicable diseases
CO 3
CO 4 It will help them in improving their performance through better understanding of the
health services at all the levels of community.
No. of
Unit. Topics
Hrs.
1. Community Based Rehabilitation: 15

Rehab Team work: Medical practitioner, P.T. / O.T., A.S.T., P.&O., Clinical
psychologist, and vocational counselors and social workers.
CBR strategies in:
iii. Urban area e.g. UHC, Community Centre, Clubs, Mahila Mandals,
Social centers, Schools, industries, sports centers.
iv. Rural area- by using PHC / rural hospital, district hospital infrastructure.
Locomotor aids using local resources.
2. Occupational Health and Industrial Therapy: 10

Occupational diseases & hazards - definition, scope, prevention & legislations,
Occupational lung diseases & Physical injuries/pains, Industrial therapy
3. Prevention Camps 05
4. Visit to Industrial Complex for health promotion 05
5. Visit to Community Centers 05
Total 40
251
EXAMINATION SCHEME
40 marks

Q No 1 and 2 OSPE station (2) 2x20=40
Total = 40

Q No 2 OSPE station 2 10
Total= 20
respectively
1. Park‟s Textbook of Preventive & Social Medicine - K.Park

2. Textbook of Preventive & Social Medicine - P.K. Mahajan & M.C.Gupta
3. Essential of Community Medicine - Baride and Kulkarni
4. Text book of Community Health for Physiotherapists – Bhaskar Rao
1. Status of Disabled in India -2000-RCIpublication

2. Legal Rights of disabled in India- Gautam Bannerjee
3. ICF –WHO Health Organisation 2001publication
4. Training in the Community for the people with disability – Hallender Padmini
Mendes
5. Disabled Village Children—David Werner
6. Chorin C& M Desai, C Gonsalves, 1999, Women & the Law, Vol. I & II Socio -
legal Information Centre Mumbai
252

Name of the Course Physiotherapy in Geriatric Care
Course Code BPT-038

Cognitive
CO 1 explain physiology of aging process and its influence on physical function
CO 2 apply measures to improve physical function of elderly

Psychomotor
identify contextual {e.g. environmental and psycho-social cultural} factors serving as
CO 3 risk factors responsible for dysfunction and morbidity related to elderly and describe
strategies to combat dysfunction at community level.
CO 4 collaborate with other health professionals for effective service delivery &
community satisfaction
Affective
CO 5 develop as an empathetic health professional, especially for individuals with no

access to health care
Sr. No Topics Hours

1 Aging 2
1. Classification and theories of aging
2. Physiology of ageing: Musculoskeletal, Neurological, Cardio respiratory,

metabolic, visual, auditory, sensory and other systems
2 Geriatric Conditions 4
1. Osteoporosis
2. Degenerative conditions
3. Alzheimer disease
4. Dementia
5. Parkinsonism
6. Incontinence
7. Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
8. Diabetes Mellitus
253
9.Hypertension
Geriatric Assessment: WHO ICF model
• Assessment of Body Functions and Structures:

• Anthropometric measurement, Vital sign assessment.
• Musculoskeletal assessment: Muscle strength and range of motion
assessment.
• Neurological assessment: Cranial nerve examination, sensory &
coordination assessment, Four stage step test and star excursion test
• Cardiopulmonary assessment: Pulmonary function test, Peak expiratory
flow rate, respiratory strength measurement and chest wall mobility
3 • Cognitive assessment: Mini Mental Scale 4
• Activity limitation:
• Sit to stand & Transfers: Arm Curl, 30 sec Chair-Stand test, Back-Scratch
test and Chair Sit and Reach test
• Balance & Gait: Tinetti Performance-oriented Scale
• Aerobic endurance: Six-minute walk test or Two minutes walk-in place
test
• Stair-climbing: Stair climb test
• Participation restriction:
• World Health Organization Quality of Life instrument(WHOQoL),
Geriatric Depression scale and Barthel Index.
Falls Assessment, Management and Prevention in Elderly
1. Epidemiology of falls
4 2. Consequences of falls 2
3. Risk factors of falls
4. Fall prevention and Management
Role of Physiotherapy in Geriatric Care
5 Institutionalized & Community dwelling elders, Hospital based care, Half way 4
homes
NGO‟s and Health related Legal rights and benefits for the elderly.
1. National policy for senior citizen
2. National old age pension schemes
6 3. Insurance scheme 2
4. Jan Arogya
5. National council for older person
6. Annapurna policy
7 Senior citizens in India 2
TOTAL HOURS 20
254
EXAMINATION SCHEME
be conducted as Internal College Exam

Section 1
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University examination pattern (Theory): 40marks


Total 40


Total 20
255
1. World Health Organization 2001. The International Classification of Functioning, Disability

and Health (ICF). Geneva: WHO.http://www.who.int/classifications/icf/en/
2. Advanced Fitness Assessment and Exercise Prescription- Vivian. H.Heyward.
3. Physical Rehabilitation-Susan B O’Sullivan, Thomas. J.Schmitz
4. Geriatric Physical therapy- Andrew A.Guccione
256

Name of the Course Physiotherapy in Geriatric Care
Course Code BPT-039

Cognitive
CO 1 explain physiology of aging process and its influence on physical function
CO 2 apply measures to improve physical function of elderly

Psychomotor
identify contextual {e.g. environmental and psycho-social cultural} factors serving as
CO 3 risk factors responsible for dysfunction and morbidity related to elderly and describe
strategies to combat dysfunction at community level.
collaborate with other health professionals for effective service delivery &
CO 4
community satisfaction
Affective
CO 5 develop as an empathetic health professional, especially for individuals with no

access to health care
Sr. No Topics Hours

1 Geriatric Conditions 8
1. Osteoporosis
2. Degenerative conditions
3. Alzheimer disease
4. Dementia
5. Parkinsonism
6. Incontinence
7. Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
8. Diabetes Mellitus
9. Hypertension
2 Geriatric Assessment: WHO ICF model 8
257
• Assessment of Body Functions and Structures:

• Anthropometric measurement, Vital sign assessment.
• Musculoskeletal assessment: Muscle strength and range of motion
assessment.
• Neurological assessment: Cranial nerve examination, sensory &
coordination assessment, Four stage step test and star excursion test
• Cardiopulmonary assessment: Pulmonary function test, Peak expiratory
flow rate, respiratory strength measurement and chest wall mobility
• Cognitive assessment: Mini Mental Scale
• Activity limitation:
• Sit to stand & Transfers: Arm Curl, 30 sec Chair-Stand test, Back-Scratch
test and Chair Sit and Reach test
• Balance & Gait: Tinetti Performance-oriented Scale
• Aerobic endurance: Six-minute walk test or Two minutes’ walk-in place
test
• Stair-climbing: Stair climb test
• Participation restriction:
• World Health Organization Quality of Life instrument(WHOQoL),
Geriatric Depression scale and Barthel Index.
Falls Assessment, Management and Prevention in Elderly
1. Epidemiology of falls
3 2. Consequences of falls 6
3. Risk factors of falls
4. Fall prevention and Management
Role of Physiotherapy in Geriatric Care
4 Institutionalized & Community dwelling elders, Hospital based care, Half way 6
homes
NGO‟s and Health related Legal rights and benefits for the elderly.
7. National policy for senior citizen
8. National old age pension schemes
5 9. Insurance scheme 4
10. Jan Arogya
11. National council for older person
12. Annapurna policy
6 Senior citizens in India 4
7 Geriatric Assessment and treatment methods 4
TOTAL HOURS 40
258
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Total= 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Case 20
Q No 2 OSPE Stations (2) 20
Total= 40

Q No 1 Case 10
Q No 2 OSPE Stations (2) 10
Total= 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks each for internal examination (practical)
1. World Health Organization 2001. The International Classification of Functioning,

Disability and Health (ICF). Geneva:
WHO.http://www.who.int/classifications/icf/en/
2. Advanced Fitness Assessment and Exercise Prescription- Vivian. H.Heyward.
3. Physical Rehabilitation-Susan B O’Sullivan, Thomas. J.Schmitz
4. Geriatric Physical therapy- Andrew A.Guccione
259

Name of the Course Introduction to Evidence Based Physiotherapy
Course Code BPT-040

Cognitive
CO 1 formulate clinical research questions and refine them
CO 2 explain the source of evidence and learn how to find out relevant evidence
CO 3 establish authenticity of evidence
critically evaluate scientific studies on assessment tools and interventions/diagnostic

CO 4
/prognostic research studies
CO 5 communicate with other clinicians about the evidence for best physiotherapy practice
with consideration of patient’s opinion
CO 6 implement the practice for the right purpose and in an appropriate time
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
1 Introduction to Evidence Based Physiotherapy
Definition, background, importance, model of Evidence Based Physiotherapy, role of 2
evidence based practitioner
2 Methods of forming clinical research questions and searching evidence
2
Techniques of creating research/clinical questions, Strategies for searching evidence
3 Exploring different terminologies
Validity, reliability, Randomized Control Trial, Systemic Review, Meta-Analysis, Case
2
Study, Diagnostic research study, Prognostic Research study, Intervention research
study, etc.
4 Analyze evidence about diagnostic test
Diagnostic test and process in physiotherapy, appraise the quality of the studies, resultof
2
the studies, technique of pull out the summary of the studies and communicate with intra
and inter professional for final clinical conclusion
5 Analyze evidence about prognosis
Concept of prognosis, research design relevant to prognostic studies, process of
2
knowing the quality of study and method of discussion with other professional and
physiotherapist to draw the summary for final clinical decision
260
6 Analyze evidence about outcome measure

Elements of outcome measure, method of knowing validity and reliability, take out the
2
outline from the studies and method of interacting with other professional and
physiotherapist for clinical reasoning and decision making
7 Analyze evidence about intervention
Concept of various types of intervention in physiotherapy, Research design related to
intervention studies, know the strength and weakness of the study, method of discussion with
2
other professional and physiotherapist, produce condensed zest to draw the clinical
conclusion.
8 Analyze evidence about systemic reviews and other research design

Overview of systemic review, stages and techniques involve in it, procedure to critically
appraise it and extract the terminal results to make valid and relevant clinical decision,
2
Introduction to case study and qualitative research, evaluating the robustness and
fragility of the studies, methods of concise the studies to conclude clinical opinion
9 Patient review
Process of feedback taking, knowing patient’s expectations, making practical 2
judgement for clinical decision
10 Evidence Based Physiotherapy and its Implementation
Economy, access to the source, population, ethical guideline in physiotherapy, recent
clinical guideline for physiotherapy practice, applicability and authenticity of guidelines,
2
clinically appraise them and draw the final conclusion, Knowing the right tract,
appropriate time ,population, conditions, continue to provide quality of service
Total 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
be conducted at Constituent unit level

Section 1
Total= 40
261
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021
University examination pattern (Theory): 40marks

Section 1
Total= 40

Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks
1) Practical Evidence-Based Physiotherapy

By Robert Herbert, Gro Jamtvedt, Kåre Birger Hagen, Judy Mead, Sir Iain Chalmers
2) Evidence Based Physical Therapy

By Linda Fetters, Julie Tilson
3) Guide to Evidence-Based Physical Therapy

Practice By Dianne V .Jewell
262

Name of the Course Introduction to Evidence Based Physiotherapy
Course Code BPT-041

Cognitive
CO 1 formulate clinical research questions and refine them
CO 2 explain the source of evidence and learn how to find out relevant evidence
CO 3 establish authenticity of evidence
critically evaluate scientific studies on assessment tools and interventions/diagnostic

CO 4
/prognostic research studies
CO 5 communicate with other clinicians about the evidence for best physiotherapy practice
with consideration of patient’s opinion
CO 6 implement the practice for the right purpose and in an appropriate time
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
1 Introduction to Evidence Based Physiotherapy
Definition, background, importance, model of Evidence Based Physiotherapy, role of 2
evidence based practitioner
2 Methods of forming clinical research questions and searching evidence
Techniques of creating research/clinical questions, Strategies for searching evidence
2
3 Exploring different terminologies
Validity, reliability, Randomized Control Trial, Systemic Review, Meta-Analysis,
2
Case Study, Diagnostic research study, Prognostic Research study, Intervention
research study etc.
4 Analyze evidence about diagnostic test
Diagnostic test and process in physiotherapy, appraise the quality of the studies, result
2
of the studies, technique of pull out the summary of the studies and communicate with
intra and inter professional for final clinical conclusion
5 Analyze evidence about prognosis
Concept of prognosis, research design relevant to prognostic studies, process of 2
knowing the quality of study and method of discussion with other professional and
263
physiotherapist to draw the summary for final clinical decision

6 Analyze evidence about outcome measure
Elements of outcome measure, method of knowing validity and reliability, take out the
2
outline from the studies and method of interacting with other professional and
physiotherapist for clinical reasoning and decision making
7 Analyze evidence about intervention
Concept of various types of intervention in physiotherapy, Research design related to
intervention studies, know the strength and weakness of the study, method of discussion with
2
other professional and physiotherapist, produce condensed zest to draw the clinical
conclusion.
8 Analyze evidence about systemic reviews and other research design

Overview of systemic review, stages and techniques involve in it , procedure to critically
appraise it and extract the terminal results to make valid and relevant clinical decision,
3
Introduction to case study and qualitative research, evaluating the robustness and
fragility of the studies, methods of concise the studies to conclude clinical opinion
9 Patient review
Process of feedback taking, knowing patient’s expectations, making practical 4
judgement for clinical decision
10 Evidence Based Physiotherapy and its Implementation
Economy, access to the source, population, ethical guideline in physiotherapy, recent
clinical guideline for physiotherapy practice, applicability and authenticity of guidelines,
4
clinically appraise them and draw the final conclusion, Knowing the right tract,
appropriate time ,population, conditions, continue to provide quality of service
11 Evidence based PT related to musculoskeletal, cardiorespiratory and

05
neurological conditions
12 Evidence based PT related to cardio-respiratory conditions 05
13 Evidence based PT related to neurological conditions 05
Total 40
264
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Total= 20
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Q No 1 OSPE Station (2) 20
Total= 20
Internal assessment will be weighted out of 10 marks
1. Practical Evidence-Based Physiotherapy

By Robert Herbert, Gro Jamtvedt, Kåre Birger Hagen, Judy Mead, Sir Iain Chalmers
2. Evidence Based Physical Therapy

By Linda Fetters, JulieTilson
3. Guide to Evidence-Based Physical Therapy Practice

By Dianne V.Jewell
265

Name of the Course Clinical Biomechanics
Course Code SEC003
Course Description Skill Based Elective Course – Theory and Practical
Semester Semester VI

Cognitive
describe biomechanics of connective tissue, laws governing forces, study of
CO 1 kinematics and kinetics, clinical and instrumented testing methods used to identify
biomechanical impairments, muscle activity and postural control during motion
CO 2 describe impairments related to biomechanical alterations in conditions such as
shoulder dysfunction, knee osteoarthritis and low back pain
CO 3 describe gait deviations
Psychomotor
apply clinical and instrumented testing methods to measure kinematics and muscle
CO 3 action, identify altered biomechanics using clinical tests, 2D motion analysis, superficial
EMG
CO 4 analyze primary impairment and prescribe corrective strategies
Topics No. of
Unit
Hrs.
Basic Biomechanics:
1 Forces, Equilibrium, levers – laws – mechanical advantage, Material properties of 2
bones and soft tissues. Gravity, balance & equilibrium
Biophysics of ligament, Cartilage, tendon, muscle, neural tissues, response to
mechanical loading Material properties of bones, tendons and ligaments:
2 2
Viscoelasticity, elastic properties, Stress, Strain, force and torque, moment and
moment arm, muscle length tension relationships, factors affecting force production
Muscular System
• Muscle Fibre arrangement
• Functional Characteristics of Muscle Tissue
• Length-Tension Relationship in Muscle Tissue
3 2
• Types of Muscle Contraction affecting force production
• Angle of Pull
• Kinetic Chains
• Surface EMG
266
4 Kinematics related to dysfunction of shoulder, knee and lumbar spine 6
Kinetics
a. Anatomical structures that can produce internal forces and moments
b. Internal forces and moments around joints
c. Concentric versus eccentric muscle actions

5 4
d. Elasticity of muscles
e. Net joint moment and power during walking
f. Quantitative gait analysis
Activity limitations and participation restriction to common activities like gait, sit to
6 4
stand, squatting, staircase ascent and descent, cross leg sitting
Practical: Surface anatomy landmarks, ROM assessment, posture and gait analysis,
measurement techniques of Spatiotemporal parameters, 2 D motion analysis for gait and
40
functional movements, calculation of moment arm, clinical case presentations
emphasizing on screening of muscular, neural and biomechanical impairments
Total 60
Examination Scheme

Section 1
Total 40

Total= 20
267
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40
Internal examination pattern (Theory) :20 marks

Section 1
Total = 20

Total = 20
268
• Norkins C (2017); Basic Concepts of Biomechanics. Elsevier Health Sciences.

• Magee, D. J. (2013). Orthopedic physical assessment. Elsevier Health Sciences.

• Sahrmann, S. (2001). Diagnosis and treatment of movement impairment syndromes.
Elsevier Health Sciences.
• Carol A. Oatis, Kinesiology: The Mechanics and Pathomechanics of Human
Movement
269

Name of the Course Vestibular Rehabilitation
Course Code SEC004

Cognitive
CO 1 explain anatomy and physiology of the vestibular system
CO 2 explain clinical significance of diagnostic studies, physical assessment and clinical

history
CO 3 explain signs, symptoms and co-existing problems of the patient
CO 4 describe disorders that may affect the vestibular system but are not appropriate for
treatment by physical therapists
Psychomotor
CO 5 perform clinical evaluation and plan rationale for appropriate evaluation procedures
CO 8 Apply therapeutic measures to treat vestibular dysfunction
Affective
CO 5 communicate with the patient and care-giver regarding precautions to be followed
following therapy, preventive measures
270
Sr.
Topics No. of Hrs.
No.
1 Anatomy & Physiology of Vestibular System 2
2 Role of vestibular system in postural control 2
3 Assessment of Balance and vestibular ocular reflex 2
4 Balance and Gait Assessment 2
5 Oculomotor Examination 2
6 Assessment of Subjective Complaints 2
7 Vestibular Function Tests: Caloric & Vestibular Evoked Potential 2
8 Benign Paroxysmal Positional Vertigo, Unilateral Vestibular
Loss, Bilateral Vestibular Disorder– Assessment and management 4
of Posterior Canal, Anterior Canal, Horizontal Canal
9 Treatment theory, goals of management and progression 2
10 Practical: Assessment and management of disorder 40
Total 60
Examination Scheme
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Assessment will be
conducted at constituent unit level
Theory for internal assessment under CBCS - 20 Marks

Practical demo for internal assessment - 20 Marks

Section 1
A simulated case
1 case 20 20 20
Total= 40

Total= 20
271
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40

Section 1
Total = 20

Total = 20
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:
1. Herdman SJ, Clendaniel R. Vestibular rehabilitation. FA Davis; 2014 Jul 24.
272

Students will be learning about patient evaluation, assessment techniques and critical
thinking in patient care.

Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Case1 20
Total = 40

Q No 1 Case1 10
Total = 20
273
Semester-VII

Musculoskeletal
Core
BPT042 Physiotherapy I
Theory 60 - - 3
Theory
Musculoskeletal
Core
Practical - 40 - 1
Practical
Cardiovascular &
Respiratory Core
BPT044 -
Physiotherapy I Theory 60 - 3
Theory
Cardiovascular &
Respiratory Core
BPT045
Physiotherapy I Practical - 40 - 1
Practical
Neuro
Core
Theory 60 - - 3
Theory
Neuro
Core
Practical - 40 - 1
Practical
Hand
SEC005/ Rehabilitation/ Skill based
SEC006 Foot elective 20 40 - 2
Rehabilitation
Aquatic Therapy/
Skill based
SEC007/ SEC008 Sports
elective 20 40 - 2
Physiotherapy
BPTCLT007 - - 300 5
patient care Training
274

Name of the Course Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy I Theory
Course Code BPT 042
Credit per Semester 3 Credits

Cognitive
CO 1 Identify, evaluate, analyze & discuss primary and secondary musculo-skeletal dysfunction
related to upper quadrant and cervical-thoracic spine, based on biomechanical,
kinesiological & patho-physiological principles using ICF model.
CO 2 Correlate impairments with radiological, electrophysiological, biochemical/

hematological investigations as applicable & arrive at the appropriate Physiotherapy
diagnosis with skillful evaluation of structure and function with clinical reasoning for
upper quadrant and cervical spine dysfunction.
CO 3 Understand the pharmaco-therapeutics, its interaction with physiotherapeutic measures
and modify physiotherapeutic intervention appropriately
CO 4 Apply knowledge of psychosocial factors (personal and environmental factors in the
context of disability associated with the musculoskeletal system or multiple body systems)
for behavioral and lifestyle modification and use appropriate training and
coping strategies.
Psychomotor
CO 5 Evaluation of mental and cognitive function including depression, anxiety, attitudes and
beliefs. Apply theoretical basis of physiological effects, indications, contraindications; and
best available evidence on the effectiveness, efficacy and safe application guidelines for a full
range of physiotherapeutic strategies and interventions, including appropriatemodes of
soft tissue & joint mobilization, electrotherapy, therapeutic exercise, appropriate
ergonomic advise, self-management techniques and home exercise that can be employed
to manage problems of the individuals upper quadrant and cervical spine structures,
functions, activities & participation, capacity and performance levels associated with the
musculoskeletal system, for relief of pain &
prevention,restorationandrehabilitationmeasuresformaximumpossiblefunctional
independence at home, workplace and in community.
CO6 Prescribe and train for appropriate upper quadrant and cervical-thoracic spine orthoses,
prostheses and assistive devices based on musculoskeletal dysfunction
275
Affective
CO7 Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe, respectful and effective performance of
physical handling techniques taking into account the patients clinical condition, the
need for privacy, the physiotherapist, the resources available and the environment.
CO 8 Demonstrate communication and behavioral skills underpinned by humanitarian
approach while interacting with patients, relatives, health care team members, co-
professionals and society at large.
CO 9 List patients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options, their
views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved in
decision-making regarding their care and treatment. ( attitudes and beliefs)
CO 10 Examine Bioethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
demonstrating community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-cultural
competency
CO 11 Respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to reach
decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
CO 12 Communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with patients, caregivers, and
colleagues from the medical and other professions, by listening, sharing and responding
Unit Topics Hours

1 Manifestations of trauma and their complications 15
a. Bones – fractures & fracture-dislocations of upper extremities & cervical-
thoracic spine and their complications &management.
b. Soft tissues injuries of upper extremities & cervical-thoracic spine and their
complications & management, contused lacerated wounds (CLWs) Burns
complications and management, Crush injuries and its conservative and
post-surgical management.
c. Cumulative trauma disorders- Tennis elbow, carpal tunnel syndrome,

tendinopathies.
2 Degenerative Arthritis with associated conditions 10

Physiotherapy management of common shoulder , degenerative conditions of
cervical Spine - Spondylosis, Spondylolysis, Spondylolisthesis, and Spinal Canal
Stenosis, Cord compression syndrome
3 Inflammatory conditions 5
276
a. Arthritis (including seronegative) – Rheumatoid arthritis, Gout, Septic

arthritis
b. Cellulitis and its complications.
c. Post incisional inflammation and infection.

4 Infectious Diseases of bones & joints of upper extremity and cervical- 2
thoracic spine- Osteomyelitis, Tuberculosis
5 Metabolic & Hormonal Disorders – Osteoporosis, Osteomalacia 5
6 Congenital & Acquired Deformities of upper extremity and cervical - 5
thoracic spine- cervical rib, kyphosis, sprengel’s shoulder, cubitus
varus/valgus
7 Peripheral Nerve Injuries & Plexus Injuries of upper extremity and 5
Brachial plexus - Complications & Management
8 Soft tissue injuries during sports and as a result of over-use of upper 3
extremity and cervical-thoracic spine - Conservative and Operative
management
9 Vascular disorders affecting musculoskeletal system- Volkmann’s ischemic 5
contracture, Complex Regional Pain Syndrome, Compartment syndrome,
Vertigo. Thoracic outlet syndrome, Vertebrobasilar artery syndrome
10 Traumatic Amputation of upper extremity 5
Types, Complications and management inclusive of prosthetic prescription &
training
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
277
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
1. Therapeutic Exercise –O’Sullivan

2. Orthopaedic Physical Therapy -Donatelli
3. Cash’s Textbook of Orthopedics & Rheumatology for Physiotherapists
4. Tidy’s Physical Therapy
5. Manual Mobilization of Extremity Joints -Kaltenborn
6. Therapeutic Exercise: Foundations and Techniques - Kolby & Carolyn Kisner
7. Physical Rehabilitation – Susan O'sullivan
1. Manual Therapy: Nags, Snags, MWMs, etc - 6th Edition Brian Mulligan
2. Maitland's Peripheral Manipulation Elly Hengeveld
3. Neural tissue mobilization –Butler
4. Brukner& Khan's Clinical Sports Medicine - Peter Brukner, Karim Khan (Mcgraw
Medical)
5. Therapeutic Exercise: Moving Toward Function - Carrie M. Hall, Lori Thein Brody
6. Manual Mobilization of Extremity Joints-Kaltenborn
7. Neural Tissue Mobilization -Butler
8. Taping Techniques –Rose MacDonald
9. Clinical Orthopaedic rehabilitation- Broadsman
278

Name of the Course Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy I Practical
Course Code BPT 043
Credit per Semester 1 Credit

Cognitive
CO 1 Identify, evaluate, analyze & discuss primary and secondary musculo-skeletal dysfunction
related to upper quadrant and cervical-thoracic spine, based on biomechanical,
kinesiological & patho-physiological principles using ICF model.
CO 2 Correlate impairments with radiological, electrophysiological, biochemical/

haematological investigations as applicable & arrive at the appropriate Physiotherapy
diagnosis with skillful evaluation of structure and function with clinical reasoning for
upper quadrant and cervical spine dysfunction.
CO 3 Understand the pharmaco-therapeutics, its interaction with physiotherapeutic measures
and modify physiotherapeutic intervention appropriately
context of disability associated with the musculoskeletal system or multiple body systems)
for behavioral and lifestyle modification and use appropriate training and
coping strategies.
Psychomotor
range of physiotherapeutic strategies and interventions, including appropriatemodes of
soft tissue & joint mobilization, electrotherapy, therapeutic exercise, appropriate
to manage problems of the individuals upper quadrant and cervical spine structures,
functions, activities & participation, capacity and performance levels associated with the
musculoskeletal system, for relief of pain &
prevention,restorationandrehabilitationmeasuresformaximumpossiblefunctional
CO6 Prescribe and train for appropriate upper quadrant and cervical-thoracic spine orthoses,
prostheses and assistive devices based on musculoskeletal dysfunction
279
Affective
CO7 Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe, respectful and effective performance of
physical handling techniques taking into account the patients clinical condition, theneed
for privacy, the physiotherapist, the resources available and the environment.
approach while interacting with patients, relatives, health care team members, co-
professionals and society at large.
CO 9 List patients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options, their
decision-making regarding their care and treatment. ( attitudes and beliefs)
CO 10 Examine Bioethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
competency
treatment.
Unit Topics Hours

1 Manifestations of trauma and their complications 08
d. Bones – fractures & fracture-dislocations of upper extremities & cervical-
thoracic spine and their complications & management.
e. Soft tissues injuries of upper extremities & cervical-thoracic spine and their
complications & management, contused lacerated wounds (CLWs) Burns
complications and management, Crush injuries and its conservative and
post-surgical management.
f. Cumulative trauma disorders- Tennis elbow, carpal tunnel syndrome,

tendinopathy etc. Management of fractures and traumatic injuries

Physiotherapy management of common shoulder , degenerative conditions of
cervical Spine - Spondylosis, Spondylolysis, Spondylolisthesis, and Spinal Canal
Stenosis, Cord compression syndrome
280
e. Arthritis (including seronegative) – Rheumatoid arthritis, Gout, Septic

arthritis
f. Cellulitis and its complications.
g. Post incisional inflammation and infection.

4 Infectious Diseases of bones & joints of upper extremity and cervical- 02
thoracic spine- Osteomyelitis, Tuberculosis
5 Metabolic & Hormonal Disorders – Osteoporosis, Osteomalacia 03
6 Congenital & Acquired Deformities of upper extremity and cervical - 03
thoracic spine- cervical rib, kyphosis, sprengel’s shoulder,cubitus
varus/valgus
7 Peripheral Nerve Injuries & Plexus Injuries of upper extremity and 03
Brachial plexus - Complications & Management
8 Soft tissue injuries during sports and as a result of over-use of upper 03
extremity and cervical-thoracic spine - Conservative and Operative
management
9 Vascular disorders affecting musculoskeletal system- Volkmann’s ischemic 4
contracture, Complex Regional Pain Syndrome, Compartment syndrome,
Vertigo. Thoracic outlet syndrome, Vertebrobasilar artery syndrome
10 Traumatic Amputation of upper extremity 4
Types, Complications and management inclusive of prosthetic prescription &
training
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Practical/Clinical University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80 Marks

Q No 1 Pain/ core muscle strength assessment (OSCE) 20
Q No 2 Strength/ Range of motion assessment (OSCE) 20
QNo 3 Case presentation/ OSCE of Upper extremity / Cervical- 40
Thoracic spine conditions/
Total = 80
281
Internal examination pattern (practical): 40marks

QNo1 Station 1 (OSCE) 20
QNo 2 Station 2 (OSCE) 20
Total = 40

1. Therapeutic Exercise –O’Sullivan
2. Orthopaedic Physical Therapy -Donatelli
3. Cash’s Textbook of Orthopedics & Rheumatology for Physiotherapists
4. Tidy’s PhysicalTherapy
5. Manual Mobilization of Extremity Joints -Kaltenborn
6. Therapeutic Exercise: Foundations and Techniques - Kolby & Carolyn Kisner
7. Physical Rehabilitation – Susan O'sullivan
3. Neural tissue mobilization –Butler
4. Brukner& Khan's Clinical Sports Medicine - Peter Brukner, Karim Khan (Mcgraw
Medical)
9. Clinical Orthopaedic rehabilitation-Broadsman
282

Name of the Course Cardiovascular & Respiratory Physiotherapy I Theory
Course Code BPT044

Cognitive
Identify and analyze cardiovascular dysfunction in terms of biomechanical, and bio-
CO 1 physical basis and correlate the same with the health condition, routine
electrophysiological, radiological, and biochemical investigations and arrive at
appropriate Physical therapy diagnosis using WHO-ICF tool
Utilize the knowledge about contextual factors to enhance capacity and performance
CO 2
of activities and participation in society
Psychomotor
CO 3 Apply methods to evaluate functional impairments, perform pre-post-operative testing
Plan, prescribe appropriate, and implement safe physiotherapy interventions with

clinical reasoning for and prevention of impairments, activity limitations, participation
CO 4 restrictions and environmental barriers related to cardiovascular
dysfunction in acute care settings, at home, work place, in society & in leisure activities.
CO 5 Utilize the skill to deliver cardiac rehabilitation
Affective
Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe, respectful and effective performance of
CO 6 physical handling techniques taking into account the patients clinical condition, the
Demonstrate behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating with
CO 7
patients, relatives, society at large and co-professionals
CO 8 views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved
in decision-making regarding their care and treatment.
CO 9 demonstrating community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-
cultural competency
283
Respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to
CO 10 reach decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
CO 11 colleagues from the medical and other professions, by listening, sharing and
responding
Sr. No Topics Hours

Review of Applied Anatomy & Physiology
1 a. Cardiac anatomy & Physiology 5
Investigation and Exercise Testing

a. Investigation & Clinical Implication - X-ray, ECG, ABG, ABI, 2D Echo,
PFT, Doppler, Angiography, Blood investigations, Special tests,
2 claudication time, pulses, auscultation, postural hypotension 10
b. Stress testing, 6 Minute Walk test & Harward Step test Skill & Interpretation,
Shuttle Walk Test & Modified Bruce Protocol
Exercise Physiology
a. Nutrition(Bioenergetics)
b. Total energy expenditure (MET)sources
c. Acute and chronic adaptation to exercise

3 10
d. Complication of bed rest/ Immobilization &prevention
e. Aerobic & Anaerobic Training,
f. Principles of Exercise Prescription
Application Of ICF Model

Identify structural, functional impairment, activity and participation limitations,
contextual factors influencing treatment, difference between performance and
4 capacity, plan effective short term and long term goals to enhance functioning of 5
cardiovascular system, outline patient specific goals and expected outcome within
time frame with clinical reasoning, Documentation of observations
Physiotherapy Management in Medical & Surgical Cardiovascular Diseases

5 15
a. Hypertension
284
b. IHD, Myocardial Infarction, Rhythm Disorders, Pacemaker Implantation,

Angioplasty, CABG, Minimally Invasive Surgeries
c. Valvular Heart Disease and Corrective surgeries
d. Congenital and Acquired Cardiovascular Diseases, Corrective Surgeries
e. Thrombosis, Phlebitis and Phlebothrombosis
f. Varicose Veins and ulcers
g. Other Arterial disorders
CARDIAC REHABILITATION ( A.H.A./A.C.S.M. guidelines)

Definition, Indications, Contraindications Phases(I,II,III,& IV), Outcome
6 10
Measures, Quality of Life measures
INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTIONAL SCALES

a Generic and disease specific
7 5
b. Patient’s perception of his disability and functioning and correlating the
same with therapist evaluation
Total Hours
60
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
285
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
1. Cash’s Textbook for Physiotherapists in Chest, Heart & Vascular diseases

2. Cash’s text book in General Medicine & Surgical conditions for Physiotherapists
3. Chest Physical therapy & pulmonary rehabilitation -- Donna Frown Filter
4. Brompton’s hospital guide
5. Physiotherapy in respiratory and cardiac problem - Pryor and Prasad
6. Physiotherapy in Cardio – Vascular rehabilitation –Webber
7. Chest physiotherapy in intensive care Colin Mackenzie
8. Mechanical ventilation – Ashfaq Hasan
9. Management of Mechanical ventilation –Pierce

1. Exercise & the Heart –Wenger
2. ECG – P.J.Mehta
3. Cardiopulmonary Physical Therapy -- IrwinScott
4. Essential of cardio pulmonary physical therapy –Hillgass And Sodosky
5. Exercise physiology, energy, nutrition and human performance –M’cardle
6. Exercise testing and prescription - Skinner 8. Exercise in health and disease-Pollock
286

Name of the Course Cardiovascular & Respiratory Physiotherapy I Practical
Course Code BPT045

Cognitive
Identify and analyze cardiovascular dysfunction in terms of biomechanical, and bio-
CO 1 physical basis and correlate the same with the health condition, routine
electrophysiological, radiological, and biochemical investigations and arrive at
appropriate Physical therapy diagnosis using WHO-ICF tool
CO 2 Utilize the knowledge about contextual factors to enhance capacity and performance
Psychomotor
CO 3 Apply methods to evaluate functional impairments, perform pre-post-operative testing
Plan, prescribe appropriate, and implement safe physiotherapy interventions with

clinical reasoning for and prevention of impairments, activity limitations, participation
CO 4 restrictions and environmental barriers related to cardiovascular
dysfunction in acute care settings, at home, work place, in society & in leisure activities.
CO 5 Utilize the skill to deliver cardiac rehabilitation
Affective
Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe, respectful and effective performance of
CO 6 physical handling techniques taking into account the patients clinical condition, the
Demonstrate behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating with
CO 7
CO 8 views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved
cultural competency
287
Respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to
CO 10 reach decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
responding
Sr. No Topics Hours

Application of Management techniques: Positioning, Breathing Control,
Respiratory Muscle Strengthening, Relaxation techniques, Airway Clearance
1. 05
Techniques, Mechanical Assistive Devices, Nebulization and Humidification,
Respiratory PNF, maximal and submaximal exercise testing.
Investigation and Exercise Testing
c. Investigation & Clinical Implication - X-ray, ECG, ABG, ABI, 2D Echo,
PFT, Doppler, Angiography, Blood investigations, Special tests,
2 claudication time, pulses, auscultation, postural hypotension 05
d. Stress testing, 6 Minute Walk test & Harward Step test Skill & Interpretation,
Shuttle Walk Test & Modified Bruce Protocol
Application Of ICF Model
Identify structural, functional impairment, activity and participation limitations,
contextual factors influencing treatment, difference between performance and
4 capacity, plan effective short term and long term goals to enhance functioning of 05
cardiovascular system, outline patient specific goals and expected outcome within
time frame with clinical reasoning, Documentation of observations
Physiotherapy Management in Medical & Surgical Cardiovascular Diseases
h. Hypertension
i. IHD, Myocardial Infarction, Rhythm Disorders, Pacemaker Implantation,

Angioplasty, CABG, Minimally Invasive Surgeries
j. Valvular Heart Disease and Corrective surgeries

5 10
k. Congenital and Acquired Cardiovascular Diseases, Corrective Surgeries
l. Thrombosis, Phlebitis and Phlebothrombosis
m. Varicose Veins and ulcers
n. Other Arterial disorders
Exercises for vascular disorders, Berger’s exercises, wound care

6 CARDIAC REHABILITATION ( A.H.A./A.C.S.M./ AACVPR guidelines) 10
288
Definition, Indications, Contraindications Phases(I,II,III,& IV), Outcome

Measures, Quality of Life measures, Coughing techniques, Cardiac
Rehabilitation, Strength training, Exercises to improve flexibility and endurance,
Pain Relief, Home program
INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTIONAL SCALES

a Generic and disease specific
7 5
b. Patient’s perception of his disability and functioning and correlating the
same with therapist evaluation.
Total Hours
40
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Q No 1 Skill demonstration- Respiratory PNF/ Breathing 20
exercises/Postural drainage/ AD/ACBT/ Positioning/
Relaxation technique (OSCE), maximal and
submaximal exercise testing
Q No 2 Interpretation of ABG/ECG/X Ray/PFT (OSPE) 20
Q No 3 Case presentation/OSCE of cardiovascular conditions 40
Total = 80
Internal examination pattern (Practical/Clinical): 40marks

Q No 1 Skill demonstration- Respiratory PNF / Breathing 20
Relaxation technique (OSPE), maximal and submaximal
exercise testing.
Total = 40
1. Cash’s Textbook for Physiotherapists in Chest, Heart & Vascular diseases
289
3. Chest Physical therapy & pulmonary rehabilitation -- Donna Frown Filter
4. Brompton’s hospital guide
5. Physiotherapy in respiratory and cardiac problem - Pryor and Prasad
6. Physiotherapy in Cardio – Vascular rehabilitation –Webber
7. Chest physiotherapy in intensive care Colin Mackenzie
8. Mechanical ventilation – Ashfaq Hasan
9. Management of Mechanical ventilation –Pierce

1. Exercise & the Heart –Wenger
2. ECG – P.J.Mehta
3. Cardiopulmonary Physical Therapy -- Irwin Scott
4. Essential of cardio pulmonary physical therapy –Hillgass And Sodosky
5. Exercise physiology, energy, nutrition and human performance –Mc’ardle
6. Exercise testing and prescription - Skinner 8. Exercise in health and disease-Pollock
290

Name of the Course Neuro Physiotherapy I Theory
Course Code BPT046
Course Learning Outcomes: The student will

Cognitive
CO 1 Be able to identify and analyze movement dysfunction due to neuromuscular skeletal

disorders in terms of biomechanical and biophysical basis, correlate the same with the
health condition, routine electrophysiological, radiological and biochemical
investigations, and arrive at appropriate physical therapy diagnosis using WHO-ICF
with clinical reasoning.
CO 2 Be able to examine, evaluate, diagnose, plan, execute and document physiotherapy
treatment independently or along with the multidisciplinary team in client with
neurological dysfunction.
CO 3 Be able to plan realistic goals based on the knowledge of prognosis of the disease of the
nervous system and prescribe appropriate, safe evidence based physiotherapy
interventions with clinical reasoning.
CO 4 Understand infection control principles, best practices and techniques applicable to a
range of setting where clients with neurological conditions would receive
physiotherapy services.
CO 5 Know determinacy of health (environmental, nutritional, self-management/ behavioral
factors) and chronic disease management principles related to neurological health.
Psychomotor
CO 5 Be able to develop psychomotor skills to implement timely and appropriate

physiotherapy assessment tools/techniques to ensure a holistic approach to patient
evaluation in order to prioritize patient’s problems
CO6 Be able to select timely physiotherapeutic interventions to reduce morbidity and
physiotherapy management strategies, suitable for the patients’ problems and indicator
conditions based on the best available evidence.
CO7 Implement appropriate neuro-physiotherapeutic approaches, electrotherapeutic
modalities, joint and soft tissue mobilizations and ergonomic advice for neuromuscular
skeletal systems, contextual factors to enhance performance of activities and
participation in society.
291
Affective
CO8 Be able to develop behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating
with patients, relatives, society and co-professionals, to promote individual and
community health.
Unit Topics Hours
1 Theoretical basis of motor control and learning to understand various 10

neurophysiotherapeutic approaches.
2 Plasticity of the intact brain 10
I Motor learning
ii. Training
iii. Plasticity
a. Plasticity following brain lesion nature of spontaneous recovery effect
of environment Behaviour and recovery adaptation of motor performance
muscle adaptation
b. Strength training and physical conditioning in neuro rehabilitation to
optimize functional performance
c. Skill acquisition in restoration of functional performance
information, instruction, demonstration feedback practice
3 Quality of Life scales & Independence Measures 10
4 PHYSIOTHERAPY MANAGEMENT – ADULT 30

A. Cerebrovascular Accidents - Stroke syndromes management
B. Traumatic Brain Injury – Coma Stimulation and pathological brain injury

(S.O.L.)management
C. Spinal cord disorders – traumatic and non – traumatic, management

including bladder training
D. Peripheral neuropathies – traumatic & non traumatic - upper limb &

lower limb - brachial plexus - nerve root lesions - metabolic &endocrine
E. Vestibular disorders – central and peripheral
F. VIIth cranial nerve disorders
G. Demyelinating diseases - Multiple Sclerosis & G.B.syndrome
H. Cerebellar diseases and Ataxia
292
I. Extrapyramidal diseases, with emphasis on Parkinson’s disease
J. Anterior Horn Cell diseases – heredity and acquired e.g. M.N.D.,

P.M.A., S.M.A., Poliomyelitis
K. Myopathies, Muscular Dystrophies and Neuromuscular Junction

Disorders- Myasthenia Gravis
L. Disorders of A.N.S. – Horner’s syndrome, Hypo/Hypertension,

Autonomic Dysreflexia
M. Psychosomatic pain &paralysis
N. Infections of Nervous system – Meningitis, Encephalitis and Bulbar

Polio
O. Disorders of Perception and management
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
293
1. Patricia A D. Cash’s Text book for Physio Therapist in Neurological disorders. Jaypee
bros; 4th Edition1991
2. Adler B. PNF in practice. Springer. 4th Edition.1993
3. Hollis M. Practical Physical Therapy 4th Edition.1985
4. O’Sullivan S. Physical Rehabilitation 7th Edition.1981
5. Patricia M D. Right in the middle. Springer-Verlag.1990
6. Johnstone M. Therapy for stroke. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone;1991.
7. Bobath B. Adult hemiplegia. Oxford (England): Heinemann Medical Books;1990.
8. Bromley I. Tetraplegia and Paraplegia: A guide for physiotherapists 6th Edition;2006.
1. Umphred D. Neurological rehabilitation. Saint Louis: Mosby/Elsevier;2013.

2. Donaghy M. Brain's diseases of the nervous system. Oxford: Oxford University Press;
2009.
294

Name of the Course Neuro Physiotherapy I Practical
Course Code BPT047

Cognitive
CO 1 Be able to identify and analyze movement dysfunction due to neuromuscular skeletal

disorders in terms of biomechanical and biophysical basis, correlate the same with the
health condition, routine electrophysiological, radiological and biochemical
investigations, and arrive at appropriate physical therapy diagnosis using WHO-ICF
with clinical reasoning.
CO 2 Be able to examine, evaluate, diagnose, plan, execute and document physiotherapy
treatment independently or along with the multidisciplinary team in client with
neurological dysfunction.
CO 3 Be able to plan realistic goals based on the knowledge of prognosis of the disease of the
nervous system and prescribe appropriate, safe evidence based physiotherapy
interventions with clinical reasoning.
CO 4 Understand infection control principles, best practices and techniques applicable to a
range of setting where clients with neurological conditions would receive
physiotherapy services.
CO 5 Know determinacy of health (environmental, nutritional, self-management/ behavioral
factors) and chronic disease management principles related to neurological health.
Psychomotor

evaluation in order to prioritize patient’s problems
CO6 Be able to select timely physiotherapeutic interventions to reduce morbidity and
physiotherapy management strategies, suitable for the patients’ problems and indicator
conditions based on the best available evidence.
modalities, joint and soft tissue mobilizations and ergonomic advice for neuromuscular
skeletal systems, contextual factors to enhance performance of activities and
participation in society.
295
Affective
CO8 Be able to develop behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating
with patients, relatives, society and co-professionals, to promote individual and
community health.
Unit Topics Hours
1 Treatment programme includes 30

A. Application of appropriate electro-therapeutic modes for relief of pain and
functional re-education with clinical reasoning.
B. Application of skills as Neurotherapeutic approaches (Brunnstrom,

Roods, Bobath, N.D.T., M.R.P., mental imagery, Constraint induced
movement therapy, learning transfers), co-ordination and balancing
exercise by using techniques based on neurophysiological principles.
C. Tools and adaptive equipment’s used for neuro-rehabilitation like

Vestibular balls Tilt boards, Bolsters, Wedges, Graded Benches,
Therapeutic matsetc.
D. Application of transfer and functional re-education exercise, postural

exercise and gait training.
E. Bladder and bowel training
F. Developing a philosophy for caring
G. Prescription for appropriate orthotic devices and fabrication of temporary

splints
H. Lifting techniques, wheel chair modifications, adaptive devices
I. Ergonomic advice for prevention/rehabilitation for the patients as well as for

parents/care givers education about handling of patients
2 Quality of Life scales & Independence Measures 10

Total 40
296
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Practical/Clinical pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80

Marks

Q No 1 Station 1 (OSCE) 20
Q No 2 Station 2 (OSCE) 20
QNo 3 Long case/OSCE on Adult neuro conditions 40
Total = 80
Internal examination Practical/Clinical pattern (theory): 40marks

QNo1 Station 1 (OSCE) 20
QNo 2 Station 2 (OSCE) 20
Total = 40
1. Patricia A D. Cash’s Text book for Physio Therapist in Neurological disorders. Jaypee bros; 4 th Edition1991
7. Bobath B. Adult hemiplegia. Oxford (England): Heinemann Medical Books;1990.
8. Bromley I. Tetraplegia and Paraplegia: A guide for physiotherapists 6th Edition;2006.

2. Donaghy M. Brain's diseases of the nervous system. Oxford: Oxford University Press; 2009.
297

Name of the Course Hand Rehabilitation
Course Code SEC005
Course Description Skill based Elective

Cognitive
CO 1 Identify, evaluate, analyze and discuss primary and secondary dysfunction related to
Wrist and hand complex based on kinesiological and pathophysiological principles
Psychomotor
CO 2 Apply theoretical basis of physiological effects and best available evidence on
effectiveness, efficacy and safe application of management guidelines
CO 3 Prescribe and train for appropriate prosthesis and orthosis based on dysfunction of wrist
and hand complex
Affective
CO 4 Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe and effective performance of physical
handling techniques taking into account patient’s clinical condition, need for privacy,
resources available and environment
Unit Topics Hours
1 Anatomy of Wrist and Hand Complex 02

• Basic Structure
• Bony Landmarks
• Muscles
• Ligaments
• Nerve supply
• Blood supply
• Surface Anatomy
• Applied Anatomy
2 Clinical Biomechanics 05
298
• Biomechanics of Wrist and Hand Complex

• Kinetics
• Kinematics
• Pathomechanics
• Function and Architecture of Hand
Functional positions of wrist and hand
3 Examination 3
• Specific History taking
• Differential Diagnosis based on History
• Screening for Red and Yellow flags
• Assessment
• Neurological Screening
Special tests
4 Traumatic Injuries of Hand 5

• Flexor tendon injuries
• Extensor tendon injuries
• Crush Injury
• Fractures around the Wrist and Hand complex
5 Overuse Injuries 2
Carpal tunnel syndrome
de Quervain’s tenosynovitis
6 Special Considerations 3
• Complex Regional Pain Syndrome(CRPS)
• Rheumatoid hand
• Dupuytren’s Contracture
Practical : Case presentations, evaluation and management of above 40
conditions
Total 60
299
EXAMINATION SCHEME


(Examination pattern applicable from batch admitted in academic year 2019-2020)
No. of Question X
Short Answer Questions 8 out of 10 5 8x5 40
Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40
300

Section 1
Total = 20

Total = 20
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Rehabilitation of the Hand: Surgery and Therapy- James M.Hunter.

2. Rehabilitation of Hand and Upper extremity – Terri M.Skirven.
3. Examination of the Hand and Wrist- RaoulTubiana.
4. Hand and Upper extremity Rehabilitation- Rebecca J.Saunders.
5. Management of Common Musculoskeletal disorders- Randolph M.Kessler
6. Oatis- Kinesiology: The mechaniscs and pathomechanics of HumanMovement.
7. Clinical Anatomy by regions- Richard S.Snell
301

Name of the Course Foot Rehabilitation
Course Code SEC006

Cognitive
CO 1 Identify, evaluate, analyze and discuss primary and secondary dysfunction related to
ankle and foot complex based on kinesiological and pathophysiological principles
Psychomotor
CO 2 Apply theoretical basis of physiological effects and best available evidence on
CO 3 Prescribe and train for appropriate prosthesis and orthosis based on dysfunction of
ankle and foot complex
Affective
CO 4 Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe and effective performance of physical
Unit Topics Hours
1 Anatomy of Ankle and Foot Complex 03

• Basic Structure
• Bony Landmarks
• Muscles
• Ligaments
• Nerve supply
• Blood supply
• Surface Anatomy
• Applied Anatomy
2 Clinical Biomechanics 05
• Biomechanics of Ankle and Foot Complex
• Kinetics and Kinematics
• Pressure distribution studies
• Pathomechanics
302
• Function and Architecture of Foot Arches

3 Examination 3
• Assessment
• Special tests
4 Traumatic Injuries of Foot 3

• Tendoachilles rupture
• Crush Injury
• Fractures around the Ankle and Foot Complex
5 Overuse Injuries 3
• Tarsal Tunnel Syndrome
• Shin splints
• Plantar fasciitis
• Tendoachilles tendinitis
6 Special Considerations 3
• Congenital Taliopo Equino Varus(CTEV)
• Pes Planus, Pes Cavus, Hallux Valgus, Hallux Rigidus

• RAFoot
Practical : Case presentations, evaluation and management of above 40
conditions
Total 60
303
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40

Section 1
Total = 20
304

Total = 20
This course will be assessed as Semester University Examination. Assessment will be

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Management of Common Musculoskeletal disorders- Randolph M.Kessler

2. Carol Oatis- Kinesiology: The mechanics and pathomechanics of Human
Movement.
3. Clinical Anatomy by regions- Richard S.Snell
305

Name of the Course Aquatic Therapy
Course Code SEC007

Cognitive
CO 1 explain principles of aquatic therapy, equipment’s required, techniques used in aquatic
therapy, evaluate, analyze and discuss exercises and activities for orthopedic,
neurologic and rheumatic patient populations using fluid mechanical principles
Psychomotor
CO 2 apply theoretical basis of physiological effects and best available evidence on
effectiveness, efficacy and safe application of aquatic therapy for management
CO 3 design treatment programs and train for orthopedic, neurologic and rheumatic patient
populations using rules of motor learning and feedback in water
Affective
CO 4 acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe and effective performance of physical
Unit Topics Hours
1 Aquatic Properties and Therapeutic Interventions 02

• Physical Properties of Water
• Fluid Dynamic Properties of Water
2 Physiological Responses to Immersion and Aquatic Exercise 02
• Pulmonary System
• Cardiovascular System
• Renal System
• Musculoskeletal System
• Neuromuscular System
3 The Halliwick Concept 02
306
• Halliwick and ICF

• Learning Stages
• Function Level Applications
• Activity Level Applications
• Participation Level Applications
4 The Bad Ragaz Ring Method 02

• Physiotherapeutic and Mechanical Principles
• Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation
• Treatment Goalsetting
• Application of Techniques and Exercise Progression
• Patterns for Upper and Lower Extremities and Trunk
5 Ai Chi 02
• Breathing patterns
• Movement Principles
• Stance and Movement Patterns
• Applications in Patient Populations
6 Watsu 02
• Physiological and Psychological Effects
• Treatment Applications
• Treatment Progression
7 Assessment and Evaluation 02

• Initial Assessment and Evaluation
• Water Safety Screening
• Documenting Aquatic Programming and Progression
8 Core Training using Aquatic Therapy 02

• Activities to improve Mobility and Muscle Performance
• Core Emphasis Cardiorespiratory Training
• Specific Exercise Recommendations
307
9 Neuromuscular Training 02
• Balance and Posture Control
• Aquatic Wellness Programs
10 Aquatic Training in Special Considerations 02

• Cerebral Palsy
• Brain Injury and Stroke
• Rheumatoid Arthritis
• Pregnancy
• Cardiopulmonary Disease
• Obesity
• Geriatric Populations
• Injured Athletes
Practical’s: Visit to Aquatic Therapy Centers, E learning, video library, 40

simulated cases
Total Hours 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
308
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40

Section 1
Total = 20

Total = 20
309
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Aquatic exercise for rehabilitation and training: Lori Thein Brody and Paula
RichleyGeigle
2. Aquatic Rehabilitation: Richard G. Ruoti, David M. Morris and Andrew J.Cole
3. Aquatic exercise therapy: Andrea Bates and Norm Hanson
4. The use of aquatics in orthopedic and sports medicine rehabilitation and physical
conditioning: Kevin E. Wilk and David M.Joyner
5. Aquatic Fitness Professional Manual 7th Edition: Aquatic Exercises Association
310

Name of the Course Sports Physiotherapy
Course Code SEC008

Cognitive
CO 1 identify, evaluate, analyze and discuss primary and secondary dysfunction and their
management related to common sporting injuries
Psychomotor
CO 2 apply theoretical basis of physiological effects and best available evidence on
Affective
CO 4 acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe and effective performance of physical
Unit Topics Hours
1 Biomechanical techniques of Upper and lower extremity dependent sports 4

• Throwing,
• Badminton
• Swimming,
• Cycling,
• Football,
• Running.
2 Sports Metabolism 4
• Carbohydrate, Protein and Fat Metabolism
• Energy balance and transfer, calorimetry,
• Resting metabolism and metabolic activity,
• Oxidative processes. SteadyState.
• Transient phases and oxygen deficit
311
• Lactate production.
• Alactaci anaerobic energy sources
• Maximal aerobic power and limiting factors
• Chronic fatigue in sportspersons

3 Common Injuries in Sports 2
• Overuse injuries
• Traumatic injuries
• Soft tissue injuries
4 On field and off field Examination 4

• Principle of assessment
• Assessment
5 Sportswear- Protective gears in sports 2

6 Management of Common Sports Injuries 2
• Principles
• Goalsetting
• Rehabilitation protocols
• Return back to sports
7 Sports for specially abled 2

Practical’s: Visit to Sports Center, 2D motion analysis of sport related 40
videos, assessment and management techniques,
Total 60
312
EXAMINATION SCHEME

No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40


Total = 20
313

Total = 20
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Brukner P. Brukner & Khan's clinical sports medicine. North Ryde: McGraw-Hill;2012.
2. Bartlett R. Introduction to sports biomechanics: Analysing human movement patterns. Routledge;
2007 Oct25.
3. Text book of Work Physiology Physiological basis of exercise William D. McArdle, Frank I.
Katch, Victor L. KatchAstrand, P.-O. and Rodahl,K.
4. Grayson E. Ethics, injuries and the law in sports medicine.
314

Semester Semester VII
Students will be learning about physiotherapeutic management in various conditions

and application of hands on skills on patients

Total = 40
*Students will be evaluated as per their level of knowledge level
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Case1 20
Total = 40

Q No 1 Case1 10
Total = 20
315
Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Semester-VIII

Musculoskeletal Core
BPT048 Physiotherapy II Theory Theory 60 - - 3
Musculoskeletal Core
BPT049
Physiotherapy II Practical Practical - 40 - 1
Cardiovascular &
Respiratory Physiotherapy Core
BPT050 Theory
II 60 - - 3
Theory
Cardiovascular &
Respiratory Physiotherapy Core
BPT051 II Practical - 40 - 1
Practical
Neuro
Core
BPT052 Physiotherapy II
Theory 60 - - 3
Theory
Neuro
Core
BPT053 Physiotherapy II
Practical - 40 - 1
Practical
BPT054 Research Project Synopsis Research

- 40 - 1
Skill based
SEC009/SEC01 Neurodevelopmental elective course
0 techniques/PT in ICU theory and
20 40 - 2
practical
Skill based
Splinting and bracing/
elective course
SEC011/ SEC012 Integumentary
theory and
Physiotherapy 20 40 - 2
practical
Basic skills in patient Clinical
BPTCLT008 care Training - - 260 4
316

Name of the Course Musculoskeletal PT II
Course Code BPT-048

Cognitive
CO 1 Identify, evaluate, analyze & discuss primary and secondary musculoskeletal dysfunction
related to lower extremity, pelvis & lumbo-sacral, based on biomechanical,
kinesiological & pathophysiological principles using ICF model
CO 2 Correlate the same with radiological, electrophysiological, biochemical/ hematological
investigations as applicable & arrive at the appropriate Physiotherapy diagnosis with skillful
evaluation of structure and function with clinical reasoning for lower quadrant &
lower spine dysfunction.
CO 3 Explain the pharmaco-therapeutics, its interaction with physiotherapeutic measures and
modify physiotherapeutic intervention appropriately.
CO 4 Apply knowledge of psychosocial factors (personal and environmental factors in the context
of disability associated with the musculoskeletal system or multiple body systems) for behavioral
and lifestyle modification and use appropriate training and coping
strategies.
Psychomotor
range of physiotherapeutic strategies and interventions, including appropriate modes of soft
tissue & joint mobilization, electrotherapy, therapeutic exercise, and appropriate ergonomic
advise, self-management techniques and home exercise that can be employed to manage
problems of the individual’s lower quadrant & lumbar spine structures, functions, activities
and participation, capacity and performance levels associated with the musculo-skeletal
system, for relief of pain & prevention, restoration and rehabilitation measures for
maximum possible functional independence at home,
workplace and in community.
CO 6 Prescribe and train for appropriate lower extremity& lumbar spine orthoses, prostheses
and walking aids based on musculoskeletal dysfunction.
317
Affective
CO 7 Acquire ethical skills by demonstrating safe, respectful and effective performance of

physical handling techniques taking into account the patient’s clinical condition, the
approach while interacting with patients, ,relatives, health care team members, co-
professionals and society at large
CO 9 list patients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options, their
CO 10 Examine bioethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
competency
treatment.
Unit Topics Hours

1 Manifestations of trauma and their complications: 10
a. Bones – fractures & fracture-dislocations of lower extremity, pelvis&
lumbo-sacral spine and their complications & management
b. Soft tissues injuries of lower extremities & lumbo-sacral spine and their
complications & Management, contused lacerated wounds (CLWs) Burns
complications and management.
c. Overuse-syndromes: Piriformis syndrome, Ischioglueteal bursitis, IT band
friction syndrome, trochanteric bursitis, Jumpers knee, housemaid knee etc
a. Osteoarthritis of Hip joint, knee joint and ankle joint
b. Lumbar spine degenerative conditions like Spondylosis, degenerative disc
disease Spondylysis, Spondylolisthesis, and Lumbar Canal Stenosis
a. Arthritis (including seronegative arthritis) Rheumatoid arthritis, Gout, Septic
arthritis
b. Spondylo-arthropathies e.g. Ankylosing Spondylitis.
c. Cellulitis and its complications.
d. Post incisional inflammation and infection.
e. Avascular necrosis
4. Infectious Diseases of bones & joints of lower extremities, pelvis and 5
318
lumbo-sacral spine
a. TB Hip,TB knee Pott’sspine
b. Osteomyelitis
5. Metabolic & Hormonal Disorders 5
a. Osteoporosis
6. Congenital & Acquired Deformities of lower extremities & lumbar spine 10

a. Congenital talipo-equinovarus
b. Scoliosis
c. Congenital hip dislocation
d. Genu valgus/varus
e. Coxa vara /valga

7. Peripheral Nerve Injuries of lower extremity & Lumbo-sacral plexus 5
Injuries-complications & management
8. Soft tissue injuries of lower extremity and lumbar spine during sports and 5
as a result of Over-use: conservative and operative management
9. Musculoskeletal complications in Cerebral Palsy, Poliomyelitis and 5
reconstructive surgeries.
10. Traumatic Amputation of lower extremity 5
a.Types
b.Complications and management inclusive of prosthetic prescription
&training
Total Hours 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
319
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40

1. Therapeutic Exercise -O’Sullivan, 5th edition
2. Orthopaedic Physical Therapy –Donatelli, 3rdedition
3. Cash’s Textbook of Orthopedics & Rheumatology for Physiotherapists, 4th edition
4. Tidy’s Physical Therapy,15thedition
5. Manual Mobilization of Extremity Joints –Kaltenborn, 8thedition
6. Therapeutic Exercise: Foundations and Techniques - Kolby & CarolynKisner,7th edition
7. Physical Rehabilitation - SusanO'sullivan, 5thedition
3. Neural tissue mobilization – Butler
4. Brukner & Khan's Clinical Sports Medicine - Peter
Brukner, Karim Khan(Mcgraw Medical)
9. Clinical Orthopaedic rehabilitation-Broadsman
320

Name of the Course Musculoskeletal PT II
Course Code BPT-049

Cognitive
CO 1 Identify, evaluate, analyze & discuss primary and secondary musculoskeletal
dysfunction related to lower extremity, pelvis& lumbo-sacral, based on biomechanical,
kinesiological & pathophysiological principles using ICF model
CO 2 Correlate the same with radiological, electrophysiological, biochemical/ hematological
investigations as applicable & arrive at the appropriate Physiotherapy diagnosis with
skillful evaluation of structure and function with clinical reasoning for lower quadrant &
lower spine dysfunction.
CO 3 Explain the pharmaco-therapeutics, its interaction with physiotherapeutic measures and
modify physiotherapeutic intervention appropriately.
context of disability associated with the musculo-skeletal system or multiple body
systems) for behavioral and lifestyle modification and use appropriate training and
coping strategies.
Psychomotor
range of physiotherapeutic strategies and interventions, including appropriate modes of
soft tissue & joint mobilization, electrotherapy, therapeutic exercise, and appropriate
to manage problems of the individual’s lower quadrant & lumbar spine structures,
functions, activities and participation, capacity and performance levels associated with the
musculo-skeletal system, for relief of pain&
prevention, restoration and rehabilitation measures for maximum possible functional
CO 6 Prescribe and train for appropriate lower extremity& lumbar spine orthoses, prostheses
and walking aids based on musculoskeletal dysfunction.
321
Affective

physical handling techniques taking into account the patient’s clinical condition, the need
for privacy, the physiotherapist, the resources available and the environment.
CO 8 Demonstrate communication and behavioral skills underpinned by humanitarian approach
while interacting with patients, relatives, health care team members , co-
professionals and society at large
CO 9 list patients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options, their views,
concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved in
CO 10 Examine bioethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent, demonstrating
community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-cultural
competency
treatment.
319
Unit Topics
Hours
1 Management of trauma and their complications: 10
a. Bones – fractures & fracture-dislocations of lower extremity, pelvis&
lumbo-sacral spine and their complications & management
b. Soft tissues injuries of lower extremities & lumbo-sacral spine and their
complications & Management, contused lacerated wounds (CLWs) Burns
complications and management.
c. Overuse-syndromes: Piriformis syndrome, Ischioglueteal bursitis, IT band friction
syndrome, trochanteric bursitis, Jumpers knee, housemaid knee etc
2 Management of degenerative Arthritis with associated 5
conditions
a. Osteoarthritis of Hip joint, knee joint and ankle joint
b. Lumbar spine degenerative conditions like Spondylosis, degenerative disc disease
Spondylolysis, Spondylolisthesis, and Lumbar Canal Stenosis
3. Management of Inflammatory conditions 5

a. Arthritis (including seronegative arthritis) Rheumatoid arthritis, Gout, Septic arthrit
b. Spondylo-arthropathies e.g. Ankylosing Spondylitis.
4. Infectious Diseases of bones & joints of lower extremities, pelvis and lumbo- 03
sacral spine
a. TB Hip,TB knee Pott’sspine
b. Osteomyelitis
5. Congenital & Acquired Deformities of lower extremities & lumbar spine 07

h. Congenital talipo-equinovarus
i. Scoliosis
j. Congenital hip dislocation
k. Genu valgus/varus
l. Coxa vara /valga

6. Peripheral Nerve Injuries of lower extremity & Lumbo-sacral plexus Injuries- 5
complications & management
7. Traumatic Amputation of lower extremity 5
a.Types
b.Complications and management inclusive of prosthetic prescription & training
Total hours 40
320
Examination Scheme
80 marks

Q No 1 Pain /Range of motion assessment (OSPE) 20
Q No 2 Strength/Core strength assessment (OSPE) 20
Q No 3 Case Presentation/OSCE of Lower extremity/ lumbar 40
spine conditions
Total-80

Q No 1 Station 1 (OSPE) 20
Total-40

1. Therapeutic Exercise -O’Sullivan, 5thedition
2. Orthopaedic Physical Therapy –Donatelli, 3rdedition
3. Cash’s Textbook of Orthopedics & Rheumatology for Physiotherapists,4thedition
4. Tidy’s Physical Therapy, 15thedition
5. Manual Mobilization of Extremity Joints –Kaltenborn, 8thedition
6. Therapeutic Exercise: Foundations and Techniques - Kolby & Carolyn Kisner, 7thedition
7. Physical Rehabilitation – Susan O'sullivan, 5thedition

2.Maitland's Peripheral Manipulation Elly Hengeveld
3.Neural tissue mobilization –Butler
4. Brukner & Khan's Clinical Sports Medicine - Peter
5. Brukner, Karim Khan(Mcgraw Medical)
5.Therapeutic Exercise: Moving Toward Function - Carrie M. Hall, Lori
6.TheinBrody7.Manual Mobilization of Extremity Joints-Kaltenborn
7.Neural Tissue Mobilization -Butler
8.Taping Techniques –Rose
MacDonald
10. Clinical Orthopaedic rehabilitation- Broadsman
321

Name of the Course Cardiovascular & Respiratory Physiotherapy II
Course Code BPT-050

Cognitive
Identify and analyze respiratory dysfunction in terms of biomechanical, and Bio-
CO 1 physical basis and correlate the same with the health condition, radiological, and
biochemical investigations, PFT,ECG,ABG, and arrive at appropriate Physical
therapy diagnosis using WHO-ICF tool
CO 2 Apply the knowledge about contextual factors to enhance capacity and performance
Psychomotor
Apply the skill to deliver pulmonary rehabilitation, breathing retraining, lung re-
expansion, breathing control, lung hygiene, nebulization, postural drainage, AD, ACBT,
CO 3 thoracic expansion, PNF, respiratory muscle strengthening, ergonomic applications,
home program, training for flexibility, endurance, muscle strength and
aerobic capacity, assistive devices
Plan, prescribe appropriate, safe physiotherapy interventions with clinical reasoning
CO 4 for and prevention of impairments, activity limitations, participation restrictions and
environmental barriers related to pulmonary dysfunction in acute care settings, at
home , work place, in society & in leisure activities.
Affective

CO 6 Demonstrate behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating with
views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved
CO 8 Examine ethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
demonstrating community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-
cultural competency
CO 9 Respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to
322
reach decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
colleagues from the medical and other professions, by listening, sharing and
responding
Sr. No Topics Hours

Applied Respiratory Anatomy
a. Upper respiratory tract
b. Lower respiratory tract – Trachea, Bronchial tree, Broncho-pulmonary
1 segments 6
c. Respiratory unit, hilum of lung.
d. Muscles of respiration
e. Pleura, intra pleural space, intra pleural pressure, surfactant
Applied Respiratory Physiology
a. Mechanics of respiration – Chest wall movements, lung & chest wall
compliance, work of breathing
2 b. V/Q relationship, airway resistance 6
c. Respiratory centre, Neural & chemical regulation of respiration
d. Lung volumes and lung capacities, Spiro meter, lung function test
e. Pulmonary circulation, Lung sounds, cough reflex.
Investigations and Exercise Testing
a. Investigation & Clinical Implication - X-ray, PFT, Ventilation –perfusion
scans, MRI,HRCT.
b. Stress testing : 6 Minute Walk test & Harward Step test

3 6
Skill &Interpretation
c. Shuttle Walk Test & Modified Bruce Protocol (should be interpretation

only)
Drugs Acting on Respiratory System
a. Cough
4 b. Bronchial asthma 6
c. C.O.P.D.
Management of Pulmonary Disorders

Chronic Obstructive Lung Disease and Restrictive Lung Disease - Definition,
Etiology, Clinical features, signs and symptoms, complications, management and
5 8
treatment of following lung diseases :
Chronic Bronchitis, Emphysema, Asthma, Bronchiectasis, Cystic Fibrosis, Upper
Respiratory Tract Infections, Pneumonia, Tuberculosis, Fungal Diseases,
323
Interstitial Lung Diseases, Diseases of the pleura, diaphragm and chest wall
Respiratory failure – Definition, types, causes, clinical features, diagnosis and
management, Carcinoma of lung
Physiotherapy management of infectious disease such as COVID, Severe Acute
Respiratory Syndrome, Middle East Respiratory Syndrome and others
Management of Disorders of Chest Wall
Definition, Clinical features, diagnosis and choice of management for the
following disorders – Chest wall deformities, Chest wall tumors, Spontaneous
6 Pneumothorax , Pleural Effusion, Empyema Thoracis, Lung abscess, 6
Bronchogenic Carcinoma , Bronchial Adenomas, Metastatic tumors of the Lung ,
Tracheal Stenosis , Congenital tracheomalacia , Neoplasms of the trachea ,
Lesions of the Mediastinum.
a. Bronchial Hygiene Therapy- Postural Drainage, Forced Expiratory
Technique, ACBT, Autogenic Drainage
b. Adjunct Therapy –Flutter & PEP Therapy
c. Therapeutic positioning to improve ventilation & perfusion matching,
d. Therapeutic positioning to alleviated dyspnoea
e. Nebulization &Humidification,
7 8
f. Lung Expansion Therapy
g. Neurophysiologic facilitation of respiration
h. Therapeutic exercise program to strengthen respiratory muscles
i. Ergonomic advice, energy conservation advice, Home exercise

Program, & modifications of contextual factors.
j. Applied Yoga in Respiratory conditions
Physiotherapy Management in Neonatal & Paediatric Respiratory Infection
a. ARDS
b. Meconium aspiration
8 c. Pneumonitis 6
d. Pneumonia
e. Childhood Asthma
f. Cystic fibrosis and chronic lung disease
324
9 Pulmonary Rehabilitation (A.A.C.V.P.R. /A.T.S. guidelines) 8
a. Definition,
b. Indications
c. Contraindications
d. Components of management
e. Outcome measures
TOTAL HOURS 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks

Section 1
Section 2
Total= 80
No. of Question X
Short answer 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
Total Total= 40

1. Respiratory Physiology – John B.West
2. Respiratory pathophysiology – John B.West.
3. Nunn’s Applied respiratory Physiology
4. Cardiorespiratory Physiotherapy – Donna Frownfelter
325
1. Egan’s Respiratory Physiology.

2. Tidy’s Physiotherapy
3. Cardiorespiratory physiotherapy - Pryor &Prasad
326

Name of the Course Cardiovascular & Respiratory Physiotherapy II
Course Code BPT-051

Cognitive
Identify and analyze respiratory dysfunction in terms of biomechanical, and Bio-
CO 1 physical basis and correlate the same with the health condition, radiological, and
biochemical investigations, PFT,ECG,ABG, and arrive at appropriate Physical
therapy diagnosis using WHO-ICF tool
CO 2 Apply the knowledge about contextual factors to enhance capacity and performance
Psychomotor
Apply the skill to deliver pulmonary rehabilitation, breathing retraining, lung re-
expansion, breathing control, lung hygiene, nebulization, postural drainage, AD, ACBT,
CO 3 thoracic expansion, PNF, respiratory muscle strengthening, ergonomic applications,
home program, training for flexibility, endurance, muscle strength and
aerobic capacity, assistive devices
Plan, prescribe appropriate, safe physiotherapy interventions with clinical reasoning
CO 4 for and prevention of impairments, activity limitations, participation restrictions and
environmental barriers related to pulmonary dysfunction in acute care settings, at
home , work place, in society & in leisure activities.
Affective

CO 6 Demonstrate behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while communicating with
views, concerns, values, preferences and extent to which patients want to be involved
CO 8 Examine ethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
demonstrating community responsibility, good communication skills and socio-
cultural competency
CO 9 Respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to
327
reach decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
colleagues from the medical and other professions, by listening, sharing and
responding
Sr. No Topics Hours

Positioning, Breathing Control, Mechanical Assistive Devices, Nebulization and
1 Humidification, Respiratory PNF, Maximal and submaximal exercise testing. 10
Respiratory Muscle Strengthening, Relaxation techniques, Airway Clearance

2 Techniques, PEP devices. 10
Exercises for vascular disorders, Special test for venous and arterial disorders,
3 Berger’s exercises, Wound Care, Coughing and huffing techniques, Pulmonary 10
Rehabilitation.
Strength training, exercises to improve flexibility and endurance,
4 Pain Relief, Home program 10
Total 40
Internal Practical/Clinical Examination under CBCS - 40 Marks

Relaxation technique (OSPE)
Total = 40
328

Relaxation technique (OSPE)
Q No 3 Case presentation/OSCE of respiratory condition 40
Total = 80

1. Respiratory Physiology – John B.West
2. Respiratory pathophysiology – John B.West.
3. Nunn’s Applied respiratory Physiology
4. Cardiorespiratory Physiotherapy – Donna Frownfelter
1. Egan’s Respiratory Physiology.

2. Tidy’s Physiotherapy
3. Cardiorespiratory physiotherapy - Pryor &Prasad
329

Name of the Course Neurophysiotherapy PT II
Course Code BPT-052

Cognitive
CO 1 Be able to identify and analyze movement dysfunction due to neuromuscular
skeletal disorders in terms of biomechanical and biophysical basis, correlate the
same with the health condition, routine electrophysiological, radiological and
biochemical investigations, and arrive at appropriate physical therapy diagnosis
using WHO-ICF with clinical reasoning.
CO 2 Be able to plan realistic goals based on the knowledge of prognosis of the disease of
the nervous system and prescribe appropriate, safe evidence based physiotherapy
interventions with clinical reasoning
CO 3 Understand infection control principles, best practices and techniques
applicable to a range of setting where clients with neurological
conditions would receive physiotherapy services.
CO 4 Know determinants of health (environmental, nutritional, self-
management/behavioral factors) and chronic disease management principles
related to neurological health
Psychomotor

evaluation in order to prioritize patient's problems.
CO 6 Be able to select timely physiotherapeutic interventions to reduce morbidity and
physiotherapy management strategies, suitable for the patients‟ problems and
indicator conditions based on the best available evidence.
modalities, joint and soft tissue mobilizations and ergonomic advice for
neuromuscular skeletal systems, contextual factors to enhance performance of
activities and participation in society.
Affective
CO 8 Be able to develop behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while
communicating with patients, relatives, society and co-professionals, to promote
330
individual and community health
Unit Topics Hours

PHYSIOTHERAPY MANAGEMENT – PAEDIATRIC
1 Cerebral Palsy 6
• Etiology and type
• Assessment
• Differential diagnosis
• Management
2 Down’s syndrome and other genetic disorders 5
3 Neural tube defects : Spina Bifida and Hydrocephalus 5
4. Brachial Plexus Injuries 5
5. Infectious disorders of CNS 5
6. Post Poliomyelitis Residual Paralysis 5
7. D.M.D. & other Myopathies 7
8. S.M.A. / H.S.M.N. 5
9. Pediatric extra pyramidal disorders 5
10. Autism spectrum disorders 6
11. High Risk infant and NICU management and Early intervention with 6
Neurodevelopmental screening tests
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Marks
Section 1
Section 2
331

Total= 80
No. of Question X
Total Total= 40
1. Patricia A D. Cash’s Text book for Physio Therapist in Neurological disorders Jaypee bros;
4th Edition 1991
7. Shepherd R. Cerebral palsy in infancy. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone Elsevier;2014.
8. Levitt S, Addison A. Treatment of cerebral palsy and motor delay.5th Edition.2010
9. Pourtney T. Physiotherapy for children.1st Edition.2007
10. Campbell S K. Peadritic Neurologic Physical Therapy. 2nd Edition. 1998
11. Bundy A C. Sensory Integration Theory and Practice.2nd Edition.2002

2. Tecklin J. Pediatric physical therapy. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkens;
1999.
3. Donaghy M. Brain's diseases of the nervous system. Oxford: Oxford University Press;
2009.
4. Janet C, Roberta S. Neurological Rehabilitation - Optimizing Motor Performance. 2nd
Edition. 1998
332

Name of the Course Neurophysiotherapy PT II
Course Code BPT-053
Course Description Core practical

Cognitive
CO 1 Be able to identify and analyze movement dysfunction due to neuromuscular
skeletal disorders in terms of biomechanical and biophysical basis, correlate the
same with the health condition, routine electrophysiological, radiological and
biochemical investigations, and arrive at appropriate physical therapy diagnosis
using WHO-ICF with clinical reasoning.
CO 2 Be able to plan realistic goals based on the knowledge of prognosis of the disease of
the nervous system and prescribe appropriate, safe evidence based physiotherapy
interventions with clinical reasoning
CO 3 Understand infection control principles, best practices and techniques
applicable to a range of setting where clients with neurological
conditions would receive physiotherapy services.
CO 4 Know determinants of health (environmental, nutritional, self-
management/behavioural factors) and chronic disease management principles
related to neurological health
Psychomotor
evaluation in order to prioritize patient's problems.
CO 6 Be able to select timely physiotherapeutic interventions to reduce morbidity and
physiotherapy management strategies, suitable for the patients‟ problems and
indicator conditions based on the best available evidence.
modalities, joint and soft tissue mobilizations and ergonomic advice for
neuromuscular skeletal systems, contextual factors to enhance performance of
activities and participation in society.
Affective
CO 8 Be able to develop behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while
communicating with patients, relatives, society and co-professionals, to promote
individual and community health
333
Unit Topics Hours

PHYSIOTHERAPY MANAGEMENT – PAEDIATRIC
1 Management of Cerebral Palsy 5
2 Management of Down’s syndrome and other genetic disorders 4

3 Management of Neural tube defects : Spina Bifida and Hydrocephalus 4
4. Management of Brachial Plexus Injuries 4
5. Management of Infectious disorders of CNS 2
6. Management of Post Poliomyelitis Residual Paralysis 4
7. Management of D.M.D. & other Myopathies 4
8. Management of S.M.A. / H.S.M.N. 3
9. Management of Pediatric extra pyramidal disorders 2
10. Management of Autism spectrum disorders 4
11. Management of High Risk infant and NICU management and Early 4
intervention with Neurodevelopmental screening tests
Total 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Practical question paper pattern for University Semester Examination under CBCS - 80 marks

Q No 1 Station 1(OSPE) 20
Q No 3 Case Presentation/OSCE on pediatric neuro conditions 40
(OSCE)
Total-80

Total-40
334
1. Patricia A D. Cash’s Text book for Physio Therapist in Neurological disorders

2. Jaypee bros; 4th Edition1991
6. Patricia M D. Right in the middle. Springer-Verlag. 1990
8. Shepherd R. Cerebral palsy in infancy. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone Elsevier;
2014.
9. Levitt S, Addison A. Treatment of cerebral palsy and motor delay.5th Edition.2010
10. Pourtney T. Physiotherapy for children.1st Edition.2007
11. Campbell S K. Peadritic Neurologic Physical Therapy. 2nd Edition. 1998
12. Bundy A C. Sensory Integration Theory and Practice.2nd Edition.2002
1. Umphred D. Neurological rehabilitation. Saint Louis: Mosby/Elsevier; 2013.

2. Tecklin J. Pediatric physical therapy. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkens;
1999.
3. Donaghy M. Brain's diseases of the nervous system. Oxford: Oxford University
Press; 2009.
4. Janet C, Roberta S. Neurological Rehabilitation - Optimising Motor Performance.
2ndEdition. 1998
335

Name of the Course Research Project
Course Code BPT-054
Course Description Practical

CO 1 Apply the steps in Physiotherapy research process, define research question, frame
research hypothesis using PICO format, choose the appropriate study design, sampling
method, study location, apply guidelines such as STROBE, CONSORT, GRASS etc as
applicable to the study design, determine sample size, inclusion-exclusion criteria,
select reliable-valid tools for evaluation of participants, describe detailed methods to be
followed and statistical plan for data analysis
CO 2 Apply knowledge of biostatistics for research work.
CO 3 Acquire skills of reviewing literature
CO 4 Prepare project synopsis and submit to institutional ethical committee for
approval
Unit Topics
1. Review literature in proposed area of project 05
2. Write a Research Proposal 10
a. Define problem
b. Review Literature
c. Formulate a question
d. Inclusion & Exclusion criteria
e. Study design, Sampling technique, Sample size
f. Methodology- Data collection & method for analysis
g. Informed Consent Steps of documentation
3. Research Fundamentals 10
a. Define measurement
b. Measurement framework
c. Scales of measurement
d. Pilot Study
e. Types of variables
f. Reliability Validity
g. Datasheet
4. Research Ethics 05
336
a. Apply Ethics in Research

b. Ethical principles that govern research with human subjects
c. Prepare ethically valid informed consent form for
research project
5. Statistical Plan 10
a. Basics of testing of hypothesis – Null and alternate hypothesis, typeI
and type II errors, level of significance and power of the test,pvalue.
b. Tests of significance (parametric) - t – test (paired and unpaired), Chi
square test and test of proportion, one way analysis of variance.
c. Repeated measures analysis of variance.
d. Tests of significance (non-parametric)-Mann-Whitney utest,
Wilcoxon test,
e. Kruskal-Wallis analysis of variance. Friedman’s analysis of variance.
f. Correlation and Regression
g. Simple correlation – Pearson’s and Spearman’s; testing the
significance of correlation coefficient, linear and multiple regressions.
6. Submission of Research Proposal
Total 40
Sr. Rating Remark

Criteria
No 1 2 3 4 5
I Statement of the problem
• Significance of the problem selected
• Framing of title and objectives
II Literature Review
1. Inclusion of related studies on the topic and its
relevance
2. Operational definition
III Research Design
IV Sampling Design
population
2. Specification of the inclusion & exclusion
criteria
V Plan of Data Collection Procedure
337
tool
3. Use of appropriate procedure/ method for data
collection
VI Plan of Analysis of Data
2. Clear presentation of tables(title, table &
column heading)
VII Ethical Aspects
VIII Presentation of synopsis
Signature of the Evaluator
Students will be marked on a structured evaluation sheet during Proposal synopsis presentation for
Internal Assessment and for University Examination.
1. Hicks CM. Research Methods for Clinical Therapists

2. Portney LG. Foundations of Clinical Research: Applications to Evidence-Based
Practice.
3. Kothari CR. Research methodology: Methods and techniques.
4. Mahajan BK. Methods inbiostatistics.
338

Name of the Course Neuro developmental Techniques
Course Code SEC09
Course Description Skill based Elective Course Theory and Practical

1. To apply the knowledge of theories of development as a basis for developmental therapy for
children and young adults with disability.
2. To develop observational skills of motor and functional abilities/disabilities relative to their
clients’ abilities.
3. To demonstrate techniques for physical and functional assessment and clinical measurements using
NDT approach
4. To be able to identify systems impaired underlying developmental difficulty leading to delayed
physical and functional milestones and offer preventive advice.
5. To provide functional therapeutic skills in developing effective intervention strategies using NDT
approach based on developmental principles
6. To effectively plan and implement therapeutic Intervention strategies for physical and functional
development and management in the contexts of the home and the community
7. To Understand the process and be able to perform documentation of progress based on
functional goals.
Unit Topics Theory Practical

1. Principles of Growth and Development 1 -
2. Development from 0 – 6 months of age, 6-12 months of age, 12-18 4 6
months of age, 18-24 months of age and 2 years onwards with
emphasis on Motor & Sensory system.
3. Principles of Neuro developmental Therapy 2 -
4. Neuro developmental Treatment Practice and ICF Model 2 -
5. NDT approach based evaluation based on various age groups 3 10
6. Goal setting and documentation 2
7. Treatment skills 6 20
• Preparing the client
• Head control
• Trunk control
• Transitions in and out from supine to sit, sit to stand,
quadruped, vaulting, kneeling, standing and gait
8. Case based demonstration 4
Total 20 40
339
EXAMINATION SCHEME

No. of Question X
SAQ 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20 Marks
LAQ 2 out of 3 10 2 x10 20 Marks
Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40


Total = 20
340

Total = 20
341

Name of the Course Physiotherapy in Intensive Care Unit
Course Code SEC10
Semester Semester VIII

Cognitive
Explain alterations in normal human structure and functions due to artificial
CO 1 ventilation, prolonged bed-rest, decubitus position in ICU and examine the
correlation between structural and functional impairment.
CO 2 Explain indication and contra-indication of care in intensive care unit (ICU),
provide appropriate interventions to the patient.
Analyze the roles and expertise of health and social care professionals in the
CO3 context of working and functioning as a multi-professional team to the delivery of
safe and high-quality care.
Explain function of artificial airways, ventilators, oxygen therapy, equipment’s
CO 4
used in ICUs, investigations and their interpretations
Psychomotor
CO 5 Apply assessment skills, plan and implement physiotherapy interventions for
patient in Medical and Surgical ICUs, Pediatric ICU, Cardiac Care ICU
CO 6 Monitor function during Physiotherapy treatment
Affective
Demonstrate ability to work with colleagues in ways that best serve the interests of
CO 7 patients, passing on information and handing over care, demonstrating flexibility,
adaptability and a problem-solving approach.
cultural competency
responding.
342
Sr. No. of
Topics
No. Hrs.
1 Anatomical and Physiological differences between the Adult and Pediatric lung 1
2 Respiratory failure – Oxygen Therapy and Mechanical Ventilation. 2
3 Bedside assessment of the patient-Adult & Pediatric 1
4 Introduction to ICU : ICU monitoring –Apparatus, Airways and Tubes used in the ICU
- Physiotherapy in the ICU – Common conditions in the ICU – Tetanus, Head Injury,
Lung Disease, Pulmonary Edema, Multiple Organ Failure, Neuromuscular Disease, 3
Smoke Inhalation, Poisoning, Aspiration, Near Drowning, ARDS, Shock; Dealing with
an Emergency Situation in the ICU.
5 Investigations and tests – Exercise tolerance Testing – Cardiac & Pulmonary,
2
Radiographs, PFT, ABG, ECG, Hematological and Biochemical Tests.
6 Physiotherapy techniques to increase lung volume – controlled mobilization,
positioning, breathing exercises, Neurophysiological Facilitation of Respiration, 2
Mechanical aids - Incentive Spirometry, CPAP,IPPB.
7 Physiotherapy techniques to decrease the work of breathing – Measures to optimize the
balance between energy supply and demand, positioning, Breathing re-education – 2
Breathing control techniques, mechanical aids – IPPB, CPAP, BiPAP.
8 Physiotherapy techniques to clear secretions – Hydration, Humidification & Nebulization,
Mobilisation and Breathing exercises, Postural Drainage, Manual techniques –
Percussion, Vibration and Shaking, Rib Springing, ACBT, Autogenic Drainage, 2
Mechanical Aids – PEP, Flutter, IPPB, Facilitation of Cough and Huff,
Nasopharyngeal Suctioning
9 Pharmacological management – Drugs to prevent and treat inflammation, Drugs to treat
Bronchospasm, Drugs to treat Breathlessness, Drugs to help sputum clearance, Drugs to
2
inhibit coughing, Drugs to improve ventilation, Drugs to reduce pulmonary
hypertension, Drug delivery doses, Inhalers and Nebulisers.
10 Neonatal and Pediatric Physiotherapy – Chest physiotherapy for children, The neonatal
unit, Modifications of chest physiotherapy for specific neonatal disorders, Emergencies 3
in the neonatal unit
Practicals: Introduction to ICU, simulated case discussions, treatment techniques 40
Total 60
343
Examination Scheme
This course will not be assessed as Semester University Examination. Assessment

will be conducted at constituent unit level

Total = 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40

Section 1
344

Total = 20
1. Chest physiotherapy in ICU – IanMckenzie

2. Mechanical ventilation – David Chang
3. Management of mechanically ventilated patient – LynellePierce
345

Name of the Course Splinting and Bracing
Course Code SEC011
Course Description Skill based Elective Course theory and practical

1. Acquire knowledge about biomechanical principles of application of variety of aids &
appliances used for ambulation, protection &prevention.
2. Learn about the principles

oftheprescription&thecheckoutproceduresofaids&appliancesasperthephysicaldysfunction of
the person.
3. Acquire in brief knowledge about various material used for splints/ Orthoses &prostheses
and their selection criteria
Unit Topics Theory Practical

1. Introduction to bioengineering-
Classification of Aids & appliances (Splints/ Orthoses for spine, 2 3
upper & lower limb; Prostheses for Lower limbs & Upper limbs)
2. Biomechanical principles in designing of appliances & 10
assessment; Procedures for static & dynamic alignment
of the Orthoses &Prostheses:
a. Introduction to Orthotics, Solid Ankle foot Orthoses (AFO) 1
b. Articulated AFO, Various Shoe modifications 1
c. Knee Ankle Foot Orthoses (KAFO) 1
d. Knee Orthoses (KO) 1
e. Hip Knee Ankle Foot orthoses (HKAFO), Hip Orthoses (HO) 1
f. Fracture Bracing and Flexible Lumbo-sacral Orthoses (LSO) 1
and Thoraco-Lumbo-sacral Orthoses(TLSO)
g. Rigid TLSOs and Cervical Orthoses (CO) 1
h. Orthotic mgmt. of Scoliosis, Milwaukee and low profile scoliosis 1
orthoses, Scheuermann‟s Kyphosis & Osteoporosis
i. Orthoses for LBP, Introduction to Upper limb Orthotics and 1
Shoulder orthoses(SO)
j. Shoulder (SO),Elbow Orthoses (EO) & Wrist Hand Orthoses 2
(WHO)
k. Introduction to Gait in relation to the use of Orthoses / 1
Prostheses
346
l. Prosthetic management of Forefoot amputees 1

m. Prosthetic management of Syme’s and hind foot Amputees 1
n. Below Knee Prosthesis & Prosthetic foot pieces 1
o. Alignment of Below Knee Prosthesis and gait deviations 1
p. Prosthetic Knees and Knee Disarticulation mgmt. 1
q. Above Knee Prosthesis, alignment, gait deviations 1
r. AK Checkouts, Prosthetic mgmt. of Hip Disarticulation, 1
hemipelvectomy, Bilateral amputees and Congenital cases
s. Introduction to Upper Limb Prosthetics, Prosthetic mgmt. of
3
Partial Hand amputees
t. Cosmetic Prostheses for all levels of Amputations 1
u. Task Specific Prostheses, Prosthetic mgmt. of
Wrist Disarticulation, Myoelectric Below 3
Elbow prosthesis
v. Body Powered Below Elbow Prostheses and it’s components 1
w. Harnessing in BE 1
x. Prosthetic management of Elbow Disarticulation and Above 1
Elbow Amputation.
3. Orthosis prescription criteria based on clinical scenario 5 5
4. Project: 3 3
Temporary splints: To fabricate ONE splinteach [to use
P.O. P, aluminum
strips /sheets /wires rubber bands, Rexin, Orfit,etc]
Splinting- Practical Demonstration of the following
a) Cock up(dorsal/volar)
b) Outrigger,
c) Opponence splint
d) Anterior and posterior guard splints for gait training,
e) Foot drop splint
f) Facial splint
g) Mallet Finger Splint
h) C bar for 1st web space offhand
Total 20 40
347
EXAMINATION SCHEME

No. of Question X
SAQ 4 out of 5 5 4x5 20
LAQ 2 out of 3 10 2 x10 20
Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40
348


Total = 20

Total = 20
RECOMMEMDED TEXTBOOKS
1. Orthotics in Functional Rehabilitation of Lower limb- Deborah A.

Nawoczenski, Marcia E.Epler
2. Orthotics –clinical Practice and Rehabilitation Technology- Published by-
ChurchillLivingstone
3. Atlas of Orthotics- Biomechanical principles and application (American Academy of
Orthopedic Surgeons)- The C. V. MosbyCompany
349
Name of Program Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)

Name of the Course Integumentary Physiotherapy
Course Code SEC012

CO1 Explain diseases and disorders of the skin, Describe the effect of injury to the skin and the
process of healing
CO 2 Explain the, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations & m e d i c a l / surgical
management of various integumentary disease.
CO 3 Perform clinical examination; apply and interpret special tests in both
preoperative and post-operative patients
Unit Topics Hours

1. Integumentary system- Applied Anatomy, Structure and function of skin
2
2. Assessment of integumentary system 2
3. Burns (Head, neck , face thoracic and inhalations burns) 4
4. Scars and Keloid 2
5. Bed sores( Pathophysiology, Management) 2
6. Wounds and ulcer- Wounds &Ulcers, Cellulitis– classification, healing 4

process, management, bandaging, Dressing solutions and its uses and
debridement Procedure, hand washing and universal precautions.
7. Basal cell carcinoma, Squamous cell carcinoma 2
Practical’s: Burns dressings, mobilization, splints and bracing, wound 40

management, electrotherapy for wound healing
Total 58
350
EXAMINATION SCHEME

No. of Question X
SAQ 8 out of 10 5 8x5 40 Marks
Total Total= 40
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Total= 40

Total = 40

351
Total = 20

Total = 20
352

Semester Semester VIII
Students will be learning about physiotherapeutic management in various conditions

and application of hands on skills on patients.

Total = 40
*Students will be evaluated as per their level of knowledge level.
EXAMINATION SCHEME
No 3.7 and 3.11 of AC 41/2021

Q No 1 Case1 20
Total = 40

Q No 1 Case1 10
Q No 2 Case 2 10
Total = 20
353
Internship - Semester IX
Semester
Course Examination #
Course Description Clinical Postings Credits Hours
Code
Marks
BPTCLT009 Core Clinical Training Musculoskeletal PT 3 260 10
BPTCLT010 Core Clinical Training Cardiovascular and 3 260 10

Respiratory PT
BPTCLT011 Core Clinical Training Neurophysiotherapy 3 260 10
BPTCLT012 Core Clinical Training Public Health Promotion 1 80 10
Total 12 1040 80
354

Name of the Course Core Clinical training
Course Code BPTCLT009, BPTCLT010/ BPTCLT011/ BPTCLT012
Course Description Clinical Practice
Credit per Semester 3+3+3+1 credits
Hours per Semester 260+260+260+80= 860 hours
Course Learning Outcomes : The student will be able to

Cognitive
demonstrate academic skills and knowledge related to understanding the structural and
CO 1
functional of human body and applied anatomy, physiology in physiotherapy practice.
apply and outline pathology of medical and surgical conditions in context with
CO 2
Physiotherapy, interpret& use medical communication.
apply knowledge of biomechanics of human movement in musculoskeletal,
CO 3 neurological and cardio-respiratory conditions in planning, recommending, and
executing Physiotherapy management.
outline and implement Physiotherapy management by co-relating assessment and
examination skills of clinical subjects like Orthopedics, General Surgery, Medicine,
CO 4
Neurology, Pediatrics, Dermatology & Gynecology & Obstetrics, Community
Medicine and Sociology
describe and analyze concepts of energy conservation, global warming and pollution
CO 5
and justify optimal use of available resources.
Psychomotor
record a patient’s medical history, including family and social history; communicate
CO 6
with relatives or other caretakers where ever appropriate.
assess structural, functional impairments, compare performance and capacity through
CO 7 clinical examination and risk evaluation, prioritize goals, recommend Physiotherapy
treatment and carry out independent consultation with a patient.
demonstrate skill in maneuvers of passive movements, massage, stretching,
strengthening, and various manual therapy techniques, integrate Physiotherapy
CO 8 evaluation skills including electro diagnosis on patients to arrive at a Functional/ Physical
Diagnosis in musculoskeletal, neurological, cardiovascular and pulmonary
conditions and health promotion strategies
conduct health and sport promotion camps and offer services in evaluation of fitness and
ergonomic applications to special populations like school children, college students,
CO 9
industrial workers, geriatric homes, specially abled children, pregnant
women, etc
Listpatients’ questions, their understanding of condition and treatment options, their
CO 10
views,concerns,values,preferencesandextenttowhichpatientswanttobeinvolved
355

demonstrate ability of critical thinking, scientific enquiry, experiential learning,
CO 11 personal finance, entrepreneurship and managerial skills related to task in day-to-day
work for personal & societal growth.
manage time and prioritize tasks, and work autonomously when necessary and
CO 12
appropriate.
function effectively as a mentor and teacher including contributing to the appraisal,
CO 13 assessment and review of colleagues, providing effective feedback, and taking
advantage of opportunities to develop these skills.
Assess and recognize the severity of a clinical presentation and a need for immediate
CO 14
emergency care.
Apply basic first aid and cardio-pulmonary resuscitation or direct other team members
CO 15
to carry out resuscitation.
CO 16 information systems for data storage, retrieval, prepare health promotion material for
patients, research and education.
Affective
communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with individuals, groups, patients, care-
givers, colleagues, professionals regardless of their age, social, cultural or ethnic
CO 17
backgrounds or their disabilities including when English is not the persons first
language.
communicate by spoken, written and electronic methods (including medical records),
CO 18
and be aware of other methods of communication used by patients.
communicate appropriately in difficult circumstances, such as when breaking bad news, and
when discussing sensitive issues, such as alcohol consumption, smoking or obesity, with
CO 19
difficult or violent patients, people with mental illness and with
vulnerable population
respond to patients concerns and preferences, and respect the rights of patients to reach
CO 20 decisions with their doctor about their treatment and care and to refuse or limit
treatment.
examine ethical and legal issues in patient care, obtain informed consent,
cultural competency
establish the foundations for lifelong learning and continuing professional
CO 22 development, including a professional development portfolio containing reflections,
achievements and learning needs.
continually and systematically reflect on practice and, whenever necessary, integrate
CO 23
that reflection into action, using improvement techniques and audit.
demonstrateabilitytoworkwithcolleaguesinwaysthatbestservetheinterestsof
CO 24
patients, passing on information and handing over care, demonstrating flexibility,
356
adaptability and a problem-solving approach.

demonstrate ability to build team capacity and positive working relationships and
CO 25 undertake various team roles including leadership and the ability to accept leadership
by others.
During the course of Internship, students will be expected to
• present cases and document the same in 3 clinical placement areas and conduct health
promotional activities.
• Present required number of cases to the respective clinical supervisors, document the
same in the Log book, seek scoring on Case Evaluation Assessment Form from clinical
supervisors, for each case, failing which the particular posting will be repeated.
• Attend all clinical postings with not more than one day of absenteeism per month. Interns
remaining absent for a greater number of days will have to compensate the days of
absenteeism after completion of the rotatory internship placement schedule.
• follow appropriate dress code to be followed at all the clinical posting areas.
Duration in Assignment/Case
Clinical Placement Area
Weeks Documentations
Musculoskeletal PT 6 3
Neurophysiotherapy 6 3
Cardiovascular & Pulmonary PT 6 3
Public Health Promotion 2 2 camps/promotional activity
357
Case Evaluation Assessment Form
Sr No Criteria 5 4 3 2 1
1 Attitude –Towards patient, self-introduction
Relevant history taken
2 Physical Assessment Skills
Choice of tests
Testing of all functional impairments
ICF
3 Cognitive- problem solving
clinical decision & reasoning
4 Planning treatment- short term goals
5 Long term goals – revaluation
6 Explanation of home program to patient and relatives
7 Skills of Treatment maneuvers
8 Skills of equipment handling
9 Documentation of case
10 Timely submission of assignment
Total Score
Remarks:-
Students will be required to seek the following Summative Evaluation Assessment from
clinical supervisors before rotating to another unit. Unsatisfactory report will result in
student having to repeat the posting.
Sr No Criteria 5 4 3 2 1
1 Punctuality and dress code
2 Attitude towards patients & colleagues
3 Urge for Learning/ Initiative
4 Accountability/Responsibility
5 Administrative ability
(Records/Maintenance of equipment’s)
Total Score/ 25
Remarks:-
358

Name of the Course Research Project
Course Code BPT 055
Course Description Research Project

The student will be able to
Explain the scientific basis for common musculoskeletal, neurological, cardio-
CO 1 respiratory, women’s health related, geriatric and sports related disorders, compare and
contrast Physiotherapy treatment techniques applicable in relevant case scenarios.
Justify selection of appropriate clinical examination and investigation for common
CO 2
clinical conditions and critically analyze clinical findings
Plan, and conduct research experiments to evaluate current practices and design
CO 3 innovative physiotherapy interventions, based on evidence, to provide highest level of
healthcare.
develop understanding appropriate research tools, approaches and theories applicable to that
theme, develop well-defined and clear research question of scholarly significance,and
CO 4
that the dissertation develops a theoretically and methodologically informed and
evidence-based answer to that question.
Critically appraise the results of relevant qualitative and quantitative studies as
CO 5
reported in scientific literature.
CO 6 Outline the ethical issues involved in clinical research.
CO 7 information systems for data storage, retrieval, prepare health promotion materialfor
patients, research and education.
Demonstrate confidentiality, use data protection legislation and codes of practice in all
CO 8
dealings with information.
Students would have submitted synopsis of their research projects and received ethical approval
to conduct project from Institutional Ethics Committee in Semester VIII. They willbe expected
to carry out data collection, analysis, interpretation and prepare project report. Completed
project report along with Research Project Evaluation Report signed by the guide, should be
submitted at least a month before end of internship.
359
Research Project Report Evaluation Guidelines:
Criteria for evaluating a research project report: The following guidelines and criteria should
be applied when assessing a dissertation.
Guidelines to Prepare Internship Research Proposal & Project
7. Selection of Research Problem:

Identify research question based on area of interest, local health care needs, issues of
social concern.
f. State the problem in brief, concise, clear.
g. State the purpose of selected study &topic.
h. State the objectives of proposal/project.
i. Prepare conceptual framework based on operational definition.
j. Write scope of research proposal/project.
8. Organizing Review of Literature

e. Study related and relevant literature which helps to decide conceptual framework
and research design to be selected for the study
f. Search specific books, bulletins, periodicals, reports, published dissertations,
encyclopedia and textbooks
g. Organize literature as per operational definition
h. Prepare summary table for review of literature
9. Research Methodology: To determine logical structure & methodology for

research project.
i. Decide and state approach of study i.e. experimental or non-experimental
j. Define/find out variables to observe effects on decided items &procedure
k. Prepare simple tool or questionnaire or observational checklist to collect data.
l. Determined sample and sampling method
m. Mode of selection ii) Criteria iii) Size of sample iv) Plan when, where anyhow
data will be collected.
n. Test validity of constructed tool
o. Check reliability by implementing tool before pilot study(10% of sample size)
p. Conduct pilot study by using constructed tool for 10% selected sample size
10. Data collection: To implement prepared tool

d. Decide location
e. Time
360
f. Write additional information in separate exercise book to support inferences and

interpretation
11. Data analysis and processing presentation

h. Use appropriate method of statistical analysis i.e. frequency and percentage
i. Use clear frequency tables, appropriate tables, graphs and figures.
j. Interpretation of data:
k. In relation to objectives
l. Hypothesis
m. Variable of study or project
n. Writing concise report
12. Writing Research Report

c. Aims:
vi. To organize materials to write project report
vii. To make comprehensive full factual information
viii. To make appropriate language and style of writing
ix. To make authoritative documentation by checking footnotes, references &
bibliography
x. To use computers & appropriate software
361

Sr.
Criteria Rating Remark
No
1 2 3 4 5
I Statement of the problem
Significance of the problem selected
Framing of title and objectives
II Literature Review
Inclusion of related studies on the topic and its
relevance
Operational definition
III Research Design

IV Sampling Design
population
5. Specification of the inclusion &exclusion
criteria
V Data Collection Procedure

tool
6. Use of appropriate procedure/method for data
Collection
VI Analysis of Data & Interpretation

5. Clear presentation of tables(title, table&
column heading)
VII Ethical Aspects

362

VIII Interpretation of the finding
& appropriate discussion of the results
IX Conclusion
Summary & recommendations
X Presentation/ Report Writing

Total
363
MGM INSTITUTE OF HEALTH SCIENCES
(Deemed to be University u/s 3 of UGC Act,1956)
Grade 'A' Accredited by NAAC
Sector-01, Kamothe, Navi Mumbai - 410209
Tel 022-27432471, 022-27432994, Fax 022-27431094
E-mail- registrar@mgmuhs.com Website :www.mgmuhs.com

Bachelor of Physiotherapy (CBCS)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bachelor of Physiotherapy (CBCS)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MGM INSTITUTE OF HEALTH SCIENCES

(Deemed to be University u/s 3 of UGC Act, 1956)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

(with effect from 2019-2020 Batch onwards)

Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)

Amended upto AC-44/2022, Dated 09/12/2022

MGM SCHOOL OF PHYSIOTHERAPY

Contact: at.: 02227437866

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

BACHELOR OF PHYSIOTHERAPY (BPT)

Vision and Mission of MGM Schoolof Physiotherapy ............................................................... 3

Vision and Mission of MGM School of Physiotherapy

Name of the Degree Offered: Bachelor in Physiotherapy (BPT)

Duration of Program: 4 ½ years (4 years Academics + 6 months’ compulsory rotator

First Semester August

Physiotherapy or Physical Therapy (PT) is a Movement Science with an established theoretical

Physiotherapy is a branch of modern medical science which includes examination, assessment,

III. Objectives of the Bachelor’s in Physiotherapy (BPT) program

1. Ethical, evidence-based, efficient Physiotherapy treatment of adult as well as pediatric

5. Prevent impairments, activity limitations, participatory restrictions and disabilities in

IV. Physiotherapy Graduate Attributes

The following graduate attributes are considered as “essential requirements” to strengthen

that is socio-culturally relevant to each patient.

V. Qualification Descriptors for Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT)program

VI. Program Outcomes for Bachelor of Physiotherapy Program

Revised as per Resolution no 4.10 of AC-42/2022 dated 26/04/2022

To demonstrate behavioral skills and humanitarian approach while

PO 5 To apply knowledge of pathological, pharmacological and biopsychosocial aspects

VII. Program Specific Outcomes for Bachelor of Physiotherapy Program

Establish the foundations for lifelong learning and continuing professional

Learn and work effectively within a multi-professional team

Physiotherapist as a Scholar and a Scientist

The graduate will be able to:

Apply scientific method and approaches to Physiotherapy research

PSO 17 Outline the ethical issues involved in clinical research.

The graduate will be able to

Record a patient’s medical history, including family and social history;

Communicate effectively with patients and colleagues in a health context

Communicate clearly, sensitively and effectively with patients, caregivers, and

Provide immediate care in medical emergencies

IX. CBCS Definition and Benefits:

9.1 Definitions of Key Words:

laboratory work/ outreach activities/ project work/ Objectively Structured Viva

X. Semester System and Choice Based Credit System

Lecture - L Tutorial - T Practical - P Clinical Research

1 Credit 1 Hour 2 Hours 2 Hours 3 Hours 2 Hours

RP* Maximum Credit 20 – 25 / Semester

a. Types of Courses: Courses in the programme are of three kinds:

1. Core Course: A course, which should compulsorily be studied by a candidate as a basic

Dissertation / Project: An Elective/Core course designed to acquire special / advanced

XI. Credit Value Per Course & Structure of Syllabus:

Category Credits BPT Syllabus units

Minimum credit allocation will be as per requirements of each course curriculum.

Structure of CBCS BPT Curriculum

ICF Practical Theory

Semester VII Semester VIII Semester IX

BPT042 Musculoskeletal BPT048 Musculoskeletal BPTCLT009 Core Clinical

XII. Selection of Generic Elective and Skills Enhancement Courses:

List of Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses AECC ( Credits=3)

List of Ability Enhancement Elective Course (Credits=2)

List of Generic Elective Course (Credits=2)

List of Skill Based Discipline Specific Elective Courses (Credits=2)

5 SEC005 Hand rehabilitation 7

Elective courses from Swayam/ NPTEL platform [www. https://swayam.gov.in &http://nptel.ac.in]